Skip to main content

Full text of "An introduction to chemical engineering; an elementary textbook for the use of students and use of chemical machinery"

See other formats


IRLF 


SB    3E    3MS 


AN  INTRODUCTION  TO   CHEMICAL 
ENGINEERING 


FROM  THE  SAME  PUBLISHERS 


VOLUMETRIC  ANALYSIS 

By  JOHN  B.  COPPOCK,  B.Sc.(LoND.),  F.C.S. 
Second  edition,  revised  and  enlarged. 
This  book  contains  an  exhaustive  collection 
of  all  the  commoner  determinations  usually 
made  by  potassium  permanganate  solution 
and  standard  solutions  of  acids  and  alkalis. 
Standard  solutions  of  iodine  and  sodium 
theosulphate  are  also  included.  In  crown 
8vo.,  cloth,  100  pp.,  3s.  6d.  net. 

ACIDS,  ALKALIS,  AND  SALTS 

By  G.  H.  J.  ADLAM,  M.A.,  B.Sc.,  F.C.S. 
Describes  in  simple  language  the  properties 
of  the  various  acids,  etc.,  and  their  uses. 
In  crown  8vo. ,  cloth,   112  pp.,  2s.  6d.  net. 


SIR  ISAAC  PITMAN  AND  SONS,  LTD. 
i  AMEN  CORNER,  LONDON,  E.C.  4 


AN    INTRODUCTION    TO v 
CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 


AN   ELEMENTARY  TEXTBOOK  FOR  THE 

USE  OF  STUDENTS  AND  USERS  OF 

CHEMICAL   MACHINERY 


BY 


A.    F.    ALLEN 

B.SC.HONS.,  F.C.S.,  LL.B.,  LATE  CAPT.  R.A.F. 


WITH   177    ILLUSTRATIONS 


LONDON 
SIR  ISAAC  PITMAN  &  SONS,  LTD.,   i   AMEN  CORNER,  E.C.  4 

(INCORPORATING  WHITTAKER  &  co.) 

BATH,    MELBOURNE,    AND    NEW    YORK 

1920 


PREFACE 

THIS  book  has  been  prepared  for  the  student  of  chemistry 
who  has  received  a  fair  grounding  in  that  science  together 
with  the  correlated  subjects  of  physics  and  mathematics. 

Chemistry  is  one  of  the  most  interesting  and  educative 
of  the  sciences,  and  probably  stands  alone  in  that  it  is 
practical  in  the  true  sense  of  the  word,  for  many  of  the 
operations  carried  out  in  the  school  laboratory  are  iden- 
tical in  method  with,  and  on  the  same  scale  as,  similar 
operations  in  industry. 

Previous  to  the  war,  except  in  the  case  of  our  great 
colleges,  chemistry  had  been  almost  completely  banned 
from  the  curriculum,  owing  mainly  to  the  travesty  of  the 
subject  that  was  taught  for  the  purposes  of  passing  stupid 
examinations  set  by  charlatan  educationists.  Although 
the  evil  they  did  still  lives,  there  are  not  wanting  signs  of 
a  new  and  healthy  growth  of  interest  in  this  universally 
operating  science. 

The  author  has  to  thank  the  several  manufacturers  for 
their  ready  assistance  in  the  preparation  of  much  that  is  in 
the  book,  and  F.  E.  Palmer,  Esq.,  for  the  execution  and 
revision  of  various  diagrams. 

By  pointing  out  errors  and  suggesting  improvements^ 
those  who  know  will  be  rendering  a  service  to  those  who 
are  willing  to  learn. 


A.  F    ALLEN. 


1 ,  ELM  COURT, 
THE  TEMPLE, 

LONDON,  E.C.  4. 
April,  1920. 


466610 


INTRODUCTION 

THE  student  of  chemistry  realizes  very  early  in  his 
career  that  he  cannot  make  good  progress  in  his  subject 
without  spending  a  considerable  amount  of  time  in  the 
laboratory,  doing  practical  work.  A  retentive  memory 
may  serve  to  carry  a  student  through  a  so-called 
theoretical  examination,  but  without  practical  experience 
in  laboratory  work  his  value  as  a  chemist  is  nil,  and  there 
is  no  use  for  him  in  the  industrial  world  when  his  student 
days  have  ended. 

In  the  years  before  the  war  the  outlook  for  a  trained 
chemist  was  not  a  rosy  one,  and  responsible  positions 
were  few  and  far  between,  but  now  it  may  be  said  that 
the  demand  exceeds  the  supply.  The  value  of  the 
chemist  has  at  last  been  recognized,  and  he  is  being 
called  upon  to  fill  most  of  the  positions  which  in  the  less 
scientific  pre-war  days  were  taken  by  the  engineer. 
The  type  of  chemist  demanded  is  one  having  a  certain 
amount  of  engineering  training,  and  it  is  a  sign  of  the 
times  that  the  various  colleges  and  institutions  through- 
out the  country  are  taking  in  hand  the  question  of 
providing  suitable  courses  in  chemical  engineering. 

It  will  take  some  time  before  courses  are  standardized, 
and  the  student  on  the  threshold  of  the  industrial  world 
will  naturally  look  around  for  such  guidance  and  in- 
formation as  is  available  at  the  moment. 

The  object  of  this  book  is  to  serve  as  an  introduction 
to  chemical  engineering  by  familiarizing  the  student 
with  those  types  of  machines  which  are  in  general  use  in 
the  chemical  industry.  It  must  not  be  assumed  that 
the  machines  put  forward  represent  the  acme  of  perfection 

vii 


viii  INTRODUCTION 

from  the  chemist's  point  of  view;  in  many  cases  they 
are  the  product  of  the  engineering  mind  pure  and  simple, 
with  but  scanty  knowledge  of  the  laws  of  chemistry  and 
physics. 

The  methods  of  chemical  industry  may  be  described 
roughly  as  the  methods  of  the  laboratory  modified 
so  as  to  permit  of  operations  on  a  large  scale. 

The  plan  of  this  book  has  been  to  take  the  various 
pieces  of  apparatus  in  common  use  in  a  chemical  labora- 
tory and  to  describe  their  industrial  counterparts. 

The  series  of  operations  involved  in  the  quantitative 
analysis  of  a  mineral  afford  a  very  convenient  means  of 
calling  to  mind  the  different  types  of  apparatus  in 
daily  use  by  the  chemist.  These  include  the  mortar 
and  pestle  for  grinding,  the  beaker  and  stirring  rod  for 
dissolving  and  mixing,  the  filtering  apparatus  for  separat- 
ing solids  and  liquids,  the  evaporating  basin  for  the 
recovery  of  soluble  solids,  the  drying  oven  with  its  method 
of  temperature  regulation  for  drying  solids,  the  crucible 
and  muffle  for  high-temperature  work,  the  distillation 
apparatus  for  the  recovery  of  valuable  solvents,  the 
supply  of  heat,  and  the  provision  of  water  and  steam. 

Each  of  these  groups  has  been  treated  separately  in 
the  following  pages,  and  to  them  has  been  added  a  section 
on  Transport — a  point  of  no  account  in  a  laboratory, 
but  one  of  considerable  magnitude  in  the  chemical 
industry. 


CONTENTS 


PAGES 

PREFACE  v 

INTRODUCTION  -     vii-viii 

LIST  OF  ILLUSTRATIONS  -     xiii-xvi 

CHAPTER  I 

CRUSHING    AND    GRINDING    MACHINERY 

Jaw  Crusher  or  Nipper — Crushing  Rolls — High-speed  Crushing 
Rolls — Sugar-cane  Crusher — Rotary  Fine  Crusher  or  Cracker — 
Edge  Runner  Mill  or  Chaser — Iron  Edge  Runner  Mill — Granite 
Edge  Runner  Mill — Overhead  Driven  Mill  with  Revolving 
Pan  —  Disintegrators  —  Use  of  Screens  —  Buhrstone  Mills — 
Vertical  Runner  Mill— Roller  Mills— Ball  Mills— Pebble  Mills- 
Tube  Mills— Combination  Tube  Mill  —Stamps  -  1-39 

CHAPTER,  II 

SEPARATING    AND   MIXING   MACHINERY 

The  Grizzly — Sieves — The  Trommel — Telescopic  Screen — Sifting 
Reels  —  Centrifugal  Dressing  Machines  —  Powder  Dresser — 
Vibration  Machines  —  Newaygo  Screen  —  Shaking  Sifter — 
Gravity  Leg  Separator — Air  Separators — Electro-magnetic 
Machines  —  Magnetic  Pulley  —  Water  Separation  —  Settling 
Tanks  —  Cane  Juice  Subsider  —  Levigating  Mill  —  Mixing 
Machines — Putty  Mill — Pug  Mill — Horizontal  Mixer — Cone 
Mill— Batch  Mixer— Crutching  Machines  •-  40-69 

CHAPTER  III 

FILTERING   APPARATUS 

Bag  Filter — The  Filter  Press — Frame  Press — Chamber  Press — 
Filter  Plates— Filter  Cloths— Methods  of  Closing— Methods  of 
Feeding — Centrifugal  Machines — Weston  Centrifugals — Types 
of  Lining — Friction  Pulley — Water -driven  Centrifugals — 
Interlocking  Gear  ...  70-97 

ix 


x      INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 
CHAPTER  IV 

DRYERS    AND    EVAPORATORS 

PASES 

Flue  Heater — Steam  Heater — Firman  Dryer — Rotary  Dryer — 
Warm-Air  Drying — Sturtevant  System — Timber  Drying — 
Triple  Drying  System — Vacuum  Drying — Shelf  Dryer — 
Vacuum  Rotary  Dryer — Vacuum  Drum  Dryer — Passburg 
System — Johnstone  Dryer— Combined  Vacuum  Dryer,  Mixer 
and  Ball  Mill— Continuous  Dryer — Evaporators — Spontaneous 
Evaporation  —  Kettles  —  Open  Pans  —  The  Grainer  —  Steam- 
jacketed  Pans — Steam- jacketed  Kettles — Tilting  Kettles — 
Steam  Evaporating  Pans — Wetzel  Evaporating  Pan — Vacuum 
Pans — Jet  Condenser — Surface  Condenser — Wet  and  Dry 
Vacuum  Pumps — Calandria  Vacuum  Pan — Multiple-effect 
Vacuum  Pans— Kestner  System — Climbing  and  Falling  Film 
Evaporators — Salting  Type  Evaporators— Multiplex  Evapor- 
ators -  98-144 

CHAPTER  V 

DISTILLING    APPARATUS 

Column  Still— Rectifying  Still — Continuous  Still— Coffey  Still — 
Extraction  Plant — Mineral  Oil  Plant — Lubricating  Oil  Plant — 
Tar  Stills— Retorts — Nitric  Acid  Retorts — Pot  Stills — By-pro- 
duct Coke  Ovens — Gas  Retorts — Dowson  Process — Pressure 
Plant — Suction  Plant — Bituminous  Plant — Hydrogen  Plant — 
Kilns  —  Chamber  Kilns  —  Rotary  Calciner  —  Cement  Kilns — 
Muffle  Furnace — Reverberatory  Furnace — Regenerative  Fur- 
nace— Roasting  Furnaces — Air  and  Water  Cooled  Shafts  145-178 

CHAPTER  VI 

WATER   TREATMENT   PLANT 

Hardness  of  Water  —  Common  Impurities  —  Scale  —  Corrosion- — 
Frothing — Water  Softening — Lime-Soda  Process — Intermittent 
Plant  —  Continuous  Plant — Automatic  Apparatus — Permutit 
Processes  -  -  -  179-193 

CHAPTER  VII 

THE    CONTROL   OF   TEMPERATURE 

Steam  Control— Baldwin  System — Isothermal  Valve— Applications 
to  Still — Jacketed  Pan — Dye  Vessel — Vulcanizing  Press — Gas 
Producers  —  Gas  Heating  —  Reducing  Valve  —  Refrigerating 
Machinery  —  Lightfoot  System  —  Ammonia  System  —  Carbon 
Dioxide  System — Ice-making— Can  Ice — Cell  Ice— Plate  Ice — 
Cold  Storage— Brine  Pipe  System — Direct  Expansion  Pipe 
System— Air  Circulation  System— Absorption  System  -  194-210 


CONTENTS  xi 

CHAPTER  VIII 

TRANSPORT 

PAGES 

Conveying  Solids — Wheelbarrow — Tipping  Waggons — Runways — 
Aerial  Wire  Ropeways — Single  Wire  System — Double  Wire 
System — Bucket  Elevators — Conveyors — Worm  Conveyor — 
Scraper  Conveyor — Mechanical  Raker — Belt  Conveyors — 
Throw-off  Carriage — Apron  Conveyor — Bucket  Conveyor — 
Shaking  Conveyor — Grasshopper  Conveyor — |ConVeying  Liquids 
— Pipes — Anti-corrosion  Material — Tantiron — Ironac — Vitreon 
— Vitreosil — Ceratherm — \Vitreosate — Elevating  Liquids — The 
Acid  Egg — The  Air  Lift  or  Pohle  System — Plunger  Pumps — 
Centrifugal  Pumps — Ceratherm  Pumps — Conveying  Gases — 
Pipes  —  Chimneys  —  Fans  —  Radial  Flow  Fans  —  Mixed  Flow 
Fans — Rateau  Fan — Rotary  Blower  —  Compressors — Hori- 
zontal and  Vertical  Types — Multi-stage  Compressors — Vacuum 
Pumps — Roughing  Pumps — Siemens  Oil  Pump — Mercury 
Diffusion  Pump  -  211-255 

CHAPTER  IX 

APPENDIX 

Distillation  of  Liquid  Mixtures — Air  Compression — Belt  Conveyors 
— Belting — Shafting — Refrigerating  Machines — Low  Boiling- 
Point  Liquids — Freezing-Point  of  Brines — Freezing-Point  of 
Calcium  Chloride  Solutions — Freezing  Mixtures — Comparison 
of  Thermometer  Scales — Percentage  of  Lime  in  Milk  of  Lime — 
Specific  Gravities  of  Soda  Solutions — Useful  Data  of  Common 
Substances — Temperature,  Pressure,  and  Total  Heat  of 
Steam  -  -  -  -  V  -  -  256-267 


INDEX  ^  .....     268-272 


LIST  OF  ILLUSTRATIONS 

FIG.  PAGE 

1.  "STAG"  ORE-CRUSHER  .  3 

2.  "  STAG  "  ORE-CRUSHER:  SECTION  -                                        -  4 

3.  G.A.    HIGH-SPEED    CRUSHING    ROLLS  -                                                         -7 

4.  FINE  CRUSHING  ROLLS,  TYPE  5,  CLASS  2  8 

5.  FINE  CRUSHING  ROLLS,  TYPE  5,  CLASS  1  9 

6.  SUGAR-CANE  MILL       -  -             -  10 

7.  ROTARY  CRUSHER:  SECTION  -  11 

8.  IRON  EDGE  RUNNER  MILL    -  -  12 

9.  GRANITE  EDGE  RUNNER  MILL  -  13 

10.  MILLS  WITH  REVOLVING  PAN  -  15 

11.  DISINTEGRATOR  -  17 

12.  DISINTEGRATOR:  SECTION       -  19 

13.  DISINTEGRATOR:  SECTION       -  -  19 

14.  G.A.  DISINTEGRATOR  PLANT:  ELEVATION       -  21 

15.  G.A.  DISINTEGRATOR  PLANT:  PLAN  -  23 

16.  MILLSTONE  MILL  -             -  25 

17.  VERTICAL  RUNNER  MILL  -             -  26 

18.  ENCLOSED    END    RUNNER   MILL  -  27 

19.  TRIPLE    GRANITE    ROLLER   MILL  -  28 

20.  BALL   GRINDING   MILL  -  30 

21.  "  ATLAS  "    PEBBLE    GRINDING    MILL  -                                                          -  32 

22.  "  STAG  "    BALL    MILL:    SECTION  -  33 

23.  "  STAG  "    TUBE    MILL:    SECTION  -  36 

24.  STAMPS    FOR    CRUSHING  -  38 

25.  PORTABLE    SCREEN         -  -  41 

26.  TELESCOPIC    REVOLVING    SCREEN  -  42 

27.  REELS  -  43 

28.  SIFTING    REELS  -  43 

29.  POWDER   DRESSER          -  -44 

30.  CENTRIFUGAL    DRESSING    MACHINE  V                                                        -  45 

31.  SHAKING    SIFTER  *                  -  47 

32.  SHAKING    SIFTER   AND    CONVEYOR  -                                                         -  48 

33.  GRAVITY   OR   LEG    SEPARATOR  -  49 

34.  "  STAG  "    AIR    SEPARATOR           -  51 

35.  ARRANGEMENT   OF   ELECTRO -MAGNETS   IN   SPOUT           -  53 

36.  ELECTRO-MAGNETIC    SEPARATOR  -  54 

37.  MAGNETIC   PULLEY         -  -  55 

38.  LEVIGATING   MILL            -  56 

39.  CANE-JUICE    SUBSIDER  -  58 

xiii 


xiv  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

FIG.  PAGE 

40.  DESIGN   OF   LEVIGATING    PLANT:    PLAN  -  59 

41.  DESIGN    OF   LEVIGATING   PLANT:    ELEVATION    -  -  60 

42.  FLOW    SHEET   OF   MILLING   PROCESS        -  61 

43.  POSITIVE    DRIVEN  PUTTY    MILL  -  62 

44.  VERTICAL   PUG    MILL     -  63 

45.  "  POWERFUL  "    HORIZONTAL   MIXER       -  -  64 

46.  CONE  PAINT  MILL:  SECTION     -  -  65 

47.  DOUBLE    MIXER   FOR    SEMI-HQULDS        -  66 

48.  "  OPEN-DRUM  "    MIXER  -  67 

49.  UNDER-GEARED  MIXER  -  68 

50.  CRUTCHING  MACHINE:  SECTION  -  69 

51.  BAG    FILTER       -  -  71 

52.  FILTER  PRESS  PLATES  AND  FRAMES    -  74 

53.  FILTER  PRESS:  SECTIONS         -  -  76 

54.  FILTER  PRESS:  PLATE  AND  FRAME  TYPE        -  77 

55.  FILTER    PRESS    PLATE:    RECESSED    TYPE  -  78 

56.  FILTER    CLOTH    CLIPS:    BAYONET    TYPE  -  78 

57.  FILTER    CLOTH    CLIPS:    SCREW    TYPE      -  -  79 

58.  FILTER  CLOTH:  FIXING  IN  RECESSED  TYPE    -  -  79 

59.  FILTER  PRESS:  RECESSED  TYPE  -  80 

60.  FILTER  PRESS:  CENTRAL  SCREW  CLOSING      -  -  80 

61.  FILTER  PRESS:  RACK  AND  PINION  CLOSING   -  -  81 

62.  FILTER  PRESS:  COMPRESSED  AIR  CLOSING      -  -  82 

63.  FILTER  PRESS:  HYDRAULIC  RAM  CLOSING       -  -  83 

64.  "  WESTON  "  CENTRIFUGAL  BASKET:  SECTION  -  85 

65.  TYPES    OF   LININGS    FOR   BASKETS           -  -  86 

66.  BEARING   FOR    CENTRIFUGAL    SPINDLE  -  87 

67.  BEARING    FOR    CENTRIFUGAL    SPINDLE  -  88 

68.  CENTRIFUGAL   FRICTION   PULLEY            -  -  89 

69.  "  WESTON  "    CENTRIFUGAL    MACHINE  -  91 

70.  "  WESTON  "    CENTRIFUGAL   MACHINE :    WATER-DRIVEN  -  93 

71.  INTERLOCKING      GEAR     FOR      WATER-DRIVEN      CENTRIFUGAL: 

SECTION     -  -  96 

72.  "FIRMAN"  DRYER:  LONGITUDINAL  SECTION  -  99 

73.  "FIRMAN"  DRYER:  CROSS  SECTION  -  100 

74.  "  HERSEY  "  ROTARY  DRYER:  CROSS  SECTION  -  101 

75.  COMBINATION  ROTARY  DRYER:  CROSS  SECTION  -  101 

76.  G.A.  DRYING  PLANT:  PARALLEL  DRIVE  -  102 

77.  G.A.  DRYING  PLANT:  RIGHT-ANGLE  DRIVE     -  -  102 

78.  RECORDING  HYGROMETER        -  -  104 

79.  TYPICAL   GUIDE    CHART  -                   -  104 

80.  HYGROMETRIC    CHART  -                   -  106 

81.  STURTEVANT   TRIPLE    DUCT    DJRYER:    SECTION  -  108 

82.  VACUUM    SHELF    DRYER                                                         -  -                   -  110 

83.  VACUUM    DRUM    DRYER                                                         -  -                   -  113 

84.  VACUUM    "  JOHNSTONE  "    DRYER:    SECTION       -  -  114 

85.  VACUUM  DRYER:  MIXER  AND  BALL  MILL       -  -             -  116 

86.  CONTINUOUS    CONE   V,ACU/UM    DRYER     -  -  117 

87.  EVAPORATING   PAN:    OPEN    TYPE              -                   ...  120 


LIST  OF  ILLUSTRATIONS  xv 


FIG.  PAGE 

88.  CRYSTALLIZING    PAN:    STEAM    HEATED  -  122 

89.  TILTING    KETTLE  -  123 

90.  ASPINALL   STEAM   EVAPORATING   PAN  -  124 

91.  WETZEL   EVAPORATING   PAN  -  126 

92.  COPPER   VACUUM   PAN  -  128 

93.  CAST  IRON   CALANDRIA   VACUUM   PAN  -  129 

94.  G.A.  VACUUM  PAN:  JET  CONDENSER  -  130 

95.  G.A.  VACUUM  PAN:  TORRICELLIAN  CONDENSER  -  131 

96.  INJECTION  CONDENSER:  SECTION        -  -  132 

97.  SURFACE  CONDENSER:  SECTION  -  132 

98.  KESTNER  CLIMBING  FILM  SINGLE -EFFECT  EVAPORATOR  -  136 

99.  KESTNER  FALLING  FILM  SINGLE-EFFECT  EVAPORATOR  -  136 

100.  KESTNER  QUADRUPLE -EFFECT,  ETC.:  DIAGRAM  -  138 

101.  KESTNER   SALTING   TYPE    EVAPORATOR:   SECTION           -  -  139 

102.  "  MULTD?LEX  "    FILM   TRIPLE-EFFECT   EVAPORATOR      -  -  142 

103.  "MULTIPLEX"  TRIPLE-EFFECT  EVAPORATOR:  SECTION  -  143 

104.  DIAGRAM  OF  STILL  COLUMN  -  -  146 

105.  RECTIFYING  STILL       -  -  148 

106.  CONTINUOUS  DISTILLATION  APPARATUS:  DIAGRAM     -  -  149 

107.  CONTINUOUS  STILL:  DIAGRAM  -  150 

108.  DIAGRAM  OF  COFFEY  STILL    -  -  151 

109.  EXTRACTION  APPARATUS  -  153 

110.  SCOTT  OIL  EXTRACTION  APPARATUS:  DIAGRAM  -  155 

111.  LUBRICATING  OIL  DISTILLING  PLANT:  ELEVATION     -  -  156 

112.  LUBRICATING  OIL  DISTILLING  PLANT:  PLAN  -  157 

113.  "  DOWSON  "  STEAM  JET  PRESSURE  GAS  PLANT  -  161 

114.  "  DOWSON  "  SUCTION  GAS  PLANT       -  162 

115.  30  H.-P.  SUCTION  GAS  PLANT             -  -  164 

116.  DOWSON  BITUMINOUS  PLANT  -  -  165 

117.  ROTARY  CALCINER        -  -  168 

118.  SIEMENS  REGENERATIVE  FURNACE:  DIAGRAM  -  170 

119.  HARRIS  MECHANICAL  ROASTING  FURNACE      -  -  172 

120.  "  A  "  TYPE  SHAFT  FOR  ROASTING  FURNACE  -  173 

121.  "  B  "  TYPE  SHAFT  FOR  ROASTING  FURNACE  -  175 

122.  H.H.  TYPE  MECHANICAL  ROASTING  FURNACE  -  -  177 

123.  RECTANGULAR  WATER  SOFTENING  APPARATUS  -  186 

124.  AUTOMATIC    WEIGHING    AND    MEASURING    APPARATUS    FOR 

WATER-SOFTENING  APPARATUS    -  -  187 

125.  POSITIVE   DISCHARGE  VALVE  FOR  WATER-SOFTENING   APPA- 

RATUS        -  -  189 

126.  CYLINDRICAL   WATER-SOFTENING    APPARATUS  -  191 

127.  PERMUTIT   WATER-SOFTENING    APPARATUS:    DIAGRAM  -  192 

128.  "  ISOTHERMAL  "    STEAM   VALVE  -  195 

129.  "  ISOTHERMAL  "    THERMOMETER  -  196 

130.  G.A.    "  ISOTHERMAL  "    TEMPERATURE    CONTROL    APPARATUS     -  197 

131.  "ISOTHERMAL"  CONTROL  OF  STILL  -  -  198 

132.  "  ISOTHERMAL  "  CONTROL  OF  STEAM- JACKETED  PAN  -  199 

133.  "  ISOTHERMAL  "  CONTROL  OF  DYE  VESSEL   -  -  200 

134.  "  ISOTHERMAL  "    CONTROL    OF   EXHAUST   STEAM              -  -  200 


xvi  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMCIAL  ENGINEERING 

FIG.  PAGE 

135.  "  ISOTHERMAL  "    CONTROL    OF   VULCANIZING   PAN  -                   -  201 

136.  "  ISOTHERMAL  "    CONTROL    OF    BLAST    FOR    GAS    PRODUCER      -  201 

137.  "  ISOTHERMAL  "    CONTROL    OF    COTTON-SPINNING    ROOMS  -  202 

138.  *'  ISOTHERMAL  "    SUPERHEATED    STEAM    VALVE  -  202 

139.  "  ISOTHERMAL  "    GAS   VALVE    -  -  203 

140.  "  ISOTHERMAL  "    GAS   VALVE    -  -  203 

141.  DIAGRAM    OF   LIGHTFOOT    REFRIGERATION    SYSTEM  -                  -  204 

142.  OPEN    CONDENSER          -  -  205 

143.  HORIZONTAL    AMMONIA    COMPRESSOR                       -  -  207 

144.  VERTICAL    CARBON    DIOXIDE    COMPRESSOR          -  -  207 

145.  SIDE-TIPPING    WAGGON  -  212 

146.  END-TIPPING    WAGGON  -  212 

147.  RUNWAY   FOR   MINE        -  -  213 

148.  INTERWORKS    TRAFFIC:    PORTABLE    ROPEWAY  -  214 

149.  STANDARD    FOR    SINGLE-ROPE    SYSTEM  -  215 

150.  STANDARD    FOR    DOUBLE -ROPE    SYSTEM  -  216 

151.  ELEVATOR   CHAIN             -  -  218 

152.  GRAVITY   BUCKET    CHAIN  -  219 

153.  DUST   PROOF   ELEVATOR  -  220 

154.  BOOT   FOR   ELEVATOR  -  221 

155.  HOOD    FOR   ELEVATOR  -  222 

156.  SPIRAL    FOR    WORM    CONVEYOR  -  223 

157.  SPIRAL    CONVEYOR         -  -  224 

158.  SCRAPER   CONVEYOR  -  225 

159.  THREE-PULLEY    BELT    CARRIER  -  227 

160.  THROW-OFF    CARRIAGE                                       -  -  228 

161.  ELEVATOR   AND    CONVEYOR  -  229 

162.  SLAT   CONVEYOR  -  230 

163.  GRASSHOPPER    CONVEYOR            -  -  232 

164.  TANTIRON   ACID    EGG  -  237 

165.  TANTIRON   HORIZONTAL   PUMP  -  239 

166.  TANTIRON   VERTICAL   PUMP        -  ...  240 

167.  CERATHERM   BODY    IN   IRON    CASTING  -  241 

168.  CERATHERM   IMPELLER  -  242 

169.  CERATHERM   PUMP:    INTERIOR  -  242 

170.  CERATHERM   PUMPt    SMALL   SIZE  -                   -  243 

171.  CERATHERM   PUMP!    SUCTION   SIDE    INTERIOR  -  244 

172.  CERATHERM   PUMP:    PRESSURE    SIDE   INTERIOR  -  244 

173.  VITREOSATE    THREE-WAY  TAP  ....  247 

174.  ROBEY   COMPRESSOR     -  -  ...  251 

175.  VERTICAL   OPEN-TYPE    AIR   COMPRESSOR  -  252 

176.  BELT-DRIVEN   THREE-STAGE    COMPRESSOR         -  -  253 

177.  FOUR-STAGE   OXYGEN   COMPRESSOR       -  254 


INTRODUCTION  TO   CHEMICAL 
ENGINEERING 

CHAPTER  I 
CRUSHING  AND  GRINDING  MACHINERY 

GRINDING  is  one  of  the  most  important  operations  in 
the  industrial  preparation  of  chemical  products,  because 
it  facilitates  the  handling  of  the  raw  material  and  shortens 
the  time  required  for  any  subsequent  reaction,  and  for 
the  selfsame  reason  many  chemical  products  have  to  be 
put  on  the  market  in  the  form  of  a  powder  or  paste. 

In  the  selection  of  any  particular  machine  the  nature 
of  the  initial  material  and  the  result  desired  are  the 
determining  factors,  but  it  is  useful  to  remember  that 
reduction  by  easy  stages  is,  in  the  long-run,  the  most 
economical  of  time  and  money.  This  fact  has  long  been 
recognized  by  makers  of  grinding  machinery,  with  the 
result  that  there  are  on  the  market  many  types  of 
machines  designed  to  deal  with  all  kinds  and  conditions  of 
material,  from  the  crushing  of  the  hardest  rocks  to  the 
production  of  the  finest  powders. 

Jaw-Crusher. — This  machine  is  often  known  as  a 
"  nipper,"  and  is  one  of  the  simplest  and  cheapest  crush- 
ing machines  available.  Many  forms  of  jaw-crushers 
exist,  but  generally  it  may  be  said  they  are  so  designed 
that  one  part  of  the  machine  is  stationary,  with  a  cor- 
rugated face  of  chilled  iron  against  which  works  a  similar 
but  movable  face  or  jaw,  with  a  V-shaped  opening  be- 
tween. The  movable  plate  is  moved  alternately  forward 

1 


2      INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

and  back  by  an  eccentric  on  the  shaft.  These  nippers, 
or  jaw-crushers,  are  made  in  different  sizes,  the  rock 
opening  varying  from  12  by  6  inches  to  36  by  48  inches ; 
they  weigh  anything  up  to  30  tons,  and  require  from 
1  to  100  horse -power.  These  machines  require  a  very 
solid  foundation  on  account  of  the  very  great  strain 
during  working.  As  a  rule  a  method  of  adjusting  the 
working  parts,  such  as  a  screw  or  similar  device,  is  pro- 
vided, so  that  the  machine  can  be  set  for  the  production 
of  a  rough  or  fine  product. 

The  jaw-crusher  will  crush  the  hardest  materials,  and 
is  very  largely  employed  for  ore -crushing  and  in  the 
gypsum  industry;  the  rock  is  broken  to  somewhat  less 
than  the  size  of  a  man's  fist,  or  capable  of  passing  a  2j-inch 
ring.  The  capacity  of  a  jaw-crusher,  in  tons  per  hour,  and 
the  power  required  vary  with  the  condition  of  the  rock, 
and  as  a  rule  dry  rock,  especially  gypsum,  is  more  easily 
crushed  than  wet. 

Fig.  1  shows  a  popular  size  of  the  "  Stag  "  ore -crusher, 
manufactured  by  Edgar  Allen  and  Co.,  Ltd.,  Sheffield, 
to  which  the  following  details  refer:  Massive  cast-iron 
body  with  easily  renewable  bearings.  The  Pitman  is  of 
cast  iron  of  substantial  design,  with  renewable  cast-iron 
adjustable  bush  for  eccentric  shaft,  and  is  also  fitted 
with  renewable  cast-steel  toggles  to  receive  the  nose 
toggle  plates.  The  swing  jaw  is  of  cast  iron,  accurately 
bored  and  fitted  to  shaft,  and  fitted  with  renewable  cast- 
steel  toggle  seatings.  The  jawT  faces  are  of  manganese 
steel,  cored  out  at  the  back  to  reduce  weight,  and  spelter 
is  run  in  to  ensure  a  soft  cushion  for  bedding  on  the  swing 
jaw.  The  jaw  faces  are  readily  accessible,  and  can  be 
reversed  or  renewed  by  an  unskilled  labourer.  The  side 
plates  are  of  hard  cast  iron,  made  in  one  piece,  and  assist 
to  hold  the  fixed  jaw  face  securely  in  position.  The  toggle 
plates  are  of  hard  cast  iron,  held  in  position  by  the  tension 
rod,  which  is  fitted  with  india-rubber  buffers.  The  shafts 
are  made  from  best  hammered  mild  steel  forgings, 


CRUSHING  AND  GRINDING  MACHINERY          3 

accurately  turned  to  gauge  and  polished  all  over.  The 
flywheels  are  of  cast  iron,  bored  to  gauge,  fitted  and 
keyed  to  the  eccentric  shaft,  and  turned  to  receive  a 
flanged  pulley.  The  fast  pulleys  are  of  cast  iron,  flanged 


FIG.  1. — "  STAG  "  ORE-CRUSHER. 


and  bolted  to  either  flywheel,  turned  and  crowned  on  the 
face;  the  loose  pulleys  of  wrought  iron  have  a  suitable 
bush  of  brass,  and  must  revolve  at  a  rate  of  not  less  than 
250  to  280  revolutions  per  minute.  Each  machine  can 


4      INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

be  regulated  while  running  to  break  the  material  to  any 
special    size,  by  means  of   cast-iron  wedge   blocks,   the 


output   of   all   machines    being   calculated   for   crushing 
limestone  to  pass  a  2j-inch  ring. 


CRUSHING  AND  GRINDING  MACHINERY         5 

Fig.  2  is  a  sectional  illustration  of  the  breakers  with 
cast-iron  bodies,  sizes  20  by  8  inches  and  20  by  10  inches. 

Crushing  Rolls. — This  type  of  machine  is  of  heavy 
construction,  and  is  designed  for  reducing  the  produce 
of  the  jaw-crusher  to  sand.  The  essential  part  of  these 
machines  consists  of  two  cylinders  capable  of  being  given 
an  inward  turning  motion  whereby  material  as  it  is  fed 
to  them  is  carried  along  and  crushed  between  them.  As 
a  rule  the  bearings  of  one  roller  are  rigidly  fixed,  whereas 
the  bearings  of  the  other  roller  are  held  in  position 
by  powerful  springs,  which  not  only  allow  the  rollers  to 
be  set  at  a  definite  distance  apart — usually  J  inch  or  the 
size  of  the  finished  product — but  also  allow  the  rollers 
to  give  when  any  material  is  fed  to  the  machine  which 
it  cannot  crush  without  causing  damage  to  the  machine 
itself.  Each  roller  is  generally  made  up  of  an  outer 
shell  of  cast  steel,  chilled  cast  iron,  manganese  steel, 
or  a  steel  forging,  which  is  fixed  to  a  centre  of  cast  iron 
in  such  a  way  that  it  can  be  easily  removed  and  replaced 
when  worn  out.  Owing  to  the  hard  wear  on  the  rollers, 
they  require  to  be  constantly  trued-up,  an  operation 
which  can  be  effected  in  the  ordinary  way  or  by  the  use 
of  an  emery  wheel  on  the  rollers  when  in  position.  To 
diminish  the  amount  of  dust  or  smalls  formed,  the  sur- 
faces of  the  rollers  are  often  fluted,  the  pitch  of  the 
serrations  being  varied  according  to  the  product  required. 
In  some  cases  the  rollers  are  provided  with  teeth,  when 
designed  for  cubing  granite,  limestone,  macadam,  etc., 
and  will  take  pieces  up  to  6  inches  cube  and  reduce  them 
to  2  J  inches  cube. 

To  obtain  a  true  crushing  action  the  rollers  should  be 
driven  at  the  same  peripheral  speed,  but  in  practice  it 
is  found  that  a  small  difference  in  speed  reduces  the 
amount  of  wear  very  considerably  without  causing 
excessive  grinding.  The  speed  of  the  rolls  varies  from 
100  to  1,000  feet  per  minute,  according  to  the  degree  of 
fineness  required;  the  higher  the  speed,  the  coarser  the 


6      INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

product  will  be.  The  size  of  the  feed  to  a  large  extent 
decides  the  diameter  of  the  rolls,  but  in  any  case  to  get 
the  best  results  from  a  machine  the  material  to  be  treated 
should  not  be  more  than  four  or  five  times  as  large  as 
the  product  required.  High  speeds  can  be  best  obtained 
when  each  roll  is  separately  belt-driven,  which  method 
also  allows  a  certain  amount  of  slip  to  occur,  thus  avoiding 
excessive  grinding  of  the  roll  face.  Where  the  rolls  are 
geared  together  both  a  lower  speed  and  lower  efficiency 
are  the  result.  The  diameter  of  the  rolls  varies  from  8  to 
36  inches,  but  a  very  common  size  in  practice  is  18  inches, 
and,  it  is  worth  remarking  again,  it  is  better  to  reduce 
by  steps  than  in  one  operation,  for  not  only  is  the  first 
cost  often  less,  but  also  the  running  costs  are  most 
decidedly  so. 

The  capacity  of  the  rolls  depends  to  a  great  extent 
upon  the  nature  of  the  material  to  be  crushed,  and  to  a 
lesser  amount  upon  the  width  of  the  rolls,  which  are  made 
10  to  42  inches,  according  to  the  diameter  chosen;  but 
the  narrow  roll  has  the  advantage  in  that  it  can  be  run  at 
much  higher  speeds,  and  for  this  and  other  reasons  the 
12-inch  roll  is  in  common  use. 

An  important  factor  in  the  efficiency  and  economy  of 
upkeep  of  this  machine  is  the  provision  of  a  method  of 
even  feeding,  so  that  even  wear  on  the  faces  of  the  rollers 
results.  Crushing  rolls  are  usually  of  heavy  construction 
and  made  in  all  sizes,  having  a  capacity  from  5  to  65  tons 
per  hour  and  requiring  from  5  to  100  horse-power. 

Fig.  3  shows  the  general  arrangement  of  high-speed 
crushing  rolls  as  made  by  Edgar  Allen  and  Co..  Ltd., 
Sheffield. 

The  frame  is  in  one  piece,  on  which  are  cast  two 
pedestals  for  receiving  the  bearings  of  the  fixed  roll. 
The  bearings  for  the  other  roll  have  machined  soles  which 
slide  in  dove -tailed  grooves  and  are  held  in  position  by 
powerful  springs  attached  to  forged  steel  tension  rods 
which  pass  through  the  bearings  and  frame.  The  roll 


8      INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

shells  are  made  of  cast  steel  or  manganese  steel,  and  are 
fitted  to  cast-iron  centres  in  such  a  way  that  the  shell  can 
be  renewed  easily  when  required.  Each  roll  is  fitted  with 
a  heavy  cast-iron  belt  pulley  which  also  acts  as  a  flywheel. 
The  following  particulars  of  one  size  are  given  as  a 
guide :  Diameter  of  rolls,  1 8  inches ;  width  of  rolls,  12  inches ; 
r.p.m.  of  rolls  and  driving  pulleys,  100  to  200;  diameter 
of  driving  pulleys,  36  inches;  width  of  driving  pulleys, 
6  inches;  approximate  h.p.  required,  5  to  10;  approxi- 


FIG.  4. — FINE  CRUSHING  ROLLS,  TYPE  5,  CLASS  2. 

mate  product  per  hour  when  rolls  are  set  J  inch  apart, 
4  to  8  tons. 

Fig.  4  shows  a  type  of  low-priced  machine  made  by 
J.  Harrison  Carter,  Ltd.,  Duns  table,  to  meet  a  growing 
demand. 

These  machines  are  constructed  in  a  cast-iron  sectional 
frame  which  is  protected  from  undue  strains  by  relief 
springs  behind  the  movable  roller.  The  renewable  roll 
shells  are  rigidly  secured  to  the  shafts  by  the  improved 
sliding  internal  cone  arrangement;  the  bearings  are  of 


CRUSHING  AND  GRINDING  MACHINERY 


9 


swivel  type,  instantly  renewed  or  replaced,  self -lubricat- 
ing, and  are  protected  from  dust  or  grit;  the  rolls  are 
direct  driven,  each  roller  by  a  separate  belt.  The  hopper 
illustrated  contains  an  automatic  feeding  device. 

Pig.  5  shows  a  similar  type  of  machine  made  by  the 
same  firm,  but  having  only  one  roller  driven,  the  other 
roller  following,  an  arrangement  which  is  supplied  when 
only  a  single  drive  is  available. 


FIG.  5. — FINE  CRUSHING  ROLLS,  TYPE  5,  CLASS  1. 

Fig.  6  shows  a  type  of  machine  built  by  Blair,  Campbell 
and  McLean,  Glasgow,  for  sugar-cane  work. 

This  arrangement  is  suitable  where  sufficient  motive 
power  already  exists  and  can  be  transmitted  to  the  mill 
conveniently  by  belt.  The  rollers  are  of  special  cast 
metal,  having  gudgeons  of  mild  steel  running  in  gun- 
metal  bushes,  compound  spur  gearing  of  special  cast 
iron,  with  mild  steel  shafts,  and  the  driving  pulleys  are  of 
wrought  iron  for  lightness. 


10    INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

Rotary  Fine  Crusher. — This  machine,  known  also  as  a 
"cracker,"  is  almost  universally  used  for  reducing  rocks 
of  moderate  hardness,  such  as  gypsum,  limestone, 
graphite,  etc.  In  its  common  form  it  resembles  a  coffee 
mill,  being  in  shape  like  an  hourglass  and  often  provided 
with  double  doors,  so  that  it  can  be  opened  up  quite 
easily  and  the.  parts  inspected.  In  its  simplest  form  a 
shaft  with  a  corrugated-iron  shoe  revolves  within  a 
conical  shell  having  a  corrugated  inner  surface,  and  by 
means  of  an  adjusting  wheel  can  beset  while  the  machine 


FIG.  6. — SUGAR-CANE  MILL. 

is  running,  to  give  a  fine  or  coarse  product  as  desired. 
The  ordinary  reduction  is  to  fragments  which  will  pass 
a  1 1 -inch  ring.  These  rotary  crushers  weigh  from  1  to  7 
tons,  requiring  from  1  to  35  horse -power,  and  having  a 
capacity  of  from  2  to  30  tons,  the  largest  sizes  taking 
pieces  up  to  14  inches  in  diameter. 

Fig.  7  gives  a  sectional  view  of  a  rotary  crusher. 

Edge  Runner  Mill. — This  mill,  also  known  as  a 
"  chaser."  is  particularly  useful  for  dealing  with  sub- 
stances such  as  clay,  putty,  drugs,  chalk  seeds,  etc., 
where  a  very  fine  reduction  is  not  required.  It  is  also 


CRUSHING  AND  GRINDING  MACHINERY        11 

largely  used  for  mixing  mortar,  for  mixing  loams  for 
use  in  the  foundry,  and  for  grinding  materials  which  are 
not  of  a  very  hard  nature. 


FIG.  7. — ROTARY  CRUSHER:  SECTION. 

The  mill  is  constructed  with  a  steel  or  stone  bed  on 
which  roll  two  or  more  heavy  rollers  of  cast  iron  or  stone, 
known  as  edge  runners  or  travellers,  the  whole  being 
contained  in  a  pan  provided  with  a  suitable  discharging 
arrangement.  In  some  cases  the  pan  is  driven  and  the 


12    INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

rolls  rotate  of  themselves,  and  in  other  cases  the  drive 
is  to  the  rolls  themselves,  but  in  all  cases  an  arm  is  pro- 
vided carrying  a  scraper  which  travels  just  in  front  of  the 
rolls,  and  which  brings  the  material  into  the  track  of  the 
rollers. 

As  a  general  rule  this  machine  is  used  for  dealing  with 
batches  of  material  necessitating  frequent  charging  and 
discharging;  but  if  required  for  continuous  service,  grates 


FIG.  8. — IRON  EDGE  RUNNER  MILL. 

are  provided  under  the  rolls  having  a  definite  mesh, 
according  to  the  nature  of  the  material  dealt  with,  and 
the  ground  material  is  gradually  forced  through  the  open- 
ings into  the  stationary  pan  beneath.  In  some  classes 
of  work  the  rolls  are  supported  at  a  definite  distance 
above  the  surface  of  the  pan,  so  that  a  certain  depth  of 
material  is  necessary  before  crushing  takes  place. 

Fig.  8  shows  a  "  Standard  "  iron  edge  runner  mill  made 


CRUSHING  AND  GRINDING  MACHINERY        13 

by  Follows  and  Bates,  Ltd.,  Manchester,  which  is  suitable 
for  pulverizing  a  great  variety  of  materials,  wet  or  dry, 
or  in  oil  or  water,  etc.  It  is  strong,  durable,  and  designed 
to  deal  with  small  requirements.  In  order  to  ensure 
good  work,  the  pan  and  runners  are  turned  dead  true 
on  the  faces,  and  the  guides  and  scrapers  are  specially 
designed  so  as  to  bring  the  whole  of  the  materials  whilst 
being  crushed  directly  under  the  track  of  the  runners. 


FIG.  9.  —  GRANITE  EDGE  RUNNER 


When  the  grinding  operation  has  been  completed,  the 
contents  of  the  pan  are  quickly  and  automatically  dis- 
charged by  simply  turning  the  handwheel  shown  in  front. 
Fig.  9  shows  a  granite  edge  runner  mill  suitable  for 
grinding  and  mixing  crystals,  powders,  pastes,  drugs,  etc., 
either  wet  or  dry,  and  is  made  by  the  same  firm.  The 
object  sought  has  been  to  produce  a  mill  that  will  operate 
upon  materials  in  the  most  effective  manner  without  their 


14     INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

coming  in  contact  with  iron.  To  this  end  the  solid  bed 
and  runners  are  made  of  hard,  close-grained  grey  granite, 
having  surfaces  perfectly  dressed  and  dead  true.  The 
hopper  in  which  the  runners  rotate  is  built  up  of  hard 
sycamore  sections,  neatly  tongued,  grooved,  and  riveted 
together  in  such  a  manner  as  to  prevent  shrinkage  or 
leakage  and  to  be  as  absolutely  clean  as  the  granite  itself. 
The  scrapers  that  clear  the  runners  and  the  scrapers 
which  are  plough -shaped  and  revolve  with  the  cross-head 
are  of  lignum  vitse  and  keep  the  bed  clear,  causing  all  the 
materials  being  ground  to  pass  into  and  under  the  track 
of  the  runners,  which  possess  a  rolling  as  well  as  a  grinding 
action,  thereby,  in  a  short  time,  reducing  the  contents 
of  the  hopper  to  one  uniform  and  smooth  consistency. 

Fig.  10  shows  a  type  of  overhead  driven  mill  with  re- 
volving pan,  having  a  perforated  bottom  with  a  stationary 
pan  underneath.  These  mills  are  specially  suitable  for 
pulverizing  all  kinds  of  dry  materials,  such  as  ashes, 
lime,  gypsum,  plaster  of  Paris,  silica,  sandstone,  bricks 
for  making  cement,  fireclay,  coke,  etc.,  and  are  provided 
with  a  set  of  grates  having  a  mesh  down  to  y\  inch. 

These  mills  weigh  from  3  to  11  tons,  requiring  from 
3  to  20  horse-power,  and  have  a  capacity  of  from  8  to  100 
cwt.  of  ordinary  burnt  limestone  per  hour. 

Disintegrators. — These  machines,  also  known  as  pul- 
verizing mills,  are  especially  adapted  for  dealing  with 
substances  of  a  lumpy  nature  which  are  neither  hard  nor 
gritty,  such  as  gypsum,  dry  colours,  sulphur,  borax, 
starch,  bones,  etc.  The  essential  features  of  these 
machines  are  as  follows:  Two  circular  plates,  mounted  on 
a  horizontal  axis,  revolve  concentrically  in  opposite 
directions;  each  plate  is  fitted  with  one  or  more  circles 
of  short  iron  bars,  rigidly  fixed  at  right  angles,  and  so 
arranged  that  they  interlock  with  those  of  the  other 
plate,  thus  forming  a  circular  cage  made  up  of  two  or 
more  concentric  circles  of  short  rods. 

The  material  is  fed  into  the  centre  of  the  cage,  and 


CRUSHING  AND  GRINDING  MACHINERY        15 

drops  down  upon  the  first  set  of  bars,  which,  travelling 
at  high  speed,  beat  the  material  to  pieces,  and  at  the  same 


time  impart  a  centrifugal  motion  to  it,  forcing  it  through 
the  bars  on  to  the  second  set,  which  are  travelling  at  a 
high  rate  of  speed  in  the  opposite  direction.  By  the 


16     INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

time  the  material  reaches  the  outer  bars  it  has  been 
reduced  to  a  fine  powder. 

The  speed  of  the  machine  largely  determines  the  fine- 
ness of  the  product,  which  is  also  to  a  lesser  extent 
affected  by  the  distance  apart  at  which  the  bars  are  set. 
The  peripheral  speed  of  these  machines  often  reaches 
20,000  feet  per  minute;  they  are  made  in  sizes  up  to  55 
inches  in  diameter,  from  3,000  to  15,000  pounds  in  weight, 
requiring  from  6  to  45  horse -power  and  having  a  capacity, 
which  depends  upon  the  degree  of  fineness  sought  and  the 
nature  of  the  material,  of  from  8  to  75  tons  in  ten  hours. 
In  addition  to  the  usual  disadvantages  belonging  to  all 
high-speed  machinery,  it  is  obvious  that  these  machines 
in  running  tend  to  generate  a  certain  amount  of  heat, 
which  in  some  cases  may  become  excessive,  although  the 
action  of  the  beaters  creates  a  strong  air  current,  which 
exercises '  both  a  cooling  and  a  drying  action  on  the 
material  being  pulverized. 

These  machines  must  be  carefully  fitted  to  a  perfectly 
dust-tight  receiving  chamber  provided  with  a  proper 
means  of  discharge,  and  at  the  same  time  the  strong 
current  of  dust-laden  air  must  be  filtered  through  gauze 
screens  in  a  dust  chamber  or  allowed  to  pass  to  dust 
balloons,  which,  being  made  of  porous  material,  allow 
the  air  to  escape  and  the  dust  to  accumulate  at  the 
bottom,  from  which  it  can  be  discharged  by  means  of  a 
valve . 

It  may  be  again  noted  that  a  better  result  is  obtained 
by  allowing  the  machine  to  do  its  own  screening  and 
returning  the  coarser  material  to  the  centre  of  the 
machine . 

Fig.  11  shows  a  type  of  disintegrator  made  by 
J.  Harrison  Carter,  Ltd.,  Dunstable,  to  which  the  following 
details  refer:  The  body  of  the  machine  is  of  cast  iron, 
the  inside  of  the  circular  grinding  chamber  being  lined 
with  renewable  chilled-iron  sides  to  reduce  the  wear. 
The  bottom  half  of  the  circumference  of  this  chamber  is 


CRUSHING  AND  GRINDING  MACHINERY        17 

formed  by  screens  held  in  position  by  adjustable  screws. 
A  strong  spindle  carried  in  self -lubricating  bearings  runs 
through  the  centre  of  the  grinding  chamber  and  carries  a 
cast  iron  and  steel  combined  disc,  which  in  turn  holds  a 
series  of  from  four  to  six  beaters,  the  tips  of  which  run 
close  to  the  inner  circumference  of  the  grinding  chamber, 
and,  when  running,  cover  the  whole  width  of  this 
chamber. 

The  beaters  are  mainly  responsible  for  the  grinding, 
being  assisted,  however,  to  some  considerable  extent  by 


M94-/2 

FIG.  11. — DISINTEGRATOR. 

the  ratcheted  sides  and  top  of  the  machine.  The  beaters 
are  easily  changed  and  are  hardened  to  resist  wear ;  they 
can  also  be  cheaply  repaired  when  worn. 

The  use  of  screens  of  various  meshes  enables  the 
finished  material^to  be  ground  to  any  desired  size,  fine 
or  coarse,  and  also  allows  the  finished  material  to  escape 
at  once.  The  mesh  of  screens,  varying  as  they  may 
from  ^V  inch  and  rising  in  gradations  of  ^  inch,  up  to 

2 


18    INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

a  3 -inch  mesh,  enables  the  disintegrator  to  treat  almost 
every  article  likely  to  be  ground,  with  the  following 
exceptions:  Substances  of  a  very  gritty  and  cutting 
nature,  such  as  hard  quartz,  hard  limestone,  cement 
clinker,  flint,  and  similar  materials,  or  those  containing 
a  large  percentage  of  moisture,  such  as  plastic  clay.  The 
screens  and,  to  an  extent,  the  speed  regulate  the  degree  of 
fineness  to  which  any  material  is  reduced;  and  these 
screens,  being  made  in  very  varied  meshes — viz.,  with  from 
rV-inch  to  3 -inch  spaces — enable  a  great  variety  of 
materials  to  be  ground  and  a  large  number  of  grades 
produced.  The  grinding  and  discharging  action  is  con- 
tinuous, and  to  obtain  the  full  output  from  the  machine 
the  feed  should  also  be  continuous  and  even.  The  speed, 
to  obtain  the  best  results,  must  be  kept  regular  and 
maintained  at  the  full  value  given  for  the  machine. 

Many  manufacturers  object  to  the  use  of  sifters  to 
follow  the  grinding  machine;  this  is  generally  false 
economy,  both  as  regards  output  and  power.  For 
example  a  No.  Ij  machine  fitted  with  -g^-inch  screens 
would  grind  about  4  cwt.  per  hour  of  sugar  or  similar 
material.  The  same  machine  fitted  with  a  T\-inch 
screen  would  pass  about  10  cwt.  per  hour,  60  per  cent, 
of  which  would  be  as  fine  as  that  passing  the  JT-*nch 
mesh  screens.  This  60  per  cent,  or  6  cwt.  per  hour  would 
be  taken  out  by  the  sifter,  leaving  the  40  per  cent,  of 
overtails  to  go  again  to  the  disintegrator  to  be  further 
reduced,  thus  showing  a  gain  of  2  cwt.  per  hour.  The 
sifter  and  grinder  should  always  be  so  connected  that 
they  work  automatically,  in  order  that  there  should  be 
no  additional  cost  for  labour.  Further,  the  material, 
to  pass  a  disintegrator  fitted  with  a  JT-inch  screen, 
must  be  quite  dry,  whereas  a  material  containing  a  fair 
percentage  of  moisture  would  readily  pass  a  TVinch 
screen. 

Figs.  12  and  13  show  sectional  views  of  this  type  of 
machine. 


CRUSHING  AND  GRINDING  MACHINERY        19 


A-Spindte 

B— Disc 

C— Beaters 

D— Screw  for  adjusting  Screens 

E— W.I.  Cross  Bar    - 

F— Top  Side  Ratchets 

G— Bottom  ditto 

H— Screens 


J— Bottom  Screen  Block 
J— Top  Screen  Block 
K— Top  Door  Ratchet  Linings 
L— Top  Doors 
M-  Special  End  Door 
N — Ordinary  End   Door 
P— Top  Cross  Block  for  3?  and 
4|  machines  only 


FIG.  12. — DISINTEGRATOR:  SECTION 


FIG.  13. — DISINTEGRATOR:  SECTION. 


20     INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

It  is  requisite  for  the  efficient  working  of  these  machines 
that  a  continuous  current  of  air  pass  through  them. 
This  current  of  air,  when  the  machine  is  properly  fed, 
enters  with  the  feed  and  also  around  the  spindle  at 
the  centre  of  the  machine,  and  continues  to  do  so  as  long 
as  the  screens  are  clear.  The  air  passes,  in  the  ordinary 
working,  with  the  ground  material  through  the  screens 
into  the  box  or  stand,  and  becomes  charged  with  dust, 
and  as  the  action  of  the  beaters  is  somewhat  fan-like  a 
considerable  air  pressure  is  caused  inside  the  box.  This 
pressure,  if  not  relieved,  causes  back  pressure  against  the 
incoming  material,  and  in  consequence  greatly  lessens 
the  grinding  capacity,  and  also  causes  a  greater  con- 
sumption of  power  in  driving.  If  air  blows  out  of  the 
centre,  it  is  generally  an  indication  of  back  pressure  or 
overfeeding.  In  all  cases  when  the  receiving  box  is 
made  air-tight  a  trunk  is  led  away  from  the  top  of  it  to  a 
dust  chamber  or  dust  balloon.  The  trunk  should  be  as 
large  as  possible,  fixed  as  nearly  vertical  as  it  can  be, 
and  with  as  few  bends  as  possible.  The  dust  room 
should  be  made  as  large  as  possible,  so  as  to  allow  the  air 
to  expand  and  come  to  rest,  and  thus  drop  the  suspended 
dust. 

Figs.  14  and  15  show  a  standard  fixing  as  supplied  by 
J.  Harrison  Carter.  The  disintegrator  is  fixed  upon  a 
dust-tight  wooden  grinding  box  or  stand  placed  upon  the 
ground.  The  machine  is  driven  by  a  counter -shaft  either 
suspended  from  the  roof  or  bolted  to  wooden  sleepers  in  the 
ground.  The  counter -shaft  is  driven  off  the  flywheel  or 
pulley  on  an  engine  or  motor.  In  this  arrangement  the 
stand  shown  is  made  of  a  top  and  bottom  framework 
of  timber,  the  timbers  of  each  frame  being  morticed  and 
securely  pinned  together.  The  top  and  bottom  frames 
are  then  joined  together  at  the  proper  distance  apart  by 
four  vertical  legs  morticed  and  bolted  to  both  frames. 
Two  other  cross-timbers  are  also  required  in  the  top  frame 
to  receive  the  holding-down  bolts  of  the  machine;  these 


CRUSHING  AND  GRINDING  MACHINERY        21 


timbers  should  be  placed  parallel  with  the  grinding  chamber 
and  not  across  it,  so  as  not  to  block  up  the  discharge  from 
the  machine.  The  top  of  the  stand  should  be  covered  over 


22     INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

with  planking,  laid  down  perfectly  even  and  flat,  the 
joints  being  placed  parallel  to  the  cross -timbers,  tongued 
and  made  dust-tight.  The  planking  should  be  securely 
fixed  to  the  top  of  the  frame  and  an  opening  cut  between 
the  cross -timbers  for  the  escape  of  the  ground  material. 
The  stand  should  be  completely  enclosed  by  match- 
boarding,  made  dust- tight,  and  a  sliding  door,  having  a 
dust-tight  seating,  provided  in  one  of  the  sides  to  allow 
of  periodical  cleaning.  It  is  of  the  greatest  importance 
for  the  proper  working  of  the  machines  that  plenty  of  room 
is  left  underneath  them.  The  stands  or  hoppers  should 
be  made  as  deep  as  convenient,  so  as  to  leave  room  for 
the  air  blown  into  them  by  the  revolving  of  the  beaters. 
In  no  case  must  a  machine  be  fixed  so  that  there  is  not  a 
free  escape  for  this  air,  and  in  order  to  get  rid  of  this  air 
and  dust  a  spout  should  be  taken  from  the  top  of  the 
stand  and  led  to  a  dust  room  or  balloon. 

Great  care  must  be  taken  that  the  material  is  fed  into 
the  machine  as  evenly  as  possible .  The  feed  should  enter 
continuously  and  not  intermittently,  and  should  be 
examined  for  any  foreign  substance  such  as  iron.  Before 
starting  to  feed,  the  machine  should  be  allowed  to  attain 
its  full  speed  judged  by  the  hum  of  the  beaters,  and  the 
rate  of  feeding  regulated  by  this  hum.  In  very  fine 
grinding,  when  it  is  of  importance  that  no  pieces  of  grit 
should  appear  in  the  product,  the  screens  must  be  packed 
by  a  layer  of  putty  or  string  along  that  part  of  the  screen 
which  rests  on  the  inner  lining  of  the  machine. 

The  bearings  are  self -lubricating,  and  should  be 
inspected  two  or  three  times  a  day  and  new  oil  put  in 
every  other  day. 

When  the  beaters  are  repaired  or  replaced,  care  must 
be  taken  that  they  (the  disc  and  the  spindle)  are  perfectly 
balanced,  so  that  on  turning  they  show  no  tendency  to 
come  to  rest  in  any  particular  position. 

The  disintegrator  has  been  somewhat  fully  treated 
owing  to  the  great  range  of  usefulness  which  it  possesses, 


CRUSHING  AND  GRINDING  MACHINERY      23 


as  will  be  seen  from  the  following  list  of  materials  which 
it  is  claimed  are  reduced  by  this  means:  Alkali,  alum, 
ammonia,  anthracene,  antimony,  asbestos,  asphalte,  bark, 


24    INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

barley,  barytes,  beans,  biscuits,  blacklead,  blood  manure, 
blue,  bones,  borax,  breeze,  bricks,  cattle  foods,  chalk, 
charcoal,  coal,  clay,  cocoanut  husks,  copper  ore,  cork, 
feathers,  felt,  fuller's  earth,  gas  carbon,  glue,  guano,  gum, 
gypsum,  hops,  iron  oxide,  lead  ore,  lime,  linseed,  magnesite, 
mica,  nuts,  oyster  shells,  paper,  phosphates,  pitch,  rags, 
resin,  salt,  shavings,  soap  powder,  sugar,  tan,  wheat, 
wood  fibre,  etc. 

Buhrstone  Mill. — This  machine  is  in  very  common  use 
for  dry  or  wet  fine  grinding  of  materials  such  as  flour, 
steatite,  graphite,  pigments,  dry  colours,  etc. 

A  buhrstone  mill  consists  of  two  rough,  siliceous  discs, 
one  of  which  is  stationary  and  the  other  revolving  against 
it.  The  stones  are  usually  of  French  buhr  or  Derbyshire 
Peak,  set  either  horizontally  or  vertically.  Radiating 
grooves,  about  |  an  inch  deep  and  2  inches  wide,  inclined 
to  the  radii,  are  cut  into  the  grinding  surface  of  each 
stone .  These  grooves  must  be  recut  every  time  the  stones 
wear  smooth,  which  in  practice  is  about  once  a  fortnight, 
extra  stones  being  provided  so  that  no  time  is  lost  during 
redressing.  As  the  stones  naturally  wear  more  towards 
the  outer  edges  they  are  usually  dressed  slightly  concave . 
A  much  more  satisfactory  stone  is  one  built  up  upon  a 
centre  of  buhrstone  with  concentric  rings  of  grooved 
emery  blocks,  the  whole  being  surrounded  with  an  iron 
band  and  having  the  loose  blocks  cast  in  metal. 

This  type  of  stone  was  devised  to  remedy  the  wearing 
away  of  the  outer  part  of  the  buhrstone  more  rapidly  than 
the  centre,  and  in  practice  not  only  requires  less  frequent 
dressing,  but  also  can  be  safely  driven  at  5,000  feet 
per  minute  peripheral  speed.  Usually  the  material  is  fed 
through  a  hole  about  10  inches  in  diameter  in  the  upper 
stone,  being  driven  by  centrifugal  force  to  the  outer  edge 
and  cut  by  the  sharp  edges  of  the  grooves.  To  secure  an 
efficient  and  sweet  running  mill  the  rotating  stone  must 
be  carefully  balanced,  and  if  this  is  done  a  speed  of  4,000 
feet  per  minute  instead  of  1,000  may  be  attained^with 


CRUSHING  AND  GRINDING  MACHINERY        25 

safety.  The  limit  of  speed  and  therefore  of  output,  apart 
from  the  mechanical  strength  of  the  stones,  is  determined 
by  the  amount  of  heat  evolved  which  may  be  deleterious 
to  the  material  ground,  and  to  prevent  any  excessive 
amount  of  which  a  water -cooling  arrangement  is  often 
provided. 


FIG.  16. — MILLSTOXE  MILL. 

The  degree  of  fineness  of  the  product  is  regulated  by 
means  of  set  screws  at  the  side,  and  for  paste  or  paint 
grinding  a  scraper  is  provided  on  the  rotating  stone  to 
remove  the  product  as  it  passes  the  grinding  face. 

The  vertical  mills  grind  faster  but  not  as  uniformly 
fine  as  the  horizontal  mills.  In  some  cases  the  rotating 
stone  is  of  smaller  diameter  than  the  stationary  stone, 


26     INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

and  is  driven  eccentrically  to  it,  thereby  redressing  one 
another  at  the  same  time .  Such  mills  are  particularly  use  - 
ful  for  wet  grinding  and  for  paints,  graphite,  chalk,  etc. 

Fig.  16  shows  a  millstone  mill  made  by  J.  Harrison 
Carter,  Dunstable,  in  which  the  stones  are  made  of  French 
buhrstone  or  Derbyshire  Peak,  according  to  the  material 
to  be  ground.  If  used  for  grinding  cement,  phosphates, 
etc.,  the  mill  is  specially  constructed  and  the  stones 
thickened. 

A  very  useful  modification  of  the  eccentric  mill  is  the 
Vertical^ Runner  Mill,  which  is  mainly  used  for  small 


FIG.  17. — VERTICAL  RUNNER  MILL. 

outputs.  Fig.  17  shows  such  a  mill  as  made  by  W.  M. 
Fuller,  junr.,  Birmingham.  The  stones  are  replaced  by  a 
mortar  and  pestle  or  runner,  the  latter  having  about  half 
the  diameter  of  the  former.  They  are  made  in  cast  iron, 
stone,  or  wedgwood  ware,  and  scrapers  are  provided  for 
both  runner  and  mortar.  In  the  smaller  sizes  the  runner 
may  be  swung  clear  and  the  mortar  removed  for  emptying. 


CRUSHING  AND  GRINDING  MACHINERY        27 

Their  efficiency  is  not  high,  but  they  are  extremely  useful 
for  small  operations. 

Fig.  18  shows  a  larger  size  of  runner  mill  made  by 
the  same  firm.  This  machine  has  been  specially  designed 
for  mixing  and  grinding  chemicals,  drugs,  fine  colours, 
dyes,  inks,  explosives,  etc.  The  mortar  and  runner  are 
entirely  enclosed  by  a  cover,  which  is  easily  removable, 
and  an  automatic  discharge  is  provided  which  can  be  used 
without  stopping  the  machine. 

Roller  Mills. — This  machine  combines  a  very  high 
efficiency  with  the  production  of  the  finest  output.  It 
consists  essentially  of  a  roll  of  granite  or  steel  which 
revolves  in  a  cavity  formed  by  a  piece  of  the  same 


FIG.  18. — ENCLOSED  END  RUNNER  MILL. 

material  as  the  roll,  and  which  is  capable  of  a  lateral 
movement  for  the  purpose  of  equalizing  wear. 

The  type  of  roller  mill  most  commonly  found  in  use 
consists  of  three  rolls  driven  at  speeds  varying  in  a  fixed 
ratio.  The  fastest-running  roll,  which  is  the  delivery 
roll,  is  fitted  with  a  scraper,  commonly  referred  to  as  the 
"  doctor,"  upon  the  setting  and  adjustment  of  which 
much  of  the  successful  working  of  the  machine  depends. 

Much  that  has  been  said  previously  in  connection  with 
the  working  of  high-speed  fine  crushing  rolls  applies  with 
equal  force  to  roll  mills.  To  obtain  the  best  grinding 
action  the  surface  of  the  rolls  must  not  be  allowed  to 
become  polished,  but  must  be  roughened,  either  by  sand 
blasting  in  the  case  of  steel  rolls,  or  by  the  use  of  the 


28    INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

diamond  turning  tool  in  the  case  of  granite  rolls.  It  need 
be  hardly  mentioned  that  it  is  of  extreme  importance  that 
the  rolls  and  spindles  must  be  ground  and  turned  dead 
true,  and  any  wear  due  to  working  immediately  remedied. 
As  a  necessary  consequence  the  frame  and  bearings 
must  be  of  substantial  design,  and  the  pressure  on  the 
rolls  must  be  capable  of  being  evenly  distributed  and 
adjusted  to  suit  the  class  of  material  dealt  with.  The 


FIG.  19. — TRIPLE  GRANITE  ROLLER  MILL. 

usual  practice  to  secure  even  wear  in  the  case  of  triple 
roller  mills  is  for  the  central  roller  to  be  given  a  uniform 
lateral  to-and-fro  movement  of  about  J  inch. 

Owing  to  the  fine  work  required,  the  type  of  gearing 
employed  is  of  the  greatest  importance  to  secure  smooth 
and  efficient  running.  In  a  good-class  machine  the  gearing 
is  either  plain  machine-cut  in  cast  iron  or  cast  steel,  or, 
better,  machine-cut  noiseless  train  gear  running  in  oil, 


CRUSHING  AND  GRINDING  MACHINERY        29 

with  the  pinions  so  arranged  as  to  be  capable  of  adjust- 
ment to  compensate  for  any  reduction  in  the  diameter  of 
the  rolls. 

Fig.  19  shows  a  triple  roller  mill  made  by  Follows  and 
Bate,  Manchester,  for  amalgamating  and  finishing  white 
lead,  zinc  white,  oxides,  paints,  etc.  Other  forms  are 
made  by  the  same  firm  for  treating  ochres,  blues,  ink, 
fine  colours,  enamel  paste,  etc.  The  rollers  are  of  Scotch 
grey  granite,  fine-grain  hard  granite,  porphyry,  cast  iron, 
or  chilled  iron,  according  to  the  class  of  work  to  be 
undertaken,  and  range  in  size  from  24  inches  by  12  inches 
to  30  inches  by  15  inches,  requiring  from  3  to  5  horse- 
power, with  an  output  ranging  up  to  8  tons  per  day.  These 
machines  have  a  heavy  framework,  to  ensure  absolute 
steadiness,  and  accurately  machined  bearing-ways  per- 
fectly aligned,  with  steel  plates  secured  by  studs  and 
lock  nuts.  The  rolls  are  of  grey  granite  mounted  securely 
on  steel  shafts  and  protected  from  accident  by  means 
of  spiral  springs,  even  wear  being  obtained  by  securing 
an  even  distribution  of  strains  throughout  and  a  uniform 
lateral  movement  of  the  central  roller.  The  scraper  is 
of  steel,  and  has  a  fine  adjustment  device ;  the  gears  are 
powerful  and  almost  noiseless,  and  the  counter-shaft  is 
in  adjustable  plummer  blocks  supported  by  a  pedestal 
bracket.  Patent  parallel  roller  adjustments  are  provided 
to  front  and  back  rolls,  which  prevent  "  sugar  -loafing  " 
and  ensure  fine  work. 

Ball  Mills. — During  the  last  few  years  these  machines 
have  increased  in  favour,  owing  to  their  simplicity  of 
construction,  ease  of  working,  low  running  costs,  and 
freedom  from  breakdown.  They  consist  of  one  or  more 
jars  of  iron  or  stoneware  arranged  horizontally  in  a 
frame  and  rotated  about  a  common  axis.  The  grinding 
action  is  produced  by  means  of  a  number  of  balls  or 
pebbles  of  porcelain  or  flint,  the  jar  being  driven  at  a 
speed  of  about  80  r.p.m.  By  using  multiple  jar  machines 
small  quantities  of  different  materials  may  be  treated 


30     INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

at  the. same  time,  and  owing  to  the  small  cost  of  jars  the 
losses  due  to  cleaning  may  be  avoided  by  keeping  separate 
jars  for  different  materials. 


~ 


Fig.  20tshows  one  of  the  many  types  of  ball  mills  made 
by  Hind  and  Lund,  Ltd.,  Preston.  These  machines 
create  no  dust  during  working,  resulting  in  no  loss  of 
material,  and  pulverize  all  the  material  to  a  uniform 
product.  The  capacity  of  such  mills  is  given  in  pounds 


CRUSHING  AND  GRINDING  MACHINERY        31 

of  sand  from  which  the  capacity  for  other  materials 
may  be  estimated,  taking  as  a  basis  that  1  cubic  foot  of 
sand  weighs  90  pounds. 

The  machine  in  question  is  fitted  with  two  porcelain 
jars  13  J  inches  diameter  by  12  inches  inside,  mounted  in 
sheet-iron  receptacles,  and  have  an  inlet  or  neck  of 
8J  inches  diameter.  The  approximate  power  required  is 
1  b.h.p.  when  driven  at  a  speed  of  40  to  50  r.p.m.  The 
charge  of  porcelain  balls  or  flint  pebbles  for  each  jar 
amounts  to  45  pounds,  giving  a  grinding  capacity  of  26 
pounds  of  sand  per  day  for  dry  grinding  and  3  gallons 
per  jar  for  wet  grinding. 

For  heavy  work  pebble  mills  are  used  having  a  lining 
of  porcelain,  silex  blocks,  chilled  iron  or  steel  plates, 
the  grinding  medium  being  hard  flints  or  porcelain  balls 
according  to  the  class  of  material  to  be  treated.  For 
special  work,  steel,  brass,  hardwood,  or  vulcanite  balls 
are  made. 

Fig,  21  shows  the  "  Atlas  "  pebble  grinding  mill  made 
by  the  same  firm.  The  body  of  the  mill  is  built  up  on 
steel  gudgeons  of  substantial  design  on  which  the  cast- 
iron  side  plates  are  keyed,  the  outer  shell  being  built  up 
of  mild  steel  plates.  Spur  wheels  are  fitted,  also  barring 
gear  to  the  end  of  the  counter -shaft,  thus  allowing  the 
manhole  to  be  brought  into  position  when  it  is  necessary 
to  change  the  covers  for  charging  or  discharging  the  mill. 
The  gudgeons  of  these  machines  are  sometimes  fitted 
with  stuffing  glands  and  pipe  connections  for  steam  or 
air  inlet  on  one  gudgeon  and  an  outlet  with  cock  on  the 
other,  to  enable  grinding  to  be  done  under  pressure. 

The  operation  of  cleaning  out  the  mill  is  performed 
by  placing  in  the  bottom  of  the  mill  a  charge  of  dry  sand 
equal  to  the  given  capacity  of  the  mill,  and  then  filling 
in  carefully  by  hand  the  charge  of  balls  or  flint  pebbles. 
The  charge  of  sand  is  sufficient  to  fill  in  the  crevices 
between  the  balls  or  pebbles,  and  the  total  volume  is 
equal  to  half  the  volume  of  the  mill.  The  manhole  is 


32     INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

then  closed  by  the  solid  cover,  and  the  mill  rotated  at  the 
specified  speed  for  several  hours.  The  solid  cover  is 
then  replaced  by  a  perforated  cover,  and  the  mill  again 
run  until  all  the  sand  is  sifted  out,  only  the  balls  or 
pebbles  being  retained. 

It  is  of  the  greatest  importance  that  pebbles  should 
be  of  the  best  quality,  as  soft  pebbles  not  only  wear  out 
rapidly,  but  also  deteriorate  the  quality  of  the  material 


FIG.  21. — "ATLAS"  PEBBLE  GRINDING  MILL. 


being  pulverized.  Pebbles  of  uniform  shape,  round  or 
oval,  are  preferable  to  those  of  irregular  shape,  and 
greatly  increase  the  grinding  capacity.  On  no  account 
should  chips  or  fragments  of  pebbles  be  allowed  to  remain 
in  the  mill,  as  they  lower  the  efficiency  considerably. 
As  the  main  action  of  these  machines  is  that  of  grinding 


CRUSHING  AND  GRINDING  MACHINERY        33 


and  not  crushing,  all  material  must  be  crushed  to  a  suitable 
degree  of  fineness  before  being  fed  to  the  machine. 

Fig.  22  shows  a  form  of  ball  mill  made  by  Edgar  Allen 
and  Co.,  Ltd.,  Sheffield,  and  designed  for  continuous 
working.  The  periphery  of  the  mill  is  made  of  hard  steel 


EDGAR  ALLEN  &  CO.  LD, 
SHEFFIELD. 


" STAG  " 
BALL     MILL. 


FIG.  22. — "STAG"  BALL  MILL:  SECTION. 

grinding  plates,  stepped  as  shown;  the  plates,  being 
perforated,  allow  the  material  to  leave  the  inner  chamber 
of  the  mill  as  it  is  reduced  to  powder;  that  portion 
passing  from  the  inner  chamber  falls  on  to  a  second  per- 
forated plate  or  check  sieve,  which  allows  only  the  finer 

3 


34     INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

portion  to  enter  the  outer  chamber,  on  which  is  fixed 
a  final  series  of  sieves,  so  arranged  as  to  produce  the 
necessary  fineness.  In  each  case  the  rejected  portions  are 
returned  automatically  to  the  inner  chamber  for  further 
reduction;  consequently,  the  process  of  grinding  becomes 
continuous  and  automatic.  The  ground  material  is 
delivered  from  the  bottom  or  hopper  portion  of  the 
chamber  into  bags  by  operating  a  slide,  or  the  bottom 
may  be  left  open  for  the  finished  material  to  be  carried 
away  by  a  conveyer.  The  usual  type  of  machine  can 
be  fed  with  material  up  to  2  inches  cube,  but  machines 
are  made  capable  of  taking  material  up  to  7  inches  cube. 
The  side  plates,  which  are  of  rolled  steel  in  the  larger 
sizes  and  of  cast  iron  in  the  smaller  sizes,  are  mounted 
on  cast-iron  centres  keyed  on  to  the  main  shaft.  The 
feed  hopper,  which  is  bolted  to  the  inner  edge  of  the  main 
sole  plate,  is  of  heavy  construction,  so  as  to  remain 
steady  under  all  conditions  of  working. 

The  dust  casing,  constructed  of  steel  plates  in  sections, 
with  angle  iron  joints,  consists  of  two  parts,  of  which 
the  top  one  is  fitted  with  a  nozzle  from  which  the  dust 
generated  by  the  rotary  action  of  the  mill  may  be  carried 
away  to  a  balloon  or  dust  settler.  Where  only  limited 
power  is  available,  a  friction  clutch  is  substituted  for 
the  fast  and  loose  pulleys,  so  that  starting  up  may  be 
accomplished  more  easily  and  with  less  shock  to  the 
gearing. 

These  mills  require  from  3  to  60  b.h.p.,  and  are 
charged  with  from  3  to  60  cwt.  of  steel  balls  according  to 
their  capacity.  The  main  purpose  of  these  mills  is  to 
reduce  material  to  a  suitable  degree  of  fineness  in  order 
to  feed  a  finishing  mill. 

Tube  Mills. — The  tube  mill  is  essentially  a  machine 
for  fine  grinding,  and  since  its  introduction  a  few  years 
ago  it  has  replaced  practically  all  other  machines  for 
this  purpose.  It  is  essentially  a  special  form  of  ball  mill, 
as  the  grinding  is  effected  by  the  rubbing  of  the  material 


CRUSHING  AND  GRINDING  MACHINERY        35 

between  the  flint  pebbles  or  steel  balls  and  the  sides  of 
the  mill,  but  a  certain  amount  of  crushing  is  performed 
by  the  rolling  of  the  balls  and  also  by  their  impact  in 
falling  after  they  have  been  raised  a  certain  distance  by 
the  revolution  of  the  mill.  The  difference  in  action  is 
that  the  material  to  be  ground  is  fed  in  at  one  end  and  is 
delivered  as  a  finished  product  at  the  other,  the  degree 
of  reduction  being  controlled  by  the  speed  of  the  feed, 
since  the  longer  the  pebbles  are  allowed  to  operate,  or, 
in  other  words,  the  slower  the  feed,  the  finer  will  be  the 
condition  of  the  ultimate  product.  Some  machines  are 
provided  with  a  spiral  worm  feed  whereby  a  certain  amount 
of  material  is  allowed  to  travel  to  the  grinding  chamber, 
and  from  whence,  after  passing  a  perforated  plate,  it  is 
carried  by  another  worm  and  discharged. 

These  machines  are  capable  of  being  used  for  either 
dry  or  wet  grinding,  and  in  the  former  case  the  material  to 
be  ground  must  be  quite  dry,  as  1  per  cent,  of  moisture 
will  seriously  reduce  the  output,  and  in  the  latter  case, 
for  wet  grinding,  sufficient  moisture  must  be  present 
so  as  to  form  a  sludge  or  slurry. 

Edgar  Allen  and  Co.,  Ltd.,  Sheffield,  divide  tube  mill 
grinding  into  four  classes  and  provide  machines  ac- 
cordingly : 

1.  For  grinding  either  wet  or  dry  material  which  has 
been  previously  roughly  ground  or  pulverized  in  a  pre- 
paratory mill  such  as  a  ball  mill  (Fig.  23). 

2.  For   the  preliminary   treatment  of   either   wet  or 
dry  material  which  has  been  reduced  to  a  size  equal  to 
about  2  inches  cube. 

3.  For  the  preliminary  and  final  treatment  of  either 
wet  or  dry  material  which  has  been  reduced  to  a  size 
equal  to  about  2  inches  cube. 

4.  For  the  treatment  of  dry  material,  in  conjunction 
with  air  separation,  the  material  having  be  en  reduce 
to  a  size  equal  to  about  2  inches  cube. 

The  first  type  of  mill,  made  in  several  sizes  according 


CRUSHING  AND  GRINDING  MACHINERY        37 

to  the  quantity  and  fineness  of  the  finished  product 
required,  is  designed  to  carry  a  charge  of  flint  pebbles 
in  some  cases  and  small  steel  balls  in  others. 

In  the  case  of  flint  pebbles  being  used,  the  mill  is  lined 
with  either  quartzite  or  chilled  cast-iron  plates,  the  end 
lining  plates  being  of  manganese  steel.  The  quartzite 
lining  is  preferable  to  cast  iron,  both  on  account  of  its 
longer  life  and  the  fact  that  the  efficiency  of  the  mill  is 
increased,  due  to  the  quartzite  bricks  having  a  rough 
face,  which  prevents  slip  of  the  pebbles  down  the  sides 
of  the  mill. 

The  mill  carrying  a  charge  of  small  steel  balls  is  suitable 
for  dealing  with  refractory  material,  and  is  lined  with 
steel  plates  designed  to  prevent  slip.  The  fineness  of 
the  feed  supplied  to  this  machine  should  be  such  as  to 
pass  a  16-mesh  sieve — viz.,  one  which  has  256  holes  per 
square  inch. 

The  second  type  of  mill  is  intended  for  preliminary 
reduction  only  and  the  product  passed  to  a  finishing 
mill  as  described  above.  This  mill  is  lined  throughout 
in  hard  cast  steel  or  manganese  steel,  and  the  diameter  is 
larger  in  relation  to  the  length  as  compared  with  a 
finishing  mill.  It  takes  a  feed  up  to  a  size  equal  to  a 
2-inch  cube,  and  is  charged  with  steel  balls  from  3  inches 
to  5  inches  diameter. 

The  third  type  of  mill  is  a  combination  tube  mill, 
being  divided  internally  by  a  special  diaphragm  into  two 
chambers,  one  of  which  contains  steel  balls,  the  other, 
which  is  the  finishing  chamber,  containing  flint  pebbles. 
Hard  cast  steel  is  used  for  lining  the  first  chamber  and 
quartzite  for  the  remainder,  so  that  this  machine  is  well 
suited  for  grinding  cement,  clinker,  coal,  and  various 
kinds  of  ore. 

The  fourth  type  is  practically  the  same  as  the  second 
type,  but  it  is  used  for  "  bulk-grinding,"  by  which  is 
meant  that  a  large  quantity  of  feed  is  given  to  the  mill, 
but  only  a  portion  is  reduced  to  the  required  fineness 


38     INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

during  its  first  passage .  The  whole  of  the  product,  coarse 
and  fine,  is  passed  through  an  air  separator,  which  extracts 
the  fine  portion  and  returns  the  oversize  to  the  mill  for 
regrinding.  The  advantage  of  this  system  is  that  there 
is  a  saving  of  power  required,  and  that  by  means  of 
adjustments  made  at  the  air  separator  the  fineness  is 
controlled  through  a  wide  range. 


FIG.  24. — STAMPS  FOR  CRUSHING. 

These  mills  are  made  up  to  30  feet  in  length  and  6  feet 
diameter,  carrying  a  charge  of  350  cwt.  of  pebbles  and 
requiring  about  180  h.p. 

Stamps. — This  type  of  reduction  machine  performs  its 
work  by  the  simple  method  of  repeated  blows  on  the 
material  by  means  of  a  falling  weight  under  the  action  of 
gravity  or  power.  Although  of  very  poor  mechanical 


CRUSHING  AND  GRINDING  MACHINERY        39 

efficiency,  the  low  running  costs  make  them  very  suitable 
in  the  larger  sizes  for  the  mining  industry,  and  in  the 
chemical  industry  the  small  sizes  are  found  decidedly 
useful  for  reducing  material  of  a  sticky  or  oily  nature, 
and  for  nuts,  mustard,  etc. 

Fig.  24  shows  this  latter  type  of  machine,  made  by 
J.  Harrison  Carter,  Ltd.,  Dunstable,  consisting  of  two 
iron  pots  having  heavy  stamps  lifted  by  cams  and  dropped 
by  their  own  weight  into  the  pots. 

Although  there  are  many  points  of  interest  in  stamps 
as  used  by  the  mining  engineer,  it  is  felt  that  they  are 
not  strictly  within  the  scope  of  this  volume,  and  for 
further  information  the  student  is  referred  to  books 
dealing  with  mining  machinery. 


CHAPTER  II 
SEPARATING  AND  MIXING  MACHINERY 

IN  the  chemical  industry  it  may  be  necessary  either  to 
separate  different  sized  particles  of  the  same  material 
or  particles  of  different  nature  from  one  another,  and  for 
each  class  of  work  distinctive  machinery  is  used. 

The  simplest  form  of  sifting  machine  is  known  as  the 
"  Grizzly,"  and  is  used,  for  the  sake  of  economizing  power, 
for  separating  the  smaller  pieces  of  material  from  the 
larger,  so  that  the  former  can  go  to  the  fine  crusher  direct 
and  not  with  the  latter  through  the  jaw-crusher. 

A  grizzly  is  an  incline  built  up  of  parallel  bars  set 
transversely,  an  inch  or  more  apart,  according  to  require- 
ments. 

For  finer  work  the  ordinary  sieve  or  screen,  in  which 
the  screening  surface  is  formed  by  a  plate  having  slots 
punched  through  it  or  by  a  woven  wire,  is  in  common 
use. 

The  obvious  development  of  the  common  sieve  is  the 
cylindrical  or  conical  form,  which  can  be  rotated  about 
its  axis. 

The  Trommel. — This  machine  needs  very  little  descrip- 
tion, as  it  consists  of  a  cylindrical  perforated  plate 
mounted  so  that,  in  the  smallest  sizes,  it  can  be  rotated 
on  an  axle,  or,  in  the  larger  sizes,  on  friction  rollers. 
The  cylinder  is  set  at  a  slight  inclination  so  as  to  pass 
the  material  through  rapidly,  and  very  often  several 
cylinders  having  different  degrees  of  perforation  are 
arranged  concentrically,  thus  grading  the  material  into 
several  sizes  at  one  operation. 

40 


SEPARATING  AND  MIXING  MACHINERY       41 


42     INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 


Fig.  25  shows  a  portable  hand-driven  screen  made  by 
Edgar  Allen  and  Co.,  Sheffield,  and  Fig.  26  gives  a  view 
of  a  telescopic  screen  made  by  the  same  firm. 


SEPARATING  AND  MIXING  MACHINERY        43 

Sifting  Reels. — In  cases  where  it  is  required  to  grade 
any  ground  material  into  one  or  more  different  sizes  after 
it  leaves  the  disintegrator  or  other  grinding  machine,  or 
when  it  is  imperative  that  the  finished  material  be  abso- 


FIG.  27. — REELS. 

lutely  all  of  one  mesh,  or  very  finely  dressed,  this  machine 
is  the  most  satisfactory. 

For  coarse  material  a  cover  of  coarse  mesh  is  gripped 
by  means  of  steel  straps  arranged  on  a  number  of  cast-iron 
spiders  keyed  on  a  strong  spindle,  as  shown  in  Fig.  27. 


FIG.  28. — SIFTING  REELS. 

To  save  wear  on  the  cover  a  wrought-iron  ring  is  fitted  at 
the  feed  end.  These  reels  are  mounted  in  an  inclined 
position,  in  casings,  which  are  usually  built  round  them 
at  the  factory  where  installed. 

When  fine  work  is  desired,  the  sifting  medium  is  made 
from  fine  metal  or  silk  gauze,  which  requires  supporting 


44     INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

on  either  a  hexagonal  or  circular  reel.  The  hexagonal 
type  is  suitable  in  the  great  majority  of  cases,  but  if  a 
very  fine  product  is  required  and  the  material  is  of  a 
sticky  nature,  the  circular  reel  provided  with  an  exterior 
brush  to  keep  the  cover  clean  is  the  best  arrangement. 

Fig.  28  shows  a  hexagonal  type  of  sifting  reel  made 
by  J.  Harrison  Carter,  Ltd.,  Dunstable. 

Fig.  29  shows  the  "  quick-change  "  powder  dresser  or 
sifter  for  colour  manufacturers  made  by  Follows  and  Bate, 
Ltd.,  Manchester.  This  machine  is  used  for  ground 
colours,  ochres,  oxides,  sugar,  flour,  blacklead,  etc.,  and 


FIG.  29. — POWDER  DRESSER. 

is  so  arranged  that  various  grades  of  powder  may  be 
produced  at  the  same  time.  The  provision  of  a  removable 
barrel  allows  many  powders  to  be  dressed  on  the  same 
machine,  as  all  parts  are  designed  for  quick  cleaning. 

In  the  cases  of  the  machines  just  mentioned  a  little 
consideration  will  show  that  a  large  percentage  of  the 
sifting  medium  is  inactive,  owing  to  the  machine  being 
gravity  controlled. 

A  more  highly  efficient  machine  is  obtained  by  the 
addition  of  internal  beaters  or  paddles  which  can  be 
driven  at  a  high  speed.  By  this  means  the  whole  of  the 
sifting  surface  is  rendered  active,  owing  to  the  centrifugal 


SEPARATING  AND  MIXING  MACHINERY        45 

action  set  up,  and  the  generation  of  a  strong  air  blast 
also  adds  considerably  to  the  output. 

Fig.  30  shows  a  centrifugal  dressing  machine  made  by 
J.  Harrison  Carter,  Ltd.,  which  is  manufactured  with 
reels  up  to  10  feet  in  length  by  2  feet  in  diameter,  driven 
at  180  to  260  r.p.m.  The  type  illustrated  by  Fig.  29 
attains  a  size  having  a  reel  20  feet  in  length  by  3J  feet 
in  diameter,  but  driven  only  at  40  to  20  r.p.m. 

Vibration  Machines. — When  a  charge  of  material  is 
placed  upon  a  screen  it  is  obvious  that  the  amount  of 
material  which  passes  through  depends  upon  the  ratio 


FIG.  30. — CENTRIFUGAL  DRESSING  MACHINE. 

between  the  sum  of  the  areas  of  the  openings  to  the 
total  area  of  the  screen.  This  ratio  is  known  as  the 
opening  factor,  and  varies  considerably  according  to  the 
type  of  screening  surface  employed.  It  is  larger  for  woven 
screens  than  for  plate  screens,  but  on  the  score  of  economy 
a  screen  having  a  long  life  and  a  small  opening  factoi 
is  often  chosen  instead  of  one  with  a  larger  opening 
factor  and  of  less  durable  nature.  In  the  case  of  silk 
screens,  it  is  essential  that  the  threads  should  be  even 
and  carefully  twisted,  so  that  they  do  not  readily  become 
fuzzy,  whereby  the  opening  factor  is  considerably 
reduced. 


46    INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

If  the  screen  remains  at  rest  it  is  clear  that  the  bulk 
of  the  material  remains  on  the  screen  supported  upon 
a  number  of  arches  formed  in  the  material  by  the  falling 
away  of  the  portion  which  has  passed  through  the  screen. 

Further  sifting  is  only  obtained  by  causing  motion 
of  the  material  relative  to  the  screen,  whereby  these 
arches  are  broken  down.  The  type  of  motion  and  the 
amount  of  power  necessary  cannot  be  estimated  satis- 
factorily, so  that  with  any  particular  type  of  machine 
the  best  method  of  obtaining  efficiency  is  to  conduct 
a  series  of  carefully  checked  trials. 

The  amount  of  relative  motion  required  is  small; 
hence  sifting  machines  which  have  a  shaking  or  vibrating 
screen  form  an  efficient  and  important  class  of  sifting 
machinery. 

It  should  be  noted  that  during  the  period  of  vibration 
not  only  is  the  screen  sifting  the  material,  but  the  material 
is  also  sifting  itself.  Under  the  action  of  gravity  the 
smaller  particles  pass  between  the  larger  particles,  each 
grade  of  material  acting  as  a  screen  for  finer  grades. 
As  the  action  proceeds  it  becomes  more  effective,  until 
a  stage  is  reached  when  the  material  is  composed  of  layers 
of  different  fineness,  the  finest  being  at  the  screen  and  the 
coarsest  at  the  top.  Any  further  action  of  the  screen 
will  only  pass  the  material  through  the  openings  until 
a  size  of  particle  is  reached  which  will  just  pass.  At  this 
point  choking  becomes  serious  and  the  wear  is  excessive, 
both  of  which  are  to  be  avoided  as  far  as  possible.  In 
addition  to  this,  after  the  material  has  once  become 
separated  into  layers  a  certain  amount  of  power  has 
been  used  up  in  uselessly  agitating  the  coarse  material 
which  never  passes  the  screen.  Hence,  for  economical 
working,  separation  into  layers  should  be  carried  out  in 
the  first  place,  and  then  the  coarser  layers  removed  before 
the  finer  portions  are  sifted. 

Shaking  Sifters.— This  type  of  sifter  is  very  effective 
for  grading  most  materials,  into  any  sizes  and  number 


SEPARATING  AND  MIXING  MACHINERY        47 

of  grades.  It  consists  of  one  or  more  screens  supported 
in  a  frame  by  flat  springs  slightly  inclined  to  the  vertical 
and  vibrated  by  means  of  a  cam  or  crank  having  an 
adjustable  stroke.  Owing  to  the  fact  that  both  the 
speed  and  the  length  of  the  stroke  can  be  varied  as 
desired,  this  machine  can  be  adapted  for  a  wide  range 
of  material.  Under  the  combined  action  of  the  crank 
and  the  springs  the  screen  travels  on  a  small  arc  of  a 
circle,  thus  imparting  an  upward  and  forward  motion 
to  the  material  and  producing  very  efficient  screening. 


FIG.  31. — SHAKING  SIFTER. 

Fig.  31  shows  a  type  of  shaking  sifter  made  by 
J.  Harrison  Carter,  Ltd.,  in  different  sizes  up  to  9  feet  in 
length  and  1|  feet  in  width.  For  dealing  with  materials 
of  a  sticky  or  woolly  nature  a  brush  is  provided  to  keep 
the  screen  clean,  and  where  the  material  has  a  tendency 
to  cake,  the  brush  is  also  made  to  vibrate.  When  re- 
quired, this  machine  is  made  with  two  or  more  screens 
arranged  one  above  the  other. 

Fig.  32  shows  a  similar  type  of  machine  made  by  Edgar 
Allen  and  Co.,  which,  however,  finds  its  chief  use  as  a 
shaking  conveyer.  It  is  simple  in  design,  strongly  made, 
and  so  arranged  that  no  violent  shocks  come  on  any  of 


48     INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

the   parts.     A   special   feature   of   this    machine   is   the 
connecting  rod,  which  automatically  takes  up  any  wear 


and  thus  prevents  any  "  knocking  "  from  taking  place. 
The  rod  is  also  designed  to  eliminate  any  bending  action 
at  the  fixed  end,  which  is  the  cause  of  many  breakdowns 


SEPARATING  AND  MIXING  MACHINERY        49 

in  this  type  of  machine.  This  is  effected  by  means  of  a 
toggle  made  of  special  steel,  working  on  knife  edges.  The 
supports,  made  of  strong  spring  steel,  are  secured  to  the 
bottom  of  the  conveyer  by  means  of  pivots  working  on 
a  fixed  spindle. 

This  machine  can  be  used  as  a  screen,  a  picking  belt, 
or  as  a  conveyer. 

A  machine  in  common  use  in  the  gypsum  and  similar 
industries,  called  the  "  Newaygo  screen,"  consists  of  a 
highly  inclined  screen  tightly  enveloped  in  metal  sheeting 


FIG.  33 — GRAVITY  OB  LEG  SEPARATOR. 

to  prevent  escape  of  dust,  and  jarred  by  many  small 
hammers  automatically  tripped  on  the  upper  surface  of 
the  cover. 

Air  Separators. — The  separation  of  materials  such  as 
cement,  phosphate  rock,  basic  and  other  slags,  coke, 
ores,  etc.,  which  are  of  a  cutting  or  wearing  nature,  and 
therefore  not  suitable  for  reels  or  similar  machines,  is 
often  carried  out  by  means  of  an  air  blast. 

If  such  a  material  is  free  from  dust  a  very  simple 
machine,  known  as  a  gravity  or  leg  separator,  can  be  used 
with  good  results.  Fig.  33  is  an  illustration  of  this  type 


50     INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

of  machine  made  by  J.  Harrison  Carter,  Ltd.,  in  which 
the  feed  is  delivered  by  a  feed  roll  in  front  of  the  induced 
air  current  when  the  lighter  particles  are  drawn  back  and 
fall  into  their  respective  divisions. 

The  air  current  is  obtained  from  a  fan  or  from  an 
existing  air  trunk.  This  machine  can  also  be  used  for 
separating  iron  from  materials  before  they  go  to  a  grinding 
or  other  machine.  Any  number  of  legs  can  be  placed  side 
by  side  to  deal  with  various  grades  of  the  same  material, 
and  combined  in  one  frame  complete  with  the  fan. 

If,  however,  the  material  is  dusty,  the  machine  has  to 
be  arranged  so  that  the  fan  circulates  the  same  air  and 
does  not  exhaust  dust-laden  air  into  the  atmosphere. 

Probably  the  best  arrangement  for  separating  powder 
of  any  degree  of  fineness  from  dry  materials  is  the 
"  Stag  "  air  separator  made  by  Edgar  Allen  and  Co., 
Ltd.,  Sheffield. 

Briefly  described,  this  is  a  self-contained  apparatus 
in  which  a  current  of  air  circulating  continuously  through 
a  descending  stream  of  ground  material  separates  the 
finer  particles  from  the  coarser,  the  latter  being  returned 
to  a  pulverizer,  mill-stones,  or  other  grinding  machinery, 
to  be  further  reduced.  The  result  is  a  uniformly  fine 
product  which  can  scarcely  be  obtained  by  any  other 
method. 

Fig.  34  shows  a  sectional  view  of  this  machine,  to 
which  the  following  details  refer:  The  separator  consists 
of  an  outer  casing  of  sheet  iron  A,  circular  in  form, 
together  with  an  inner  casing  B,  separate  from  each  other, 
for  collecting  the  fine  and  coarse  materials  respectively. 

Above  the  inner  casing,  and  fixed  on  a  vertical  spindle, 
is  a  fan  E,  with  blades,  which,  when  revolved,  induces 
a  current  of  air.  Fixed  on  the  same  spindle  is  a  disc,  E1, 
which  spreads  the  material  being  treated  in  a  thin  stream 
all  round  towards  a  fixed  hood  directly  below  the  fan. 
The  current  induced  by  the  fan  passes  upward  and 
carries  with  it  the  fine  particles,  which  are  thrown  into 


SEPARATING  AND  MIXING  MACHINERY        51 

the  outer  casing.     The  coarse  particles,  which  are  too 
heavy  to  be  lifted  by  the  current  of  air,  fall  into  the 


"STAC"  Al  R  SEPAR  ATO  R  . 
MAKERS, 

EDGAR  ALLEN  &  C?  LTP 
SHEFFIELD. 


FIG.  34. — "  STAG  "  AIR  SEPARATOR. 


inner  casing,  and  return  by  the  branch  pipes  6  to  the 
grinding  machine,   to  be  further  reduced.     The  degree 


52     INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

of  fineness  of  the  finished  material  can  be  regulated  by 
the  speed  of  the  fan,  also  by  the  partial  closing  of  a 
damper  fixed  between  the  inner  and  outer  casings,  which 
intercepts  the  current  of  air. 

This  machine  occupies  very  little  space  and  requires  no 
settling  rooms,  and  at  the  same  time  does  away  with  all 
brushes,  sieves,  cloths,  etc.,  in  addition  to  the  fact  that  it 
can  be  run  at  slow  speeds  of  160  to  260  r.p.m. 

It  is  made  in  sizes  up  to  9  feet  in  diameter  and  16  feet 
6  inches  height  over  all,  requiring  about  5  b.h.p. 

Among  the  materials  which  can  be  successfully  treated 
in  this  machine  are  cement  clinker,  raw  shales,  lime- 
stone, burnt  lime,  basic  slag,  phosphate  rocks,  blacking, 
charcoal,  gypsum,  cattle  cake  meal,  cotton-seed  meal, 
clay  and  marl,  coke  dust,  chrome  ore,  bauxite,  aluminous 
earth,  fuller's  earth,  graphite,  soda  ash,  soap  powder, 
gold  quartz,  etc. 

Electro  -  Magnetic  Machines.  —  Machines  in  which 
material  is  sifted  by  means  of  electro -magnetic  force  are 
of  comparatively  recent  introduction.  The  earliest  type 
of  machine  and  one  which  is  in  extensive  use-  to-day  has 
for  its  main  object  the  separation  of  pieces  of  iron  and 
steel  from  material  before  it  is  fed  into  a  crusher  or 
grinder,  where  its  presence  would  cause  a  breakdown. 
In  its  simplest  form  it  consists  of  a  magnet  suspended 
over  a  belt  conveyer  or  shoot  down  which  the  material 
slides.  The  pieces  of  iron  and  steel  caught  by  the  magnet 
are  periodically  removed  by  a  workman,  who  also  picks 
the  material  as  it  passes. 

A  safe  and  simple  type  of  separator  consists  of  a 
pair  or  more  of  magnetized  flat  bars  which  are  fixed  in 
the  bottom  of  a  spout  or  carried  on  a  flat  table,  this 
table  being  given  a  shaking  motion  or  made  a  fixture. 
These  tables  give  a  large  magnetic  surface,  and  conse- 
quently the  iron  has  a  greater  chance  of  being  arrested 
than  it  has  in  the  case  of  some  types  of  barrel  and  drum 
separators. 


SEPARATING  AND  MIXING  MACHINERY        53 

Fig.  35  shows  an  arrangement  for  carrying  electro- 
magnets in  a  spout. 

Fig.  36  shows  a  type  of  machine  made  by  J.  Harrison 
Carter,  Ltd.,  which  is  suitable  for  bone  grinders,  cattle  - 
food  makers,  drug  grinders,  cake  grinders,  oil  mills,  etc., 
where  it  is  essential  that  no  iron  or  steel  shall  go  to 
the  grinding  machinery  and  that  costly  hand-picking  shall 
be  avoided. 

The  extraction  of  the  iron  is  effected  by  one  or  more 
pairs  of  electro -magnetic  bars  placed  in  the  bottom  of 


.00 


l---MzH}-+-Hh 


... 

~  f 
\ 
\ 
4' 

ei  6 

**<_,_^_ 

CD 

;      ( 

-£--- 

"CD 

_  -iA.  _ 

•      j 

e 

^r^~~~, 

(D 

}  { 

©  I; 

^'•Tv 

.0 

"'•  ~~  ~ 
V 

'" 

i 

/ 

\ 

i 

0) 

1      \ 

0 

,•     ~\ 

0 

\  j 

0 

;i 

( 

L—  _ 

^ 

^_-  — 

^^~- 

'  —  — 

_  —  i 

X.  

!       1 

FIG.  35. — ARRANGEMENT  OF  ELECTRO -MAGNETS  IN  SPOUT. 

a  reciprocative  tray,  which  can  be  made  of  any  desired 
width  and  length  and  fitted  with  any  number  of  magnets, 
according  to  the  nature  of  the  material  treated  or  the 
quantity  to  be  dealt  with.  An  automatic  cut-out  valve 
which  opens  when  the  current  fails  acts  as  a  safety  device 
and  prevents  the  feed  entering  the  grinder. 

A  very  simple  and  effective  machine  for  separating 
small  particles  of  iron  or  steel  from  grain  or  seed  is 
formed  by  substituting  a  specially  constructed  magnetic 
pulley  for  the  driving  pulley  of  a  belt  conveyer. 


54     INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

Fig.  37  shows  such  an  arrangement  in  action,  the  grain 
being  shot  off  by  centrifugal  force,  which  in  the  case  of 
the  iron  particles  is  overcome  by  the  magnetic  force, 


and  causes  the  particles  to  be  carried  round  the  pulley 
to  a  point  where  they  are  discharged  into  a  separate 
receptacle. 

The  action  of  the  magnetic  pulley  forms  the  basis  for 


SEPARATING  AND  MIXING  MACHINERY        55 

several  types  of  complicated  separating  machines  de- 
signed for  continuous  working.  By  using  several 
magnetic  drums  rotating  at  different  speeds  it  is  possible 


to  grade  material  according  to  the  magnetic  properties 
of  the  products  present. 

Separating  machines  which  depend  for  their  working 
upon  the  different  behaviour  of  materials  to  charges  of 


56    INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

static  electricity  have  been  developed  within  recent 
years.  These  machines  for  their  successful  running 
require  much  skilled  attention  and  knowledge  of  the 
principles  involved,  and  on  that  account  are  not  found 
widely  used  by  the  chemical  industry  of  to-day. 

Water  Separation. — One  of  the  oldest  and  still  most 
widely  used  processes  for  obtaining  separation  of  materials 
consists  of  utilizing  water  as  a  medium  for  the  separation 


FIG.  38.— LEVIGATING  MILL. 

of  bodies  having  different  specific  gravities  or  of  different 
sized  particles  having  different  rates  of  settlement.  In 
the  mining  industry  this  method  has  received  great 
attention,  and  the  resulting  developments  have  been 
many,  but  in  the  chemical  industry  it  has  only  limited 
application. 

In  the  case  of  barytes,  oxides,  ochres,  coloured  earths, 
and  similar  substances,  the  material  is  first  ground  under 
water  in  a  special  edge  runner  or  levigating  mill,  a  type 


SEPARATING  AND  MIXING  MACHINERY        57 

of  which  is  shown  in  Fig.  38,  made  by  Follows  and 
Bate,  Ltd. 

This  powerful  machine  is  designed  for  crushing  hard 
oxides,  etc.,  in  water,  and  is  conveniently  arranged  for 
floating  off  the  desired  product  by  means  of  a  tap  fixed 
at  the  top  of  the  reservoir,  inside  which  the  runner 
rotates.  The  sludge  door  is  easily  opened,  by  which 
grit,  sand,  iron,  and  other  suchlike  particles,  can  be 
speedily  removed. 

The  mixture  from  the  levigating  mill  is  run  into  a 
large  vat  or  buddle,  and  after  standing  for  some  minutes 
the  upper  portion,  to  a  definite  depth,  is  run  off  into 
settling  tanks,  where  it  is  allowed  to  stand  for  a  longer 
or  shorter  time,  depending  on  circumstances.  After 
more  or  less  complete  settlement  the  clear  supernatant 
liquid  is  run  off  and  the  sludge  removed  for  drying. 
Very  fine  material  of  low  specific  gravity  may  take  three 
or  four  weeks  to  settle,  but  in  the  majority  of  cases  the 
operation  is  completed  in  a  few  hours.  Sometimes  the 
settling  tanks  take  the  form  of  long  troughs,  through 
which  the  mixture  is  made  to  flow  at  a  definite  rate.  By 
this  means  the  coarser  and  heavier  particles  settle  first, 
the  finest  being  deposited  at  the  outlet,  whilst  all  floating 
impurities  are  carried  beyond.  This  method  can  be 
usefully  adopted  for  large  quantities  of  material  which 
does  not  take  too  long  to  settle.  Many  attempts  have 
been  made  to  construct  machines  which  will  accelerate 
the  rate  of  settlement  and  provide  a  more  compact 
arrangement,  but  they  can  hardly  be  said  to  have  received 
much  application  in  the  chemical  industry. 

Fig.  39  gives  a  view  of  the  interior  of  a  settling  tank 
or  subsider  for  cane  juice.  It  is  provided  with  a  copper 
decanting  pipe  and  float  having  a  limited  travel.  When 
the  decanting  is  finished  the  residue  can  be  run  off  by 
means  of  a  separate  cock.  This  type  of  tank,  made  by  Blair, 
Campbell  and  McLean,  Ltd.,  Glasgow,  ranges  from  200  to 
1,000  gallons  in  capacity,  and  is  often  used  in  a  series. 


iiii 

11  «»« 

-II  II? 

S3! 


SEPARATING  AND  MIXING  MACHINERY        61 

Figs.  40  and  41  show  in  plan  and  elevation  a  design 
for  a  levigating  plant  made  by  Follows  and  Bate,  Ltd., 
Gorton.  A  careful  study  of  this  design  throws  con- 
siderable light  on  the  number  and  working  positions  of  the 
machines  which  are  deemed  necessary  for  the  economical 
working  of  one  of  the  simplest  operations  in  the  chemical 
industry. 

Fig.  42  is  interesting  as  representing  the  flow  sheet  of 
the  milling  process  used  in  preparing  rock  salt  for  market. 


T/PPLE. 


FIG.  42. — FLOW  SHEET  OF  MILLING  PROCESS. 

Mixing  Machinery. — Mixing  operations  may  be  roughly 
divided  into  two  classes — (1)  the  mixing  of  solids  with 
solids;  (2)  the  mixing  of  solids  with  liquids.  To  obtain 
ajuniform  mixture  of  different  solids  is  at  present  a 
practical  impossibility,  because  as  soon  as  the  mixture 
is  set  in  motion  a  sifting  action  takes  place,  as  was 
explained  previously  when  dealing  with  the  subject  of 
sifting.  For  this  reason  such  mixing  as  is  required  is 
done  at  the  time  of  grinding  by  feeding  the  different 


62     INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

solids,  in  the  required  amounts,  together  into  the  grinding 
machine. 

The  tube  mill  and  the  ball  mill  are  commonly  used  for 
grinding  and  mixing  at  the  same  time,  and  when  only 
mixing  is  desired  the  balls  are  removed  and  projecting 
arms  substituted  to  assist  in  turning  over  the  material. 
This  operation  is  common  where  different  grades  of 
material  are  required  to  be  mixed,  or  as  a  preliminary 
to  the  grinding  operation,  in  order  to  obtain  a  more 
uniform  product. 


FIG.  43. — POSITIVE  DRIVEN  PUTTY  MILL. 

The  edge  runner  mill  is  another  machine  which  is 
largely  used  for  mixing,  with  more  or  less  satisfactory 
results,  being  limited  in  the  extent  of  its  output. 

A  special  form  of  this  type  of  machine,  made  by 
Follows  and  Bate,  Ltd.,  is  shown  in  Fig.  43,  and  is 
known  as  a  "  putty  "  mill.  Besides  being  useful  for 
crushing  to  a  fine  powder,  chalk,  whiting,  chrome,  indigo, 
Prussian  blue,  etc.,  it  is  also  handy  for  mixing  into  smooth 
pastes,  red  and  white  lead  for  steam  joints,  white  lead 
and  borings  into  tough  paste,  etc.  The  taper  roller 
and  the  pan  of  this  machine  are  caused  to  revolve  by 


SEPARATING  AND  MIXING  MACHINERY         63 


For  Hand  Power  with  Fly  Wheel. 

FIG.  44. — VERTICAL  PUG  MILL. 


64    INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

gearing  at  different  speeds,  and  to  act  independently 
of  the  contents  of  the  pan,  no  matter  how  slippery  they 
may  be. 

For  the  mixing  of  solids  with  liquids  to  form  pastes  or 
semi-liquid  products  the  ball  mill  is  used  for  high-class 
work,  and  the  pug  mill  for  paints,  enamel  varnishes,  etc. 


FIG.  45. — "  POWERFUL  "  HORIZONTAL,  MIXER. 

A  simple  form  of  pug  mill  made  by  the  above  firm  is 
shown  in  Fig.  44,  which  gives  a  view  of  the  interior, 
showing  the  rotating  arms  used  for  mixing.  This  machine 
is  useful  for  small  quantities  of  colours  up  to  6  gallons, 
and  the  hopper  is  lined  with  white  vitrified  enamel  to 
allow  of  ease  in  cleaning. 


SEPARATING  AND  MIXING  MACHINERY        65 

The  pugging  arrangement  is  strong  enough  to  mix  the 
stiffest  pastes,  putty,  and  the  like,  and  will  also  mix 
semi-liquids  in  varnish  or  oil  with  equal  facility. 

A  larger  form  of  this  machine  is  shown  in  Fig.  45, 
which  is  largely  used  as  an  amalgamator  for  ready  mixed 
paints  or  for  oil  blending,  etc.  It  is  fitted  with  a  steel 
pan  with  double-riveted,  lap-jointed  vertical  seam, 


SECTIONAL    VIEW    OF    THE    "  UNIVERSAL  "    CONE    PAINT    MILL. 

FIG.  46. — CONE  PAINT  MILL:  SECTION. 

single  riveted  to  cast-iron  top  and  bottom  rings,  a  heavy 
vertical  steel  shaft  carrying  forged-steel  mixing  blades, 
the  angle  of  which  can  be  adjusted  to  suit  thick  or  thin 
material,  and  a  discharge  door  or  cast-iron  tap  as  shown. 
A  useful  and  handy  type  of  machine  made  by  this  firm 
for  operating  upon  material  of  not  too  great  specific  gravity 
is  the  horizontal  mixer  shown  in  Fig.  45.  It  may  be 
used  for  the  blending  of  dry  colours  or  powders,  or  for 


66    INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

producing  a  liquid,  semi-liquid,  or  paste  like  dough  or 
putty. 

The  open  pan  or  hopper,  of  steel,  brass,  or  copper, 
swings  between  two  heavy  standards,  and  is  firmly 
locked  or  instantly  released  by  the  withdrawal  of  a  stop 
catch.  The  toughened  steel  beaters  are  detachable  for 
cleaning,  and  rotate  in  opposite  directions,  in  such  a 
manner  as  to  prevent  the  contents  of  the  hopper  from 
gathering  in  a  mass  during  the  process  of  mixing.  The 
material  may  be  discharged  whilst  the  beaters  are  revolving 
by  swinging  the  hopper  into  any  desired  position. 


FIG.  47. — DOUBLE  MIXER  FOR  SEMI-LIQUIDS. 

The  "  Universal  "  cone  mill  made  by  this  firm,  of 
which  a  sectional  view  is  shown  in  Fig.  46,  is  a  combined 
mixing  and  grinding  machine  used  for  paints,  enamels, 
varnish,  stains,  pulps,  grease,  lubricants,  boot  dressing, 
match  composition,  antifouling  composition,  etc. 

The  cone  has  deep  feeding  and  fine  grooves,  so  arranged 
as  to  force  the  material  inside  the  hopper  outwards  to 
the  grinding  surfaces,  and  .is  balanced  on  a  central 
vertical  steel  shaft  pivoted  at  the  bottom  in  a  conical 
hardened  steel  bearing,  being  raised  or  lowered  by  means 
of  a  handwheel  at  the  side.  The  cone  rotates  inside  an 
annular  trough  which  is  broad  and  deep,  with  a  square 


SEPARATING  AND  MIXING  MACHINERY        67 

bottom,  and  is  fixed  on  an  incline,  so  that  as  grinding 
proceeds  the  material  flows  steadily  towards  the  outlet 
provided. 

For  working  up  thick  pastes  detachable  beaters  are 
provided,  and  the  annular  trough  is  removed,  so  that 
the  machine  delivers  on  two  sides  simultaneously. 
Sometimes  it  is  necessary  to  keep  the  materials  hot 
whilst  the  mixing  process  is  going  on,  and  to  this  end 


FIG.  48. — "  OPEN-DRUM  "  MIXER. 

mixing  machines  are  sometimes  provided  with  steam 
jackets  or  with  an  arrangement  for  heating  by  gas.  Fig.  47 
shows  a  double  mixer  for  semi-liquids  or  powder  provided 
with  a  steam  jacket,  made  by  J.  Harrison  Carter,  Ltd. 
This  machine  can  be  arranged  to  work  as  a  charge  or 
continuous  mixer  with  the  outlet  at  the  end  or  anywhere 
in  the  length  of  the  bottom. 

Fig.  48  shows  an  "  open -drum  "  batch  mixer  made  by 
the  same  firm,  which  is  used  for  mixing  either  concrete 


68     INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

or  tar  macadam.  This  machine  is  made  in  sizes  weighing 
up  to  2  tons  and  capable  of  dealing  with  up  to  20  cubic 
yards  of  material  per  hour. 

Fig.  49  shows  another  machine  of  this  firm's  make, 
which  is  also  useful  for  concrete  and  macadam.  It  is  an 
under-geared  mixer  which  mixes  thoroughly  without  the 
pieces  being  crushed  smaller  than  is  desired,  and  from 
which  the  material  can  be  automatically  discharged 


FIG.  49. — UNDER-GEARED  MIXER. 


when  desired.  The  pan  is  made  up  to  7  feet  in  diameter 
and  revolves  up  to  19  r.p.m.,  requiring  up  to  12  b.h.p. 

The  soap  industry  makes  great  use  of  mixing  machines 
which  are  known  as  "  crutchers,"  from  the  fact  that  in 
the  early  factories  the  mixing  was  done  by  hand  with  a 
wooden  stick  or  crutch. 

The  crutcher  is  surrounded  by  a  jacket,  into  which  is 
introduced  either  steam  for  heating  or  cold  water  for 
cooling.  There  are  many  different  types  of  beaters,  but 
a  common  form  consists  of  an  Archimedean  screw 
working  in  a  central  cylinder,  over  which  the  soap  passes 


SEPARATING  AND  MIXING  MACHINERY        69 

during  the  mixing.  Various  materials,  such  as  borax, 
starch,  carbonate  of  soda,  sodium  silicate,  talc,  sand, 
perfume,  etc.,  can  be  added  and  thoroughly  incorporated 
to  produce  the  many  types  of  soap  marketed. 

Fig.   50  shows  a   sectional   view  of  a   soap  crutcher 
such  as  is  in  common  use. 


FIG.  50. — CRUTCHIXG  MACHINE  :  SECTION. 

For  dealing  with  plastic  materials  such  as  soap,  india- 
rubber,  etc.,  and  for  the  finishing  of  fine  paints,  enamels, 
printers'  inks,  and  suchlike,  the  fine  roller  mill  is  used. 
In  some  cases  it  is  necessary  to  provide  the  rolls  with  a 
steam-heating  arrangement,  especially  where  a  solvent 
that  has  been  used  is  required  to  be  eliminated.  These 
fine  rolls  have  already  been  treated  in  a  previous  chapter, 
and  reference  should  be  made  to  them  in  connection  with 
the  mixing  of  materials. 


CHAPTER  III 
FILTERING  APPARATUS 

FILTRATION  is  the  name  given  to  the  process  of  separating 
solids  from  the  liquids  in  which  they  are  suspended,  and 
although  a  fairly  simple  operation  when  conducted  en  a 
laboratory  scale,  it  presents  great  difficulties  when  large 
quantities  of  material  have  to  be  handled.  Development 
has  been  along  the  lines  of  speeding  up  the  process,  the 
actual  separation  being  still  effected  by  the  action  of  some 
medium  such  as  cloth,  paper,  asbestos,  slag  wool,  glass 
wool,  unglazed  earthenware,  sand,  or  other  fine  porous 
material. 

The  Bag  Filter. — Although  only  capable  of  dealing 
•with  comparatively  small  quantities  of  material  this 
type  of  filter  has  a  wide  range  of  application.  As  its 
name  implies,  it  consists  essentially  of  a  bag  of  woven 
cotton  or  similar  material,  into  which  the  material  to  be 
filtered  is  placed,  the  liquor  being  allowed  to  ooze  through 
the  pores  of  the  fabric,  whilst  the  solid  material  is  re- 
tained. 

In  dealing  with  materials  of  a  sticky  nature  the  bag 
filter  has  its  advantages,  and  on  this  account  it  is  found 
in  use  particularly  in  the  sugar  industry. 

Fig.  51  shows  an  improved  type  of  bag  filter  for 
filtering  sugar  liquors,  made  by  Blair,  Campbell  and 
McLean,  Ltd.,  Glasgow. 

The  top  is  made  loose  so  that,  together  with  the  dirty 
bags,  it  can  be  lifted  out  of  the  filter  casing  and  taken 
by  an  overhead  trolley  or  crane  to  a  washing  tank,  and 
another  top  ready  with  clean  bags  fixed  in  its  place. 

70 


FILTERING  APPARATUS 


71 


This  arrangement  saves  much  time  and  obviates  the 
necessity  of  having  to  get  inside  the  filter  casing  to  remove 
the  dirty  bags.  The  above  illustration  shows  a  small 
bag  filter  containing  forty -nine  bags.  The  casing  is  of 
wrought  iron,  and  is  fitted  with  a  steam  coil  and  mount- 
ings, discharge  cock,  etc. 


FIG.  51. — BAG  FILTER. 

The  Filter  Press.— Filter  presses  are  used  in  a  great 
variety  of  industries,  and  are  generally  recognized  in  their 
present  form  as  providing  the  most  efficient  means  of 
carrying  out  this  of  ten -required  operation.  By  the 
adoption  of  filter  presses  the  following  advantages  are 
obtained:  (1)  The  greatest  possible  filtering  surface  is 
secured,  together  with  the  minimum  space;  (2)  a  large 
variety  of  materials  can  be  treated,  as  they  can  be 


72     INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

adapted  so  that  the  material  can  be  fed  into  them  at 
pressures  ranging  from  a  slight  gravitational  pressure  up 
to  10  atmospheres;  (3)  the  joints  between  the  filtering 
plates  are  under  direct  observation  and  control,  and 
access  to  the  internal  parts  is  a  simple  operation ;  (4)  the 
solid  matter  can  be  washed  free  of  any  soluble  matter 
which  may  be  deleterious  or  may  be  worth  recovering. 

There  are  two  principal  types  of  filter  presses — viz.,  the 
plate  and  frame  type,  or  frame  press,  and  the  recessed 
plate  type,  or  chamber  press. 

The  Frame  Press  consists  of  a  series  of  filtering  chambers 
formed  by  placing  alternately  a  number  of  solid  plates 
and  hollow  frames  in  a  suitable  framework.  The  solid 
plates — which,  like  the  frames,  may  be  constructed  of 
iron,  wood,  gun-metal,  hard  lead,  aluminium,  etc.— 
have  both  surfaces  corrugated,  to  allow  the  filtered  liquid 
to  escape  easily  and  at  the  same  time  give  adequate 
support  to  the  filtering  medium,  which  usually  takes  the 
form  of  a  filter  cloth  spread  over  each  surface.  The 
rectangular -shaped  plate  is  the  one  most  commonly 
used,  as  it  is  the  most  economical  of  filter  cloth,  but  the 
efficiency  of  the  presses  depends  upon  the  nature  of  the 
plate  surfaces.  It  is  here  that  manufacturers  differ  in 
their  construction,  each  being  guided  by  the  results  of 
his  own  experience. 

The  Premier  Filterpress  Co.,  London,  has  found,  after 
many  years'  experience,  that  vertical  corrugations  or 
ribs,  with  horizontal  ribs  at  the  top  and  bottom,  are 
the  most  efficient  and  provide  ideal  support  for  the  filter 
cloth,  besides  helping  the  filtered  liquor  to  get  away 
easily  and  quickly. 

In  this  type  of  filter  plate  the  ribs  are  quite  smooth, 
so  that  they  can  be  easily  cleaned,  and  are  deep  enough 
to  prevent  the  cloth  sagging  to  the  bottom  of  the  cor- 
rugations and  so  prevent  filtration.  It  has  been  found 
by  experience  that  a  quarter  of  an  inch  is  a  minimum 
satisfactory  depth  to  which  no  filter  cloth  under  pressure 


FILTERING  APPARATUS  73 

can  penetrate.  Should  the  fibre  of  the  filter  cloth  be 
weakened  under  the  action  of  the  material  filtered,  a 
perforated  sheet  is  supplied  to  cover  the  ribs  and  give 
additional  support,  whereby  the  life  of  the  cloth  is  con- 
siderably lengthened. 

When  this  type  of  press  is  closed  up  there  is  formed  a 
series  of  hollow  chambers,  each  of  which  forms  in  itself  a 
complete  filtering  chamber.  Since  all  the  chambers  of 
a  filter  press  commence  working  simultaneously,  it  is 
immaterial  how  many  chambers  are  employed,  except, 
of  course,  as  regards  the  quantities  of  materials  to  be  dealt 
with,  so  that,  provided  the  means  of  feeding  the  presses 
are  suitable  and  adequate,  a  press  with  a  filtering  surface 
of  1,000  square  feet  will  fill  in  the  same  time  as  one  having 
only  100  square  feet  of  filtering  surface. 

As  a  general  rule  solid  matter  does  not  form  in  a  cake 
gradually  built  up  from  the  bottom  of  the  press,  but 
forms  on  the  surface  of  each  plate  and  gradually  builds  up 
towards  the  centre,  finally  forming  a  complete  cake. 

Where  cakes  are  required  having  a  thickness  of  over 
1 J  inches  or  require  a  thorough  washing,  the  frame  press 
is  the  more  suitable  type  to  employ.  A  further  advantage 
is  secured  by  the  ease  with  which  the  filter  cloth  is  fixed, 
as  all  that  is  necessary  is  to  cut  a  piece  of  filter  cloth 
rather  more  than  double  the  length  of  the  plate  and  simply 
hang  it  over.  This  is  possible  owing  to  the  feed  passages, 
etc.,  being  arranged  on  the  border  of  the  plates  with 
ports  leading  to  the  interior  of  the  chambers.  Also,  in 
certain  cases  the  frame  and  cake  can  be  removed  and 
stored  without  breaking  up. 

It  is  often  found  necessary  to  wash  the  cake  when 
formed,  either  to  remove  deleterious  substances  or  to 
recover  valuable  soluble  matter.  For  this  purpose  both 
plates  and  frames  are  arranged  with  channels  for  feed 
inlet,  wash -water  inlet  and  outlet,  and  a  separate  outlet 
— or  outlet  taps — on  each  plate,  for  the  filtrate.  The 
usual  arrangement  is  for  the  channel  for  the  wash -water 


74    INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

inlet  to  be  made  at  the  bottom  of  the  plates  and  frames ; 
the  three  channels  for  feed  inlet,  wash -water  and  air 
outlets  at  the  top ;  and  the  filtrate  outlet  at  the  bottom 
corner,  opposite  the  wash -water  inlet. 

The  material  to  be  filtered  enters  the  chamber  by  means 
of  a  port  in  each  frame  from  the  feed  inlet  A  (see  Fig.  52). 
The  wash-water  inlets  and  outlets,  also  the  air  outlets,  are 
arranged  so  that  the  port  to  the  chamber  is  made  only  in 
alternate  plates.  By  this  arrangement  the  water  enters 
at  B  behind  the  cloth  on  one  side  of  each  cake,  and  as  it 
rises  in  the  press  expels  any  enclosed  air,  which  can 
escape  through  the  air  outlet  C. 


\ 


B  B 

FIG.  52.— FILTER  PRESS  PLATES  AND  FRAMES. 


2213 


The  water  forms  in  a  vertical  wall  behind  the  filter 
cloth,  and  passes  evenly  through  the  cake  and  away  by 
the  special  outlet  channel  E,  on  the  opposite  side  of  the 
cake  to  which  it  enters.  This  action  is  sometimes 
assisted  by  putting  a  siphon  pipe  on  the  wash-water 
outlet,  so  that  even  at  the  top  of  the  press  the  wash-water 
is  under  a  slight  head. 

A  special  attachment  or  control  apparatus  is  often 
placed  on  the  wash-water  outlet,  in  order  that  hydrometer 
readings  can  be  taken  of  the  specific  gravity  of  the  wash 
water,  whereby  the  degree  of  washing  can  be  checked. 

Partial  washing  may  be  done  in  any  filter  press  by 
passing  water  through  the  feed  pipe,  but  the  above 
arrangement  of  a  frame  press  is  the  only  method  for 


FILTERING  APPARATUS  75 

thorough  washing.  With  this  type  a  more  even  thick- 
ness of  cake  is  obtained  and  the  feed  passage  being 
arranged  outside  the  actual  cake,  avoids  the  formation 
of  a  core  of  material  throughout  the  length  of  the  press, 
which  is  not  subjected  to  the  action  of  the  wash -water. 

The  position  of  the  feed  channel  is  varied  according  to 
circumstances.  When  the  solid  matter  is  so  heavy  that 
the  formation  of  the  cake  becomes  abnormal,  the  feed 
passage  is  placed  at  the  top;  whereas  if  the  solid  matter 
is  very  fine  and  will  not  form  a  complete  cake  the  feed 
is  placed  at  the  bottom,  to  allow  of  drainage  before 
opening  the  press.  For  certain  materials  which  require 
to  be  pressed  at  temperatures  above  or  below  the  normal, 
plates  are  fitted  having  coils  cast  internally,  through 
which  steam  or  brine  may  be  circulated  at  will. 

Sometimes  steam  is  admitted  into  the  material  itself 
by  means  of  the  cock  on  the  feed  inlet  or  the  wash-water 
inlet.  In  other  cases,  in  order  to  produce  a  drying  effect, 
these  passages  are  used  for  leading  hot  or  cold  air  through 
the  cakes  when  they  are  formed.  As  a  general  rule  it 
is  best  to  have  a  tap  on  each  chamber,  because  it  gives 
control,  so  that  if  the  cloth  bursts  the  trouble  can  be 
easily  located. 

Fig.  53  gives  a  diagrammatic  view  of  a  frame  press 
made  by  Blair,  Campbell  and  McLean,  Ltd.,  for  use  in 
the  sugar  industry. 

Fig.  54  shows  a  plate  and  frame  type  of  filter  press  made 
by  Manlove,  Alliott  and  Co.,  Ltd.,  Nottingham. 

The  Chamber  Press,  or  recessed  plate  type,  has  plates 
which  are  made  with  raised  edges,  so  that  when  they  are 
placed  together  in  a  horizontal  series  each  pair  encloses 
a  chamber,  the  feed  passage  as  a  rule  being  in  the  centre. 
This  type  is  more  suitable  when  materials  are  used  which 
are  liable  to  clog  the  passages  of  a  frame  press ;  moreover, 
when  the  press  is  opened  the  cakes  can  easily  be  made 
to  fall  out  on  to  a  conveyor,  truck,  or  other  arrangement 
underneath  the  press. 


FILTERING  APPARATUS 


77 


Fig.  55  shows  a  recessed  type  of  plate  made  by  Manlove, 
Alliott  and  Co.,  Ltd.,  Nottingham.  The  fixing  of  filter 
cloths  in  this  type  of  press  is  obviously  a  more  difficult 


operation  than  is  the  case  in  a  frame  press.  As  before, 
the  cloth  is  cut  in  pieces  rather  more  than  double  the 
length  of  the  plate,  but  holes  must  be  cut  to  correspond 
to  the  feed  channel  and  the  cloth  fixed  at  this  point. 


78    INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

This  can  be  effected  by  means  of  clips  of  the  "  bayonet  " 
or  "  screw  union  "  type,  as  made  by  the  above  firm 
and  shown  in  Figs.  56  and  57. 


FIG.  55. — FILTER  PRESS  PLATE:  RECESSED  TYPE. 

Another  method  frequently  employed  is  known  as  the 
"  double  cloth  "  system,  which  employs  two  cloths  sewn 
together  where  the  feed-hole  comes,  one  half  being  rolled 
up  and  passed  through  the  centre  hole  and  the  two  corres- 


FIG.  56.— FILTER  CLOTH  CLIPS:  BAYONET  TYPE. 

ponding  halves  tied  together  by  tapes  at  the  top  of  the 
plate.  This  process  can  be  easily  followed  out  by  a 
reference  to  Fig.  58.  In  this  type  of  press  the  cloth  forms 
an  efficient  joint  between  the  plates,  which  grip  it 


FILTERING  APPARATUS 


79 


between  their  edges,  whereas  the  frame  press  necessitates 
cuffs  being  slipped  over  the  lugs,  or  grooves  cut  round  the 
channel  holes  and  india-rubber  washers  employed. 

Fig.  59  shows  a  recessed  type  of  filter  press  made  by 
the  above  firm. 


FIG.  57. — FILTER  CLOTH  CLIPS:  SCREW  TYPE. 

The  materials  used  in  the  construction  of  a  filter  press 
depend  upon  the  nature  of  the  materials  to  be  filtered, 
but  where  possible  iron  is  used,  on  account  of  its  greater 
strength  and  durability.  Wooden  presses  are  made 
equally  as  strong  as  iron  ones,  but  they  wear  out  more 


i. 


FIG.  58. — FILTER  CLOTH:  FIXING  IN  RECESSED  TYPE. 

quickly;    they  can,   however,   be  easily  replaced   at  a 
small  cost. 

A  quick  and  efficient  method  of  closing  a  filter  press 
is  one  of  the  most  important  points  in  their  design.  There 
are  various  methods  of  closing  the  presses  and  keeping 
them  tight  during  filtration  and  washing,  but  experience 


80     INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 


720' 


FIG.  59. — FILTER  PRESS:  RECESSED  TYPE 


FIG.  60. — FILTER  PRESS:  CENTRAL  SCREW  CLOSING. 


FILTERING  APPARATUS  81 

has  shown  that  for  presses  up  to  25  inches  square  a 
central  screw  and  hand  wheel,  as  shown  in  Fig.  60,  with  a 
lever  or  capstan  bar  for  tightening  up,  is  an  effective 
arrangement  and  the  least  likely  to  get  out  of  order. 
To  avoid  the  long  operation  necessitated  by  a  fixed  screw 
centre,  the  Premier  Filterpress  Co.,  Ltd.,  provide  a 
rotary  screw  which  after  a  few  turns  can  be  swivelled 
into  any  desired  position. 


FIG.  61. — FILTER  PRESS:  RACK  AND  PINION  CLOSING 

For  presses  having  plates  larger  than  25  inches  square 
a  single  screw  is  hardly  powerful  enough,  and  it  is  here 
that  manufacturers  differ  in  their  designs. 

The  standard  arrangement  of  Manlove,  Alliott  and  Co. 
is  by  rack  and  pinion,  with  wheels  operated  by  levers  for 
tightening  up,  as  shown  in  Fig.  61,  the  rack  being  con- 
nected to  the  loose  head  by  a  flexible  joint,  by  this 
arrangement  considerable  simplicity  and  speed  of  opera- 
tion being  obtained. 

Other  types  of  closing  gear,  including  pneumatic  or 
hydraulic  means,  as  shown  in  Figs.  62  and  63,  are  em- 
ployed in  certain  circumstances. 


82     INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

The  feeding  of  filter  presses  is  most  important,  as  in 
order  to  produce  the  best  results  the  flow  of  filtrate 
must  be  as  uniform  as  possible.  As  the  operation  pro- 
ceeds, the  resistance,  owing  to  the  formation  of  the  cake, 
increases:  hence  the  pressure  rises.  This  rise  should  be 
slow  and  regular,  and  should  not  exceed  a  definite 
pressure,  depending  on  the  nature  of  the  machine.  The 
usual  method  of  feeding  is  either  by  a  pump,  which  may 
be  belt,  motor,  or  steam  driven,  or  by  means  of  a  forcing 
ram  worked  by  compressed  air.  If  pumps  are  used,  those 


FIG.  62. — FILTER  PRESS:  COMPRESSED  AIR  CLOSING. 

having  either  ball  valves  or  wing  rotating  valves  are 
most  suitable ;  and  whereas  for  small  quantities  a  double- 
acting  single -plunger  pump  is  good  enough,  yet  for  large 
quantities  the  three-throw  pump,  which  gives  a  regular 
flow,  is  the  one  to  be  adopted . 

A  more  expensive  method  of  feeding  is  by  Montejus 
and  air  compressor,  but  it  is  not  surpassed  by  any  other 
method  for  steadiness  of  pressure.  When  using  a  Montejus 
the  gauge  will  rise  quite  regularly  all  the  way  through, 
and  if  an  air  receiver  is  used  between  the  Montejus  and 
the  compressor  a  sudden  variation  in  pressure  is  almost 


FILTERING  APPARATUS  83 

impossible.  All  pumps  used  for  feeding  filter  presses 
should  be  provided  with  air  vessels  both  on  the  suction 
and  the  delivery  side,  a  pressure  gauge  in  the  top  of  the 
delivery  air  vessel,  a  safety  valve  adjustable  to  blow 
off  at  a  definite  pressure,  and  a  stone  trap  to  prevent 
foreign  substances  reaching  the  suction  valves. 

To  use  the  same  pump  for  both  washing  and  feeding 
is  not  good  practice,  and  separate  pumps  for  these  duties 
will  be  found  the  most  economical  in  the  long-run. 


FIG.  03. — FILTER  PRESS:  HYDRAULIC  RAM  CLOSING. 

As  a  rule  filter  presses  are  square  in  section,  although 
many  having  circular  plates  are  on  the  market.  The 
latter  have  an  element  of  additional  strength  which  is 
discounted  by  the  action  of  the  safety  valve  on  the 
delivery  side.  Although  the  tendency  to  buckle  is  less 
than  in  the  case  of  square  plates,  and  tight  jointing  is 
easily  obtainable,  yet,  as  the  duty  of  a  filter  press  is  to 
filter,  the  great  waste  of  filter  cloth — nearly  25  per  cent, 
of  the  cloth  needed  for  the  same  diameter  square  plate — 
and  the  equivalent  loss  of  filtering  surface  more  than 
balance  any  advantage  the  round  type  may  have  over 
the  square  type. 


84     INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

Provided  presses  are  erected  level,  so  as  to  avoid  any 
liability  to  leak,  no  special  skill  is  required  in  their 
assembly,  and  after  a  few  runs  any  average  hand  becomes 
quite  competent  to  look  after  the  plant  in  a  satisfactory 
manner. 

Centrifugal  Machines. — The  work  of  this  machine 
differs  from  that  of  the  filter  press  in  that  it  mainly 
consists  of  removing  moisture  which  adheres  to  solids, 
and  not,  as  in  the  latter  case,  separating  solids  from  an 
excess  of  moisture. 

It  is  included  amongst  filtering  machines  because 
actual  separation  is  effected  by  means  of  a  filtering 
medium,  the  action  of  centrifugal  force  being  merely  to 
accelerate  the  operation.  It  finds  its  greatest  use  in  the 
drying  of  crystals  by  throwing  off  the  adhering  mother 
liquor,  and  for  this  purpose  is  largely  employed  in  the 
sugar  industry. 

It  is  capable  of  very  extended  application,  but  as  it 
requires  very  careful  workmanship,  considerable  skill,  and 
experience  in  running  it  if  accidents  are  to  be  avoided,  the 
result  is  that  many  manufacturers  are  unable  to  take 
full  advantage  of  this  means  of  separation. 

The  centrifugal  machine  consists  essentially  of  a 
cylinder  with  an  adjustable  perforated  circumference, 
fixed  to  a  vertical  shaft  which  is  rotated  at  a  high  speed. 

As  the  cylinder  and  its  contents  rotate,  the  latter  is 
driven  by  centrifugal  force  to  the  circumference,  where 
the  perforated  screens  retain  the  solids  and  pass  the 
liquids. 

Fig.  64  gives  a  section  through  a  "  Weston  "  type  of 
centrifugal  basket  and  outer  case,  showing  also  the 
central  discharge  with  valve  and  inside  and  outside 
steaming  arrangement. 

This  machine  is  largely  made  by  Pott,  Cassels  and 
Williamson,  Motherwell,  Scotland,  and  Fig.  65  shows 
the  various  types  of  linings  which  this  firm  supply  for 
use  with  the  baskets.  In  actual  practice  three  linings 


FILTERING  APPARATUS 


85 


are  used:  a  4-mesh  plain  woven  iron  lining  next  the 
basket  shell,  then  a  7-mesh  plain  woven  brass  lining,  and 
an  inner  lining  of  perforated  copper  sheet  with  conical 
oblong  holes. 


For  special  work,  linings  of  perforated  copper  sheet 
with  conical  round  holes,  of  26  or  30 -mesh  twilled  woven 
copper  or  of  spiral  woven  brass  (Lieberman  lining),  may 
be  used. 


86     INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

The  spindle  bearing  is  perhaps  the  most  important 
part  of  the  centrifugal,  as  it  has  to  do  continuous  heavy 
work  at  high  speeds  with  a  minimum  of  attention.  In 
some  cases  the  load  is  about  1  ton  with  a  speed  of  750 
revolutions  a  minute,  and  the  machine  has  to  work  day 


FIG.  65. — TYPES  OF  LININGS  FOR  BASKETS. 

and  night  for  months  on  end.  It  is  essential,  therefore, 
that  the  wearing  parts  should  last  for  a  very  considerable 
time  and  that  the  cost  of  repairs  should  be  small. 
Figs.  66  and  67  show  a  solid  spindle  with  compound  ball- 
bearing and  a  patent  sleeve  and  ball-bearing  spindle  as 
made  by  this  same  firm.  In  this  latter  case  both  sleeve 


FILTERING  APPARATUS  87 

and  ball-bearing  run  in  an  oil  bath,  and  no  adjustment 
is  necessary. 

The  actual  power  used  in  driving  a  centrifugal  machine 
is  not  only  determined  by  the  amount  required  when 
running  at  speed — a  comparatively  small  amount  in  the 


392 

FIG.  66.— BEARING  FOR  CENTRIFUGAL  SPINDLE. 

case  of  a  well-balanced  machine — but  also  by  the  time 
allowed  for  acceleration.  In  practice  the  average  time 
allowed  for  acceleration  is  two  minutes,*  and  the  b.h.p. 
required  is  calculated  on  this  basis.  If  a  shorter  period 
of  acceleration  is  desired,  there  must  be  a  corresponding 


88    INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

increase  of  power  available,  and  for  a  longer  period  a 
smaller  amount  will  suffice. 

Power  is  usually  transmitted  to  the  centrifugal  from 
the  prime  mover,  in  most  cases  a  steam  engine,  by  either 
a  belt,  electric  motor,  or  water. 


396 
FIG,  67. — BEARING  FOR  CENTRIFUGAL  SPINDLE. 

With  the  belt  drive  the  centrifugal  counter -shaft  is 
driven  by  an  engine  or,  as  a  variation,  it  may  be  driven 
by  an  electric  motor.  A  method  which  has  been  adopted 
for  many  years  for  starting  up  centrifugals  and  other 
high-speed  machines  is  to  transmit  the  power  to  the 


FILTERING  APPARATUS 


89 


90    INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

centrifugal  through  a  friction  pulley  such  as  is  shown  in 
Fig.  68. 

By  this  means  the  machine  is  started  without  undue 
strain  on  the  driving  belt,  and  may,  within  limits,  be 
adjusted  to  give  different  times  for  getting  up  speed. 
Anyone  who  has  the  driving  of  a  centrifugal  in  hand 
must  be  thoroughly  acquainted  with  the  working  and 
adjustment  of  a  friction  pulley.  The  type  of  friction 
pulley  illustrated  can  be  adjusted  in  the  following 
manner :  First  put  the  clutch  in  the  off  position  close  up 
to  the  driving  arm,  screw  the  nuts  behind  the  springs 
toward  the  centre  of  the  pulley  as  far  as  they  will  go,  and 
remove  the  loose  caps  from  the  ends  of  the  driving  arms. 
Screw  the  arms  into  the  leather-faced  friction  pieces  until, 
when  each  friction  piece  is  pulled  as  far  as  it  will  go 
toward  the  rim  of  the  pulley  there  is  a  clearance  of  about 
TV  inch  between  the  leather  face  and  the  inside  of  the  rim. 
This  ensures  that  the  frictions  will  come  quite  clear  out 
of  gear  when  the  clutch  is  in  the  off  position.  Replace 
the  loose  caps,  which  are  provided  with  toes  between 
which  flats  on  the  screwed  arms  slide  and  prevent  the 
rods  turning.  As  adjusted  above  and  without  bringing 
the  small  spiral  springs  on  the  arms  into  play,  the  friction 
may  grip  too  fiercely  and  throw  off  the  belt  or  accelerate 
the  centrifugal  too  quickly.  In  such  a  case  screw  the 
nuts  on  the  rods  towards  the  rim  of  the  pulley  so  that  the 
springs  take  some  of  the  centrifugal  force  off  the  arms,  thus 
reducing  the  friction  and  giving  a  lessened  pull  on  the  belt. 
The  amount  of  compression  on  each  spring  should  be 
approximately  the  same,  and  the  travel  of  the  clutch  should 
not  exceed  1  inch,  which  is  determined  by  the  correct 
setting  of  the  loose  collar. 

In  the  case  of  electric -driven  centrifugals  the  friction 
pulley  is  used  with  a  D.C.  motor,  but  in  the  case  of  an 
A.C.  motor  a  flexible  coupling  is  used  to  connect  the 
motor  to  the  centrifugal  spindle.  This  type  of  motor 
has  other  advantages  in  that  there  are  no  commutators 


FILTERING  APPARATUS 


91 


or  brushes  to  wear  and  the  speed  is  constant.  It  is  well 
to  note  that  in  A.C.  motors  the  available  range  of  speeds 
depends  on  the  frequency,  and  it  is  necessary  to  bear  this 
in  mind  when  deciding  on  the  frequency.  The  table 


FIG.  69. — "  WESTON  "  CENTRIFUGAL  MACHINE. 

given  below  gives  the  possible  synchronous  speeds  for 
some  common  frequencies,  the  actual  running  speeds 
being  about  4  per  cent,  less  than  the  synchronous 
speeds. 


92     INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 


Frequency. 

Synchronous 
Speeds. 

Diameter  of  Baskets  of 
Suitable  Centrifugals. 

25 
40 
50 
60 

1,500,  750 
1,200,  800 
1,500,  1,000,  750 
1,200,  900 

24,  48  inches. 
30,  48,  30,  48  inches. 
24,  36,  40,  42,  48  inches. 
30,  40,  42  inches. 

Fig.  69  shows  a  belt-driven  centrifugal  having  a 
42 -inch  diameter  basket,  together  with  the  necessary 
steel  framing,  etc. 

In  the  case  of  water -driven  centrifugals,  jets  of  water 
under  pressure  are  made  to  impinge  on  the  cups  of  a 
Pelton  wheel  which  is  coupled  to  the  centrifugal  spindle. 
The  pressure  of  the  water  is  raised  either  by  a  direct- 
acting  steam-driven  duplex  pump,  a  turbine  pump 
driven  by  an  engine  or  electric  motor,  or  a  high-duty 
flywheel  pumping  engine.  The  duplex  pump  is  the 
cheapest  and  the  one  most  commonly  used;  the  turbine 
has  the  advantage  of  simplicity,  constant  running,  and 
the  ability  to  give  out  power  approximately  proportional 
to  the  power  consumed;  the  pumping  engine  is  mcst 
economical  in  steam  consumption,  but  is  the  most 
expensive  in  first  cost. 

Fig.  70  shows  a  sectional  drawing  of  a  water -driven 
centrifugal  made  by  Pott,  Cassels  and  Williamson,  and 
the  following  details  relative  thereto  will  serve  to  illus- 
trate the  various  points  of  centrifugal  machines  in 
gen  eral . 

The  motor  case  3-4,  fitted  with  a  cover  1,  into  the 
centre  of  which  is  secured  a  hollow  axle  9,  which  does 
not  revolve,  rests  on  the  beams  40,  which  form  part  of 
the  framing.  On  the  lower  part  of  the  axle  a  ball-bearing 
10  is  placed;  the  inner  part  of  the  ball-bearing  is  held 
firmly  to  the  hollow  axle  by  the  nut  12,  and  the  outer  part 
is  held  in  the  eye  of  the  water  wheel  2  by  the  nut  11, 


FILTERING  APPARATUS 


93 


29!  A 


FIG.  70. — "  WESTOX  "  CENTRIFUGAL  MACHINE:  WATER-DRIVEN 


94     INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

and  so  revolves  with  it.  The  upper  parts  of  the  motor 
case  have  flanges  projecting  towards  each  other,  forming 
diaphragms  to  prevent  the  water  spray  from  getting 
over  the  top,  so  that  there  is  no  possibility  of  the  spent 
water  going  anywhere  except  through  the  return  pipe  39, 
back  to  the  water  tank  which  supplies  the  pump  for 
driving  the  machine.  The  top  of  the  water  wheel,  on  the 
face  of  which  the  water  cups  5  are  secured,  revolves 
between  the  diaphragms  on  the  top  of  the  motor  case. 
To  prevent  any  alteration  in  the  position  of  the  cups,  they 
are  fitted  into  a  groove  on  the  face  of  the  wheel.  To 
obtain  maximum  efficiency  they  are  carefully  machined, 
have  knife  edges,  and  are  of  parabolic  form,  properly 
relieved  on  the  bottom  for  the  escape  of  the  spent  water. 
Further,  as  the  wheel  does  not  oscillate,  these  cups  always 
maintain  the  same  position  relative  to  the  water  jets 
6  and  7,  which  are  screwed  into  the  inlets  8,  provided  with 
inspection  plugs  41.  The  inlet  bends  8  can  be  easily 
and  quickly  removed  and  a  choked  jet  readily  cleaned. 

On  the  bottom  of  the  water  wheel  is  bolted  a  driver  25, 
which  encloses  the  governor  balls  19  in  an  oil-tight  cavity 
below  the  ball-bearing.  This  cavity  is  partly  filled  with  oil 
through  the  oil  cup  43,  which  lubricates  the  governor  pins 
23  and  the  ball-bearings  21  and  10.  The  governor 
spindle  24,  which  is  a  tube  for  the  passage  of  the  oil,  has 
a  ball-bearing  21  at  the  bottom  and  a  collar  14  at  the  top. 
The  governor  balls  are  held  in  the  "  off  "  position  by  the 
springs  20,  which  are  of  such  strength  that  when  the 
machine  attains  full  speed  the  centrifugal  force  causes 
the  balls  to  fly  outwards  and  move  up  the  spindle  24 
by  means  of  the  levers  22.  On  the  top  of  the  motor  case 
cover  is  a  fulcrum  16  for  the  lever  15,  at  the  shorter  end 
of  which  is  a  swivelling  cross-head  18,  through  which 
passes  the  governor  rod  17,  adjusted  and  secured  by 
two  nuts. 

When  the  machine  attains  full  speed  the  governor  rod 
is  forced  by  means  of  the  levers,  and  releases  a  trigger 


FILTERING  APPARATUS  95 

which  cuts  off  the  water  from  the  accelerating  jet  6, 
leaving  the  smaller  jet  7  to  maintain  operations. 

To  the  underside  of  the  beam  is  attached  the  centrifugal 
suspending  block  37,  into  which  are  fitted  india-rubber 
buffer  rings  35,  separated  by  a  loose  cast-iron  ring  36. 
Thus  top  and  bottom  buffers  support  the  weight  of  the 
basket,  which  is  attached  to  the  lower  end  of  the  centri- 
fugal spindle  38.  By  this  means  great  resiliency  and 
steadiness  are  obtained  when  the  machine  is  running 
with  either  a  balanced  or  an  unbalanced  load,  and  also, 
as  the  buffers  are  separated  by  a  loose  ring,  any  wear  on 
the  bottom  buffer  is  compensated  by  the  compression 
caused  and  is  self-adjusting. 

The  ball-bearing  housing  34  fits  inside  the  india- 
rubber  buffers  and  contains  the  compound  ball-bearing  33, 
secured  by  a  nut  32;  the  inner  part  of  the  ball-bearing 
is  secured  to  the  centrifugal  spindle  by  the  top  nut  28 
through  the  brake  casting  29.  To  permit  of  the  oscil- 
lation of  the  centrifugal  spindle  and  the  basket,  the  water 
wheel,  which  does  not  oscillate,  is  connected  to  the  brake 
pulley  on  the  top  of  the  spindle  by  leather  links  27,  the 
eyes  of  which  are  slipped  over  the  points  of  the  driving 
pins  26.  Thus  a  strong  flexible  coupling  is  formed  and 
one  which  permits  of  the  motor  or  centrifugal  being 
detached  as  desired  by  simply  slipping  off  the  links. 
The  brake  band  is  supported  by  angle  iron  feet  which 
rest  on  a  flange  in  the  bracket  37,  so  there  is  no  possi- 
bility of  the  band  drooping  unequally.  The  feet  on  the 
brake  band  are  so  arranged  that  when  the  brake  is  off 
an  equal  space  is  left  all  round  between  the  band  and 
the  pulley. 

As  is  well  known,  the  power  to  accelerate  a  machine  to 
full  speed  quickly  is  much  greater  than  is  required  to 
maintain  it  at  full  speed ;  consequently  each  centrifugal 
is  provided  with  two  water  jets,  a  large  one  and  a  small 
one.  When  starting  the  machine  both  jets  are  required, 
and  when  full  speed  is  reached  the  small  jet  only  is 


96    INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

necessary  to  maintain  full  speed.  It  sometimes  happens 
that  when  the  centrifugals  are  worked  irregularly  all 
the  machines  may  be  accelerating  at  the  same  time, 
requiring  an  amount  of  water  largely  in  excess  of  normal 
requirements,  and  for  this  reason  pumps  have  hitherto 
been  made  very  large. 

Fig.  71  shows  two  machines  interlocked  by  a  special 
gear  made  by  this  firm,  and  so  arranged  that  not  more 
than  one  half  of  the  machines  can  be  accelerated  at  the 
same  time,  thereby  reducing  the  size  of  the  pump  con- 
siderably, without  in  any  way  reducing  the  output.  In 


FIG.  71. — INTERLOCKING  GEAR  FOR  WATER-DRIVEN  CENTRIFUGAL: 

SECTION. 

ordinary  practice  each  pair  of  machines  is  interlocked, 
so  that  when  one  machine  is  started  the  other  machine 
cannot  be  started  until  the  first  has  attained  full  speed. 
As  the  machines  are  usually  arranged  to  accelerate 
in  two  minutes,  and  the  cycle  of  operations  will  occupy 
at  least  six  minutes,  the  interlocking  gear  ensures  the 
machines  being  worked  in  proper  rotation  without 
interfering  with  the  output.  The  advantages  of  this 
method  will  be  evident  from  the  following  comparison 
of  the  maximum  pump  demand  for  a  set  of  machines  with 
and  without  this  interlocking  gear. 


FILTERING  APPARATUS 


97 


For  instance,  a  set  of  machines  which  are  interlocked 
in  pairs,  and  require  a  pump  9f  inches  diameter,  would 
require  a  pump  12J  inches  diameter  otherwise,  provided 
the  maximum  pump  speed  is  the  same  in  both  cases.  In 
other  words,  the  maximum  pump  demand  is  55  per  cent, 
more.  When  a  more  rapid  acceleration  is  required,  three 
machines  are  interlocked,  in  which  case  a  pump  11 J  inches 
diameter  would  do  the  work  instead  of  a  pump  1 7  inches 
diameter,  which  represents  an  increase  of  130  per  cent. 
It  should  also  be  remembered  that  in  most  cases  the 
steam  cylinder  is  at  least  twice  the  diameter  of  the 
pump,  and  the  smaller  the  pump  the  smaller  the  steam 
cylinder. 

The  following  cases  extracted  from  a  list  given  by  this 
firm  affords  useful  comparisons. 


Diameter  and 
Depth  of  Basket 
(Inches). 

R.P.M. 

Average  B.H.P. 

Capacity 
(Cubic  Feet). 

24  x  14 
48x20 
60x24 

1,500 
750 
600 

2 
5-25 
10 

1-85 
10-7 
16-6 

CHAPTER  IV 
DRYERS  AND  EVAPORATORS. 

ALTHOUGH  the  bulk  of  the  moisture  in  a  material  has  been 
removed  by  means  of  the  filter  press  or  the  centrifugal 
machine,  a  certain  amount  still  adheres,  which  can  only 
be  removed  by  evaporation  in  contact  with  air  heated 
to  as  high  a  temperature  as  is  possible,  consistent  with 
economy  and  the  nature  of  the  material. 

The  three  systems  of  drying  most  commonly  in  use 
are: 

1.  By  direct  heat  from  a  fire. 

2.  By  radiated  heat  from  steam  pipes. 

3.  By  warm  air  circulation. 

Machinery  for  using  direct  heat  from  a  fire  has  only  a 
limited  application,  owing  to  fire  risk  and  the  liability 
of  damage  to  the  material,  although  for  substances  such  as 
sand  the  method  is  very  effective.  Wherever  possible 
waste  heat  should  be  utilized,  so  that  in  the  case  of 
materials  which  are  not  easily  burned  or  scorched  or 
damaged  by  contact  with  gases  the  flue  heater  provides 
an  effective  and  economical  drying  means. 

A  common  form  of  flue  heater  consists  of  a  cast  steel 
or  iron  trough  placed  over  a  flue  or  furnace,  the  material 
being  propelled  from  one  end  of  the  trough  to  the  other 
by  a  worm,  which  is  also  made  to  act  as  a  stirrer  or  turner 
over.  These  troughs  are  of  varying  diameter  and 
lengths  to  suit  the  material  to  be  treated,  and  can  be 
open  or  enclosed  and  connected  with  a  fan  if  necessary. 

The  lack  of  any  very  effective  control  is  one  of  the  great 
disadvantages  of  this  method,  so  that  it  is  not  to  be 

98 


DRYERS  AND  EVAPORATORS 


99 


wondered  at  that  the  ease  of  control  of  steam  has  rendered 
that  substance  the  principal  heating  agent  in  dryers  and 
evaporators,  apart  from  the  fact  that  it  allows  of  the 
utilization  of  much  waste  heat. 

Steam  may  be  used  for  drying  or  evaporating  by  being 
passed  through  pipes  immersed  in  the  material  to  be 
dried,  by  forming  a  steam  jacket  round  the  container, 
by  heating  an  inner  drum  round  which  the  material  passes, 
or  by  a  combination  of  these  methods.  Frequently 
the  drying  process  is  combined  with  mixing  and  milling, 
according  to  the  nature  of  the  material  used. 


FIG.  72. — '"FIRMAN"  DRYER:  LONGITUDINAL  SECTION. 

The  rotary  form  of  dryer  is  undoubtedly  one  which 
finds  the  greatest  application  in  the  chemical  industry. 
In  its  simplest  form  it  consists  of  a  cylinder  or  drum, 
steam-heated,  containing  the  material,  which  can  be 
rapidly  and  uniformly  presented  to  the  steam  heat  by 
rotating  some  part  of  the  apparatus.  Materials  such  as 
slaughter-house  refuse,  blood,  offal,  condemned  meat, 
fish  and  vegetable  matter  can  be  turned  into  valuable 
manure  by  means  of  a  dryer  as  shown  in  Figs.  72  and  73. 

This  is  a  "  Firman  "  type  made  by  Manlove,  Alliott 
and  Co.,  Ltd.,  Nottingham,  which  is  designed  for  taking 
semi-liquid  material  and  delivering  it  mixed  and  dried 


100  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

ready  for  the  market.  It  consists  of  a  horizontal  steam- 
jacketed  cylinder,  the  internal  circumference  of  which  is 
continually  swept  by  moving  scrapers  or  paddles.  The 
material  being  treated  is  kept  in  constant  motion,  being 
lifted  up,  turned  over,  and  allowed  to  fall  again,  pre- 
senting fresh  portions  to  the  heated  surface  and  giving 
the  steam  and  vapour  a  better  opportunity  of  escaping. 
The  temperature  at  which  the  material  is  dried  can 
be  controlled  by  regulating  the  steam  pressure,  and  so  no 
injury  is  caused  by  excessive  temperature,  as  is  frequently 


'////////  /A 
M.A.&C'l?      4 


FIG.  73.— "FIRMAN"  DRYER:  CROSS  SECTION. 

the  case  with  fire-heated  machines.  The  body  of  the 
machine  consists  of  a  double  cylindrical  shell  suitably 
stayed  to  withstand  a  working  pressure  of  40  pounds  per 
square  inch,  the  space  between  the  two  shells  forming 
a  steam  jacket.  A  massive  cast-iron  plate  at  each  end 
of  the  drum  is  fitted  with  a  gland,  bracket,  and  plummer 
block  for  supporting  the  central  shaft  of  mild  steel, 
which  carries  cast-iron  arms  having  knife-edge  steel 
scrapers  at  their  outer  ends.  A  charging  door  is  fixed 
in  the  top  or  one  end  of  the  machine,  an  outlet  door  in  the 


DRYERS  AND  EVAPORATORS 


101 


bottom,  and  a  vapour  outlet  at  the  top.  A  draining  valve 
connected  in  two  places  and  a  steam  inlet  valve,  together 
with  the  usual  pressure  gauges  and  safety  valve,  complete 
the  equipment  of  the  steam  jacket. 

Fig.  74  shows  a  cross-section  of  a  dryer  fitted  with  a 
central  steam  drum  extending  the  greater  part  of  its 
length,  and  Fig.  75  that  of  a  combination  of  the  steam 
jacket  and  internal  drum.  These  machines  are  suitable 
for  granular  substances  such  as  beer  and  distillery  grains, 
earthy  and  other  colours,  coal,  sawdust,  peat,  etc.,  or 
substances  which  have  a  low  moisture  content. 


FIG.    74. —  "HERSEY"   ROTARY 
DRYER:  CROSS  SECTION. 


FIG.  75. — COMBINATION  ROTARY 
DRYER:  CROSS  SECTION. 


In  these  cases  the  plan  of  operation  is  for  a  current  of 
air  heated  by  passing  through  a  steam-heated  air  heater 
to  be  drawn  through  the  cylinder  by  means  of  a  fan. 
The  material  is  fed  by  hand  or  automatically,  and  is 
lifted  by  the  shelves  and  rained  down  through  the  hot 
air,  to  which  it  gives  up  its  moisture.  Owing  to  the 
cylinder  being  set  at  an  angle,  the  material  passes  down 
in  the  opposite  direction  to  the  air  current,  so  that  the 
driest  material  comes  in  contact  with  fresh  hot  air, 
effectively  removing  the  last  traces  of  moisture,  while 
before  the  air  escapes  it  comes  in  contact  with  the  fresh 


102  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 


wet  product,  which  cools  it  to  the  lowest  temperature 
consistent  with  the  proper  carrying  away  of  the  absorbed 
moisture. 

The  temperature  of  the  air  used  in  this  class  of  plant 
is   about    120°   to    200°  F.  —  the   temperature   in  general 


FIG.  76.— G. A.  DRYING  PLANT:  PARALLEL  DRIVE. 


FIG.  77. — G.A.  DRYING  PLANT:  RIGHT  ANGLE  DRIVE. 

A,  rotary  dryer;  B,  air  heater;  (7,  fan;  D,  feed  apparatus; 
J5?,  air  pipes;  F,  path  rings;  (r,  discharge  hood;  //,  driving 
pulleys  and  gear;  J,  air  inlet;  K,  air  outlet;  .L,  rollers; 
M,  dust  separator. 

use  being  about  150°  to  180°F.  measured  close  to  the 
heater.  In  dealing  with  material  of  a  powdery  or  dusty 
nature  the  discharge  from  the  fan  may  be  led  to  a  large 


DRYERS  AND  EVAPORATORS  103 

settling  room,  or  a  cyclone  or  other  separator  may  be 
used. 

The  main  factors  governing  the  size  of  plant  for  a  given 
output  are — (1)  The  quantity  to  be  dealt  with  per  hour; 
(2)  the  initial  and  final  moisture  percentages;  (3)  the 
speed  of  the  air  current  which  can  be  employed  without 
carrying  away  too  much  material  in  the  form  of  dust; 

(4)  the  temperature  which  can  be  safely  employed;  and 

(5)  the  ease  with  which  the  material  gives  up  its  moisture. 
Where  a  very  low  final  moisture  is  desired,  or  the  material 
dries  slowly,  it  is  better  to  have  an  extra  long  dryer. 

Figs.  76  and  77  show  the  general  arrangement  of  drying 
plants  with  parallel  and  right-angle  driving  gear  respec- 
tively. 

Drying  by  warm-air  circulation  forms  the  basis  of  the 
Sturtevant  system.  A  fan  passes  a  volume  of  air  through 
a  self-contained  heater  placed  outside  a  drying  room; 
this  air  is  led  through  a  system  of  pipes  and  distributed 
in  the  drying  room,  a  positive  circulation  of  warm  air 
being  maintained,  and  the  heat  necessary  for  evaporating 
the  moisture  in  the  materials  is  carried  into  every  part 
of  the  room.  The  advantages  claimed  for  this  system 
are— (1)  The  temperature  can  be  varied  without  affect- 
ing the  volume  of  the  air  circulated;  (2)  the  humidity 
of  the  air  supply  can  be  varied  by  recirculating  part  of  the 
moist  air  from  the  drying  room;  (3)  the  volume  of  air 
circulated  can  be  regulated  by  varying  the  speed  of  the 
fan  or  by  dampers. 

This  method  is  particularly  suitable  for  the  drying  of 
wool,  flocks,  rags,  fibre,  and  similar  substances,  where 
it  is  important  that  there  should  be  no  risk  of  fire. 

When  air  is  brought  in  contact  with  a  wet  substance 
some  portion  of  the  moisture  is  absorbed  by  the  air,  which 
has  an  increased  capacity  with  increased  temperature. 
For  any  particular  temperature  there  is  a  limit  to  the 
amount  of  moisture  the  air  will  absorb,  and  when  this 
limit  is  reached  the  air  is  said  to  be  saturated.  Saturated 


104  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

air  is  obviously  useless  as  a  drying  agent,  but  by  raising 
the  temperature  of  the  saturated  air  it  becomes  capable 
of  taking  up  more  moisture  before  it  again  becomes 
saturated.  In  other  words,  the  higher  the  temperature 
of  the  air,  the  better  drying  agent  it  becomes.  The  limit 
of  temperature  usable  depends,  of  course,  upon  the  nature 
of  the  material  to  be  dried. 


FIG.  78. — RECORDING  HYGROMETER. 


FIG.  79. — TYFICALTGUIDE  CHART. 

An  important  part  of  the  Sturtevant  system  is  the 
recording  of  the  humidity  of  the  air  in  the  drying  rooms. 
This  is  performed  by  a  self-recording  hygrometer  which 
has  wet  and  dry  bulbs  (metallic  expanding  coils)  which 
actuate  two  pens  against  a  revolving  drum  carrying  a 
guide  chart,  as  shown  in  Figs.  78  and  79. 

The  following  table  is  then  found  necessary  in  order 
to  calculate  the  humidity  of  the  air  used: 


DRYERS  AND  EVAPORATORS 


105 


DIFFERENCE  BETWEEN  WET  BULB  AND  DRY  BULB  IN 
DEGREES  FAHR. 


10 


12       14      16      18     20 


Dn/Bnlb 
'°F. 

Percentage  of  Moisture  in  Air. 

60 

89  !  78 

68 

58 

49 

40 

31 

22 

14 

6 

70 

90  j  81 

72 

64 

56 

48 

40 

33 

26 

20 

80 

91 

83 

76 

68 

61 

51 

47 

41 

35 

29 

90 

92 

85 

78 

71 

65 

59 

53 

47 

42 

37 

100 

93 

86 

80 

74 

68 

62   57 

52 

47 

42 

110 

94 

87 

81 

76 

70 

65 

60 

55 

50 

46 

120 

94 

88 

82 

77 

72 

67 

62 

58 

54 

49 

130 

04 

89 

84 

78 

74 

69 

65 

60 

56 

52 

140 

95 

89 

84 

80 

75 

71 

66 

62 

58 

55 

150 

95 

90 

85 

80 

76 

72 

68 

64 

60 

56 

160 

95 

90 

86 

81 

77 

73 

69 

66 

62 

58 

170 

96 

91 

87 

82 

78 

74 

70 

67 

63 

60 

The  actual  amount  of  water  in  a  cubic  foot  of  air  can 
then  be  found  from  a  chart,  as  shown  in  Fig.  80. 
For  example : 

The  dry  bulb  thermometer  registers  140°  F. 
The  wet  bulb  thermometer  registers  122°  F. 

Difference 18°  F. 

Percentage  of  moisture  (from  table),  58  per  cent. 
Moisture  per  cubic  foot  (from  chart),  33 J  grains. 

The  process  of  drying  timber  provides  an  example  of 
the  method  of  working  and  flexibility  of  this  system. 
The  seasoning  of  timber  not  only  affects  the  moisture 
content,  but  also  goes  deeply  into  the  quality  of  the  wood 
— its  workability,  its  cell  strength,  etc. — for  in  green 
wood  the  moisture  is  divided  between  the  cells  and  the 
cell  walls.  The  free  water  in  the  cells  or  pores  can  be 
removed  without  affecting  the  physical  structure  of  the 
wood,  but  it  is  otherwise  in  the  case  of  the  water  in  the 
cell  walls.  Successful  drying  of  timber  depends  upon 
the  following  fundamental  conditions:  Gentle  heat  in 
combination  with  sufficient  moisture  to  prevent  case 


106  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 


hardening ;  an  ample  circulation  of  air,  so  that  the  humid 
heat  is  carried  to  every  part  of  the  timber.  The  moisture 
should  be  evaporated  just  as  quickly  as  it  conies  to  the 
surface  of  the  timber,  and  there  should  be  no  great 
temperature  drop  throughout  the  pile  or  in  each  piece 
of  timber.  By  this  system,  when  one  particular  kind  of 
wood  has  been  dried,  the  particular  guide  chart — for  the 
same  thicknesses  of  wood — can  be  used  subsequently. 


Percentage  of  Humidity, 


/SO  l 
140 
130 

720- 


-sol 
8 

£    80\ 
bo 

«  J 

60 
SO 
40 


(00 


10  ^O  30  4O  SO  6O  7(7 

_  _  Grains  of  Moisture  per  Cubic  Foot. 

FIG.   80. — HYGROMETRIC    CHART. 

All  that  need  be  done  is  to  put  the  chart  on  the  drum 
of  the  hygrometer  and  manipulate  the  dampers  so  that 
the  pens  of  the  recorder  will  follow  the  lines  of  the  chart. 
Warm  and  cold  air  dampers  govern  the  top  line  of  the 
diagram,  and  the  moist  air  damper  and  sprayers  control 
the  bottom  line. 

For  large  and  regular  outputs  of  planks,  barrel  staves, 
and  suchlike,  a  progressive  type  of  dryer  is  used.     This 


DRYERS  AND  EVAPORATORS  107 

consists  of  one  or  more  tunnels  of  brick  or  concrete  to 
reduce  heat  losses  by  air  leakage  to  a  minimum,  with 
rails  running  longitudinally,  the  wood  being  piled  on 
trucks  which  move  through  the  tunnel  against  the  air 
current.  The  arrangement  is  such  that  whilst  the  wood 
that  is  nearly  dry  is  in  contact  with  warm  dry  air  from 
the  fan,  the  green  wood  at  the  other  end  meets  moist 
tepid  air  which  has  been  cooled  and  moistened  by  passing 
over  the  wood  of  the  first  waggons.  Whenever  a  load  is 
taken  out  dry,  a  load  of  new  wood  is  put  in  at  the  other 
end,  all  the  waggons  moving  one  stage  forward;  thus, 
progressively,  the  wood  is  dried  in  a  suitable  atmosphere. 

The  air  ducts  are  usually  placed  underground  and  con- 
structed with  brick  sides  and  concrete  base,  the  top  being 
arched  over  with  brick  or  covered  with  stone  or  concrete. 

The  drying  apparatus  consists  of — (1)  A  fan  for  pro- 
ducing circulation  driven  by  a  direct  coupled  steam 
engine,  electric  motor,  or  belt;  (2)  a  heater  for  heating 
the  air  by  live  or  exhaust  steam  or  a  combination  of  both ; 
(3)  a  steam  trap  to  prevent  the  passage  of  steam,  or  an 
automatically  controlled  pump  and  receiver  to  return  the 
water  of  condensation  to  the  boiler ;  (4)  steam  and  water 
sprays  for  supplying  such  additional  moisture  to  the  air 
as  is  necessary. 

For  drying  different  thicknesses  and  sizes  of  timber  and 
also  different  kinds  of  wood,  especially  hard  woods,  three 
main  distributing  ducts  are  provided  in  the  compartment 
dryer  for  the  supply  of  warm  dry  air,  cold  dry  air,  and 
moist  air.  The  supply  to  each  compartment  can  be 
controlled  from  a  central  board  placed  conveniently 
outside,  as  shown  in  Fig.  81,  which  is  a  plan  and  eleva- 
tion of  the  triple  drying  system. 

The  timber,  if  a  hard  wood,  is  first  subjected  to  the 
action  of  moist  cool  air,  and  the  humidity  is  maintained 
while  the  temperature  is  slowly  raised,  thus  gradually 
removing  water  from  the  heart  of  the  timber  without 
drying  the  skin.  The  humidity  is  then  gradually  de- 


108  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

creased  and  the  temperature  raised,  and  when  the  drying 

is  nearly  complete  warm  dry  air  is  admitted  to  finish  off. 

In  the  above  illustrated  system  the  fan  takes  fresh 

air,  part  of  which  is  delivered  through  a  by -pass  valve, 


into  the  cold  air  duct,  the  remainder  passing  through 
a  heater  to  the  hot  air  duct.  A  second  fan  draws  the 
moist  air  from  the  drying  chambers  through  the  return 
duct,  and  delivers  any  desired  percentage  of  it  to  the  moist 
air  supply  duct. 


DRYERS  AND  EVAPORATORS  109 

By  adapting  the  apparatus  to  suit  the  different 
materials  this  system  has  been  successfully  used  to  dry 
asbestos,  casein,  copra,  explosives,  fruit,  glue,  leather, 
phosphates,  rubber,  soap,  sugar,  white  lead,  and  wood 
pulp,  to  mention  but  a  few. 

Vacuum  Dryers. — A  vacuum  dryer  is  a  machine  in 
which  material  is  dried  under  reduced  pressure,  whereby 
a  considerable  reduction  in  time  and  expense  is  effected. 
The  temperature  at  which  a  liquid  changes  rapidly  and 
violently  into  a  vapour,  or,  in  other  words,  boils,  depends 
upon  the  pressure  upon  its  surface.  By  reducing  the 
pressure  in  a  drying  machine  and  maintaining  it  at  any 
desired  level,  the  moisture,  usually  water,  in  the  material 
may  be  briskly  evaporated  at  a  convenient  low  tempera- 
ture, so  that  waste  steam  of  low  temperature  may  be 
usefully  employed.  Not  only  is  this  method  quick  and 
economical,  but  it  possesses  the  further  advantage  that 
it  is  possible  to  dry  rapidly  substances  which  would  be 
decomposed  or  otherwise  injured  if  raised  above  a  certain 
definite  temperature. 

There  are  three  main  types  of  vacuum  dryers  adapted 
for  different  classes  of  materials,  as  follows :  (1)  The  shelf 
type  for  materials  which  do  not  require  stirring;  (2)  the 
rotary  type  for  materials  which  require  stirring;  and 
(3)  the  drum  type  for  material  which  readily  forms  a 
film  on  the  drying  surface. 

Fig.  82  is  an  illustration  of  a  vacuum  shelf  dryer, 
made  by  Francis  Shaw  and  Co.,  Ltd.,  Manchester.  The 
chamber  itself  is  a  heavily  ribbed  cast-iron  box,  in  one 
or  more  sections  as  necessary,  having  the  faces  where 
the  joints  aie  to  be  made,  accurately  machined.  The 
doors  are  also  of  cast  iron,  securely  attached  to  the 
body  by  double  swing  hinges  and  accurately  balanced 
for  easy  manipulation.  To  obtain  an  air -tight  joint 
when  the  door  is  closed,  a  rubber  ring  is  fitted  into  a 
groove  on  the  inside  skirting  and  makes  contact  with 
the  machined  facing  on  the  body.  For  the  purpose 


110  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

of  control,  inspection  windows  are  fitted  so  that  the 
material  can  be  kept  under  observation  during  the 
drying  operation. 


The  heating  chests  or  shelves  are  made  of  rolled  mild 
steel  plates,  flush-riveted  at  the  edges  through  a  wrelted 
ring,  and  stayed  all  over  to  withstand  a  working  pressure 
of  60  pounds  per  square  inch.  Each  shelf  has  its  own 
independent  steam  feed  and  exhaust  connections,  made  of 


J  DRYERS  AND  EVAPORATORS  111 

stout  hydraulic  piping  bent  to  allow  for  expansion  and 
contraction  and  coupled  to  mains  fitted  in  recesses. 
These  shelves  are  arranged  to  give  complete  drainage 
and  allow  of  uniform  heating.  A  cast-iron  vapour  pipe 
leads  from  the  top  of  the  stove  to  the  head  of  the  con- 
denser, which  is  of  the  vertical  multitubular  type,,  con- 
taining copper,  brass,  or  iron  tubes  expanded  into  end 
plates  at  top  and  bottom.  The  condenser  case  is  of  cast 
iron  fitted  with  condensing  water  inlet  at  the  bottom 
and  outlet  at  the  top,  together  with  all  necessary  valve 
fittings.  The  receiver  is  a  cast-iron  vessel  divided  into 
two  compartments  connected  by  a  by -pass  valve,  by 
which  the  liquid  in  the  lower  compartment  can  be  drawn 
off  without  breaking  the  vacuum  throughout.  Inspection 
windows  are  also  fitted  to  this  vessel  so  that  the  drops  of 
water  falling  from  the  condenser  can  be  seen  during  the 
drying  operation. 

The  method  of  working  a  shelf  dryer  first  of  all  is  to 
warm  up  the  shelves  by  admitting  steam  or  hot  water, 
as  the  case  may  be.  The  material  to  be  dried  is  placed  to 
a  depth  of  1  to  1|  inches  on  trays  of  galvanized  or 
enamelled  iron,  wire  netting,  copper,  aluminium,  or 
earthenware,  having  a  depth  not  greater  than  2  inches, 
as  the  shelves  are  about  2J  inches  apart.  The  trays 
are  then  placed  on  the  shelves  and  the  doors  closed  by 
means  of  handwheels.  Provided  that  the  doors  fit 
perfectly,  the  handwheels  can  be  swung  clear  as  soon  as 
the  gauge  registers  10  inches,  when  the  excess  external 
pressure  is  sufficient  to  hold  the  doors  in  place.  The 
vacuum  pump  is  now  started,  and  in  a  short  time  drops 
of  water  can  be  seen  through  the  inspection  window 
falling  into  the  bottom  chamber  of  the  receiver.  Cold 
water  is  then  admitted  to  the  condenser,  and  a  sufficient 
flow  maintained  to  keep  the  bottom  of  the  condenser 
cool  to  the  touch.  To  obtain  a  constant  drying  tempera- 
ture inside  the  stove  the  steam  or  hot  water  inlet  must  be 
adjusted  as  required.  The  end  point  of  the  drying 


112  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

operation  is  indicated  by  the  fact  that  no  more  drops  of 
water  are  observed  falling  into  the  receiver,  or  by  a 
decided  rise  of  temperature  registered  by  a  thermometer 
in  the  body  of  the  stove.  The  operation  is  then  stopped 
by  closing  the  vacuum  valve  and  shutting  down  the 
pump.  To  avoid  loss  of  material  the  air  must  be  ad- 
mitted gradually  through  a  vacuum  break  valve  in  the 
door,  until  zero  is  recorded  on  the  vacuum  gauge,  when 
the  material  can  be  taken  out  and  the  stove  lecharged 
with  a  fresh  set  of  shelves  already  prepared. 

These  stoves  are  made  in  all  sizes  from  10  square  feet 
up  to  3,000  square  feet  of  heating  surface,  and  may  be 
combined  in  the  form  of  a  battery  if  required. 

This  type  of  machine  is  used  for  drying  aniline  dyes, 
pigment  colours,  explosives,  fine  chemicals,  malt  extract, 
carbon  brushes,  white  lead,  beta-naphthol,  salicylic  acid, 
drugs,  mica  sheets,  foodstuffs,  etc. 

For  substances  which  have  a  tendency  to  form  a  film 
on  the  surface  of  the  dryer,  and  for  such  substances  as 
sulphate  of  zinc,  nitrate  of  ammonia,  dyewood  and 
tannin  extracts,  glue  solutions,  albuminous  substances, 
milk,  yeast,  pastes,  eggs,  vegetable  and  meat  extracts,  etc., 
the  drum  dryer  is  the  more  suitable  machine. 

Fig.  83  illustrates  a  vacuum  drum  dryer  as  made  by 
J.  P.  Devine  and  Co.,  Buffalo,  working  under  what  is 
known  as  the  Passburg  system.  Briefly,  the  apparatus 
consists  of  a  cast-iron  outer  casing,  in  some  cases  tinned 
inside  or  lined  with  copper  or  other  suitable  material, 
inside  which  revolves  a  hollow  drum  or  drums  made 
of  cast  iron,  gun-metal,  or  bronze.  This  drum  is  care- 
fully balanced,  heated  internally  by  hot  water  or  steam, 
and  the  outside  is  machined  and  polished.  If  hot  water 
is  used  as  the  heating  medium,  drying  can  be  conducted 
at  as  low  a  temperature  as  63°  F.,  and  in  the  case  of 
steam  T2  pounds  of  steam — including  steam  used  for 
motive  power  if  the  exhaust  is  used  for  heating  the 
chamber — will  evaporate  about  1  pound  of  water.  The 


DRYERS  AND  EVAPORATORS 


113 


inlet  supply  is  regulated  so  that  the  material  inside  the 
casing  remains  at  a  constant  level,  and  shield  rings 
prevent  the  material  from  coming  in  contact  with  the 
end  of  the  drum. 

A  rapid  and  uniform  drying  is  effected,  because  the 
wet  material  is  spread  upon  the  steam-heated  polished 


FIG.  83. — VACUUM  DRUM  DRYER. 


drum  in  a  thin  film  of  yi-^  inch  or  less.  The  conduction 
of  heat  through  the  metal  drum  to  the  material  on  its 
surface  is  very  rapid,  and  the  water  is  changed  under 
vacuum  into  vapour  of  about  104°  F.  to  122°  F.  Materials 
containing  as  much  as  88  per  cent,  of  water  are  dried  in 
eight  seconds  without  overheating,  and  the  water  is 
evaporated  from  the  material  at  a  temperature  of  from 

8 


114  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

117°  F.  to  96°  F.,  according  to  the  vacuum  in  the  apparatus 
of  26f  inches  to  28  J  inches. 

It  is  well  known  that  the  greater  the  difference  in 
temperature  between  two  materials  placed  in  contact, 
the  more  rapid  is  the  flow  of  heat  from  the  hotter  sub- 
stance to  the  cooler,  so  that  if  the  water  in  the  material 
is  kept  at  a  low  boiling  point  by  maintaining  a  high 
vacuum,  the  heat  from  the  steam  is  transmitted  more 
rapidly  than  if  the  boiling  point  be  several  degrees 
higher.  Even  though  the  drum  be  heated  by  steam  of 
230°  F.  or  over,  the  material  being  dried  cannot  get 
higher  than  the  temperature  at  which  the  water  boils 


FIG.   84. — VACUUM  "  JOHNSTONE  "  DRYER:  SECTION. 

under  vacuum,  because  the  heat  is  used  to  convert  the 
water  into  steam,  and  thereby  rapidly  evaporates  it  out 
of  the  material. 

The  rotary  vacuum  dryer  follows  the  lines  of  the  non- 
vacuum  type  previously  described,  but  with  the  addition 
of  an  evacuating  plant.  Here,  again,  the  machine  usually 
combines  the  work  of  a  ball  mill  or  mixer,  or  both,  with 
that  of  drying. 

Fig.  84  shows  a  section  of  the  "  Johnstone  "  dryer 
made  by  Manlove,  Alliott  and  Co.,  Nottingham.  It 
consists  of  an  enclosed  vacuum-tight  vessel  with  a  dome- 
shaped  cover  which  carries  a  scraper,  agitator,  and 


DRYERS  AND  EVAPORATORS  115 

driving  gear.  In  the  cover  is  placed  a  large  circular 
charging  door,  which  is  provided  with  shackles  for 
tightening  on  to  a  joint  ring  of  asbestos  or  rubber.  The 
body  of  the  machine  has  steam-jacketed  parallel  sides 
and  flat  bottom  capable  of  withstanding  40  to  60  pounds 
per  square  inch.  In  the  bottom  of  the  machine  is  a 
rectangular  hinged  and  balanced  door,  opening  down- 
wards, for  discharging  the  dried  material  as  required. 
A  thorough  and  speedy  drying  is  ensured,  as  the  material 
is  continually  broken  up  and  turned  over  by  revolving 
scrapers  and  rakes,  thus  preventing  an  impervious  crust 
forming  and  hindering  evaporation. 

Fig.  85  shows  a  combined  vacuum  dryer,  mixer  and 
ball  mill,  mace  by  Francis  Shaw  and  Co.,  for  treating 
delicate  chemicals,  organic  acids,  and  all  substances 
where  metallic  contamination  is  to  be  avoided.  It 
consists  of  a  fixed  steel  casing  designed  for  heating  by 
steam  or  gas,  inside  which  is  fitted  a  one-piece  stoneware 
vessel,  supported  in  a  steel  cage  having  a  hollow  trunnion 
at  one  end  connected  to  the  vacuum  pump. 

One  of  the  disadvantages  of  many  drying  machines  is 
the  loss  of  time  in  charging  and  discharging,  and  several 
makers  have  evolved  a  more  or  less  efficient  continuous 
apparatus. 

Fig.  86  shows  a  continuous  "  cone  "  vacuum  drying 
plant  made  by  this  same  firm.  The  body  of  the  machine 
consists  of  a  steel  cylinder,  jacketed  all  round  for  steam 
heating,  and  having  a  hopper  fitted  at  the  top  of  one  end. 
At  the  base  of  the  hopper  is  a  vacuum-tight  rotary  device 
for  receiving  the  wet  material  and  delivering  it  to  the 
conveyor  worm  inside  the  dryer.  A  similar  hopper  is 
provided  on  the  underside  of  the  machine,  connected 
through  a  wheel  valve  to  a  receiver  provided  with  in- 
spection windows  and  manhole  door.  The  cone  is  made  of 
light  sheet  steel  mounted  on  a  hollow  shaft  extending 
through  stuffing  box  bearings  'in  the  ends  of  the  outer 
steel  body  to  the  driving  gears  and  steam  supply  at  one 


116  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 


118  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

end,  and  to  the  steam  exhaust  main  at  the  other.  Steel 
chutes  are  fitted  to  the  ends  of  the  cone  inside  the  body 
for  supplying  the  cone  with  the  material  to  be  dried, 
and  for  guiding  the  material  to  the  receiver.  Both  the 
cone  and  the  automatic  feeding  device  are  geared  to  the 
same  shaft,  to  ensure  a  uniform  feed. 

In  working  this  machine  steam  is  admitted,  and  then 
as  high  a  vacuum  as  possible  is  obtained  throughout  the 
apparatus  with  receiver  valve  wide  open.  The  material  is 
fed  into  the  hopper,  from  which  the  worm  conveyor 
inside  obtains  a  uniform  feed;  drying  commences  at  once, 
and  continues  as  the  material  travels  along  the  worm, 
falls  down  the  chute  to  the  small  end  of  the  cone  and 
along  to  the  wider  end,  where  a  chute  delivers  it  to  the 
discharge  hopper  in  a  dry  condition.  When  the  receiver 
is  nearly  full  it  can  be  discharged  by  cutting  it  off  by 
means  of  the  wheel  valve  and  admitting  air  until  the 
vacuum  is  gone. 

One  great  advantage  of  vacuum  dryers  is  that  where 
valuable  solvents  have  been  used  they  can  be  completely 
recovered  in  the  condenser.  This  part  of  the  subject  will 
be  more  fully  dealt  with  at  a  later  stage. 

Evaporators  are  machines  used  for  recovering  solids 
which  are  dissolved  in  liquids  by  turning  the  latter  into 
vapour.  The  methods  employed  may  be  divided  into 
four  classes,  as  follows:  (1)  Spontaneous  evaporation; 
(2)  direct  heating;  (3)  steam  heating;  and  (4)  reduced 
pressure. 

Spontaneous  evaporation  can  be  conducted  successfully 
in  countries  which  have  a  definite  period  of  hot  dry 
weather.  Natural  brines  are  frequently  evaporated 
by  pumping  them  into  ponds  having  a  depth  of  about 
2  feet  and  a  surface  of  several  acres,  at  a  rate  equal  to 
the  rate  of  evaporation.  In  large  installations  as  much 
as  5,000  gallons  per  minute  of  fresh  brine  is  required  to 
make  up  the  evaporation  losses,  and  the  concentrate 
is  led  into  a  separate  pond  and  harvested. 


DRYERS  AND  EVAPORATORS  119 

In  the  direct-heat  method,  flames  or  hot  waste  gases 
may  be  employed  either  to  warm  a  vessel  containing  the 
liquid,  from  underneath,  or  by  being  made  to  pass  over 
the  surface  of  the  liquid.  Where  the  presence  of  a  certain 
amount  of  impurity  does  not  matter,  the  latter  method 
can  be  adopted  in  preference  to  the  former  method, 
which  is  not  so  economical  of  the  available  heat.  Although 
the  open  kettle  is  practically  obsolete  to-day,  it  is  in- 
teresting to  note  the  evolution  of  the  process  and  the 
causes  which  led  to  its  abandonment.  From  the  simple 
domestic  copper  heated  by  an  open  fire  there  evolved 
the  "  block  "  or  arrangement  of  as  many  as  100  kettles 
of  about  150  gallons  capacity,  arranged  in  one  or  more 
rows  in  a  flue  or  arches  terminating  in  a  chimney.  To 
prevent  overheating  of  the  kettles  nearest  the  fire,  arches 
were  built  underneath  them  as  a  protection,  thereby 
causing  a  certain  amount  of  heat  to  be  wasted.  Beyond 
the  grate  the  arches  were  built  with  air  spaces  between 
them,  which  increased  in  size  as  the  distance  increased,  and 
the  flues  decreased  in  depth  to  about  6  inches  under  the 
kettles  next  the  chimney.  Forced  draught  then  became 
necessary.  Various  difficulties  arose  which,  combined 
with  the  fact  that  it  was  found  that  for  the  fuel  used 
only  about  two -thirds  of  the  amount  of  water  was 
evaporated  as  would  be  effected  by  a  proper  boiler,  led 
to  the  method  being  discarded. 

Evaporation  by  means  of  direct  heat  is,  however,  still 
employed,  but  the  kettles  are  replaced  by  open  pans 
arranged  as  shown  in  Fig.  87. 

The  pans  are  of  riveted  wrought-iron  plates  J  inch 
thick,  having  flaring  sides  and  divided  into  two  or  more 
compartments,  known  as  the  front  and  back  pans.  The 
pans  are  about  100  feet  long,  25  feet  wide,  and  1  foot  deep, 
and  the  method  of  working  is  to  run  the  liquid  into  the 
back  pan,  where,  after  being  heated  by  the  hot  gases 
from  the  fire,  it  is  siphoned  into  the  front  pan  and 
harvested,  the  solid  being  removed  to  the  sides  and  allowed 


120  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 


E 

II 


I 

\- 

I 


to  drain.     Heating  may  be  effected  by  oil,  coal,  or  gas, 
according  to  circumstances. 

Evaporation  by  means  of  steam  heating  is  very  widely 


DRYERS  AND  EVAPORATORS  121 

used,  owing  to  the  ease  of  control  and  the  absence  of  any 
risk  of  damage  to  the  product  by  overheating.  In  its 
simplest  form  a  steam-heated  evaporator  consists  of  a 
vessel  having  steam  pipes  immersed  in  the  liquid  to  be 
evaporated. 

In  the  salt  industry  brine  is  evaporated  in  a  steam- 
heated  vessel  known  as  a  grainer — a  long,  narrow, 
shallow  vat  built  of  wood  or  metal  supported  on  a  frame- 
work, or  of  cement  or  concrete  supported  on  a  foundation 
of  sand.  Wooden  grainers  made  from  white  pine  caulked 
with  oakum  have  been  found  to  keep  quite  tight  under 
the  great  differences  of  temperature  encountered. 

The  reinforced  concrete  type  is  monolithic,  having  no 
expansion  joints,  and  is  usually  provided  with  mechanical 
raking  devices.  The  walls  are  5  to  7  inches  thick,  the 
bottom  4  to  6  inches  thick  with  J  inch  steel-bar  rein- 
forcement, the  whole  resting  on  a  sand  bed  which  gives 
uniform  support  and  reduces  heat  losses.  An  average 
size  grainer  is  about  150  feet  long,  12  feet  wide,  and 
2  feet  deep,  having  four  to  eight  steam  pipes,  3  to  5  inches 
in  diameter,  suspended  about  12  inches  above  the 
bottom. 

The  principle  on  which  the  grainer  works  is  as  follows : 
If  a  solution  of  several  salts  is  concentrated  by  evapora- 
tion at  a  given  temperature,  the  salts  will  be  deposited 
as  they  reach  their  saturation  point.  This  will  depend 
upon  their  initial  concentration  and  solubility  and  the 
effects  of  the  presence  of  other  solutes.  If,  when  the  first 
salt  is  deposited  and  before  the  second  salt  begins  to  form, 
more  of  the  original  solution  is  added,  the  concentration 
of  the  first  salt  is  decreased  less  than  that  of  the  others. 
Thus  a  thick  deposit  of  the  first  salt  can  be  formed  by 
the  continuous  addition  and  evaporation  of  the  original 
solution,  until  the  concentration  of  the  other  salts  reaches 
saturation  point  and  they  also  begin  to  form.  This 
method  of  separation  should  be  carefully  distinguished 
from  the  method  known  as  fiactional  crystallization. 


122  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

Steam-Jacketed  Pans. — For  general  use  in  the  chemical 
industry,  steam-jacketed  pans,  such  as  shown  in  Fig.  88 


and  made  by  J.  P.  Devine  and  Co  ;  are  built  in  every 
size  and  shape,  designed  especially  for  the  service  under 
which  they  are  to  operate.  They  are  usually  made  of 


DRYERS  AND  EVAPORATORS 


123 


sheet  steel,  but  have  been  built  of  copper  and  cast  iron, 
rectangular  or  cylindrical,  welded  or  riveted.  Proper 
openings  are  provided  for  steam  inlets  and  condensed 
water  outlets.  They  are  usually  built  shallow,  to  allow 
for  the  greatest  possible  heating  surface  and  to  ensure 


FIG.  89. — TILTING  KETTLE. 

maximum  evaporation  and  facilitate  the  removal  of 
finished  material.  Where  high -pressure  steam  is  used, 
the  jacket  must  be  properly  stay  -bolted '. 

Steam- Jacketed  Kettles. — A  very  convenient  type  of 
apparatus,  of  which  an  example  made  by  the  above 
firm  is  shown  in  Fig.  89,  is  known  as  the  "  tilting  kettle." 
These  large  kettles  are  usually  arranged  on  a  rigid  struc- 


124  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

tural  steel  support  of  the  necessary  height  to  allow  for 
their  emptying  into  a  truck  or  similar  device.  They  may 
be  equipped  with  a  cover  and  a  stirring  gear  of  the  horse- 
shoe, grate,  or  propeller  type,  driven  through  bevel 
gears  and  fixed  and  loose  pulleys,  which  are  rigidly 


FIG.  90. — ASPINALL  STEAM  EVAPORATING  PAN. 

fixed  to  a  heavy  bridge  on  the  top  flange  of  the  kettle. 
The  tilting  device  is  formed  of  a  worm  gear  and  worm, 
the  latter  operated  by  a  handwheel.  The  kettle  proper 
is  supported  by  hollow  trunnions,  which  also  provide 
the  steam  inlet  and  condensed  water  outlet. 


DRYERS  AND  EVAPORATORS  125 

The  common  form  of  kettle  is  made  of  copper  or  cast 
iron,  with  the  jacket  covering  about  half  the  kettle  and 
with  provision  made  for  the  admission  of  thermometers 
and  for  draininfir.  In  special  cases  kettles  are  made  with 
enamelled  linings,  or  of  special  alloys  for  resisting  corrosive 
liquors  or  preventing  contamination  of  the  materials 
by  the  metal  of  the  kettle. 

The  method  of  working  is  to  open  the  valve  to  the 
drain  pipe  so  that  the  first  condensations  can  escape 
and  bumping  be  prevented.  The  exhaust  valve  is  then 
opened,  and  the  steam  gradually  turned  on  at  the  inlet 
valve  until  a  good  jet  of  dry  steam  issues  from  the  drip, 
which  is  then  closed  and  the  steam  regulated  to  give  the 
desired  temperature  for  evaporation. 

This  type  of  evaporator  finds  very  great  use  in  the 
dye,  paint,  textile,  and  canning  and  preserving  indus- 
tries. 

Fig.  90  shows  a  steam  evaporating  pan  used  in  the 
sugar  industry,  made  by  Blair,  Campbell  and  McLean, 
Ltd.,  Glasgow.  The  shell  and  conical  top  is  of  wrought 
iron,  and  the  bottom  of  cast  iron  fixed  to  the  top  by  an 
angle  iron  ring  and  bolts .  The  heating  drum  is  of  wrought 
iron  or  brass,  with  solid  drawn  brass  tubes  expanded 
into  the  same  and  beaded  over,  and  with  a  large  cir- 
culating tube  in  the  centre.  The  drum  is  designed  for 
a  working  pressure  of  60  pounds  per  square  inch,  and  is 
fitted  with  an  eye -bolt  for  lifting  and  cleaning. 

Fig.  91  shows  a  Wetzel  evaporating  pan  made  by  the 
same  firm,  which  is  used  for  concentrating  syrup.  The 
heating  surface  is  obtained  by  a  seamless  copper  helical 
coil,  the  ends  of  which  are  attached  to  the  cast-iron 
trunnion  pipe  which  admits  and  discharges  the  steam,  and 
is  fitted  with  spur  gearing  driven  by  a  pulley. 

The  Vacuum  Pan. — The  vacuum  pan  may  be  regarded 
as  a  modification  of  the  vacuum  dryer  which  has  been 
considered  previously.  At  the  present  time  it  is  almost 
universal  practice  to  evaporate  under  vacuum  those 


126  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

substances  which  are  liable  to  damage  either  by  a  high 
temperature  or  by  the  presence  of  air.  Although  the 
temperature  at  which  a  liquid  boils  depends  upon  the 


pressure  to  which  it  is  subjected,  in  practice  there  are 
limits  to  the  range  of  temperature  and  pressure  available. 
As  mere  evaporation  in  a  vacuum  does  not  necessarily 
mean  economy,  the  utilization  of  exhaust  steam  fixes  the 


DRYERS  AND  EVAPORATORS  127 

upper  limit  of  temperature  at  about  225°  F. ;  the  lower 
limit,  at  about  125°  F.,  is  determined  by  the  cost  of 
maintaining  the  required  vacuum.  Obviously,  with  a 
given  amount  of  heat  available,  better  results  are  to  be 
obtained  with  a  vacuum  than  with  normal  pressure, 
and  the  greater  the  vacuum,  the  greater  the  amount  of 
liquid  evaporated.  Against  this  increase  in  evaporated 
material  must  be  reckoned  the  additional  cost  of  the 
special  plant  and  the  cost  of  maintaining  the  vacuum, 
both  of  which  must  be  taken  into  account  when  comparing 
vacuum  evaporation  with  the  open  pan  process. 

A  vacuum-pan  installation  consists  of  three  parts: 
(1)  The  vacuum  pan;  (2)  the  condenser,  and  (3)  the 
receiver  and  pump.  The  vacuum  pans  are  usually 
vertical  cylinders  having  conical  ends,  the  whole  being 
constructed  of  iron,  steel,  or  copper,  and  provided  with 
inlet  and  discharge  holes,  thermometers,  vacuum  gauge, 
test  cocks,  liquor  gauge,  etc.  These  pans  are  seldom 
less  than  9  feet  in  diameter,  and  reach  as  much  as  30  feet 
in  diameter,  but  from  10  to  20  feet  is  the  most  common 
size.  The  smaller  sizes  are  heated  by  means  of  a 
steam  jacket  and  the  larger  sizes  by  means  of  internal 
steam  coils  or  pipes.  At  the  top  of  the  pan  is  a  dome  or 
large  pipe  connected  with  a  "  catch  all,"  which  serves 
to  trap  all  liquid  carried  along  mechanically  with  the 
steam  and  return  it  to  the  pan,  while  the  steam  passes 
to  the  condenser.  The  condenser  may  be  a  coil  of  piping 
surrounded  with  cold  water  or  some  special  form  of 
surface  or  jet  condenser. 

Fig.  92  shows  a  copper  vacuum  pan  made  by  Blair, 
Campbell  and  McLean,  Ltd.,  Glasgow,  for  concentrating 
sugar  solutions,  a  branch  of  industry  in  which  vacuum 
pans  were  used  as  far  back  as  1813. 

This  pan  is  10  feet  in  diameter,  and  has  a  heating 
surface  arranged  in  seamless  copper  coils,  each  coil 
having  a  steam  inlet  valve  and  pipe,  pressure  gauge,  drain 
pipe,  and  steam  trap. 


128       INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 


FIG.  92.— COPPER  VACUUM  PAN. 


DRYERS  AND  EVAPORATORS 


129 


FIG.  93. — CAST  IRON  CALANDRIA  VACUUM  PAN. 

Fig.  93  shows  a  12 -foot  cast-iron  calandria  vacuum  pan 
made   by  the  same  firm,  in  which  the  heating  surface 

9 


130      INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

consists  of  straight  tubes  of  copper  or  brass  expanded 
into  gun -metal  or  steel  tube  plates  having  a  large  cir- 
culating tube  in  the  centre  to  assist  the  circulation. 
The  steam  belt  is  placed  in  the  cylindrical  part  of  the 
pan  or  effect,  as  it  is  called,  and  contains  several  hundred 
vertical  copper  tubes  about  5  feet  long  and  2  inches  in 
diameter. 


FIG.  94.  —  G.A.  VACUUM  PAN:  JET  CONDENSER. 

Fig.  94  is  a  diagram  showing  the  arrangement  of  a 
vacuum  pan  having  a  jet  condenser  and  wet  vacuum 
pump,  and  Fig.  95  is  a  similar  diagram  showing  a  vacuum 
pan  having  a  condenser  with  a  barometric  leg  and 
receiver,  together  with  a  dry  vacuum  pump. 

There  are  many  makes  of  vacuum  pans  ;  but  in  general 
the  method  of  operation  is  for  either  live  or  exhaust 
steam  to  enter  the  coils  or  steam  belt,  usually,  but  not 
always,  at  low  pressure.  Any  water  which  condenses 
here  is  drained  away  to  the  boilers  or  used  for  boiling 
out  or  thrown  away. 

As  the  liquor  in  the  pan  boils,  the  vapour  passes  to  a 


DRYERS  AND  EVAPORATORS 


131 


/S'///'''/W''"rs^^^^ 


FIG.  95. — G.A.  VACUUM  PAN:  TORRICELLIAN  CONDENSER. 

condenser,   which    by  condensing   the   vapour   helps    to 
maintain  the  vacuum.     Theoretically,  the  vacuum  pro- 


132  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 


duced  by  the  pump  at  the  commencement  of  operations 
should  be  maintained  by  the  action  of  the  condenser, 
but  in  practice  it  is  found  necessary  to  work  the  pump 


FIG.  90. 


-IN.TECTION  CONDENSER  : 
SECTION. 


FIG.  97. — SURFACE  CON- 
DENSER: SECTION. 


throughout  the  process  to  an  extent  depending  upon  the 
efficiency  of  the  particular  condenser  used.  As  a  general 
rule  the  water  from  the  condenser  is  allowed  to  go  to 
waste,  and  as  its  temperature  is  low — about  80°  to  90°  F. 


DRYERS  AND  EVAPORATORS  133 

— not  much  heat  is  wasted,  but  in  some  cases  this  water 
may  also  be  utilized. 

In  order  to  secure  the  highest  efficiency,  the  vacuum 
must  be  as  high  as  possible,  and  for  this  reason  both  the 
pump  and  the  condenser  must  be  as  efficient  as  possible. 
It  is  essential  that  the  condenser  should  have  a  sufficient 
cooling  capacity  to  deal  with  the  volume  of  vapour  to 
be  condensed.  There  are  two  types  of  condensers  in 
common  use — the  jet  type  and  the  surface  type,  as  shown 
diagrammatically  in  Figs.  96  and  97  respectively. 

With  the  surface  condenser  the  evaporated  liquid  is 
completely  recovered  and  a  pump  of  the  dry  type  can  be 
used,  but  with  the  jet  condenser  the  vapour  is  mixed 
with  the  condensing  water  (equal  to  about  forty  times 
the  weight  of  vapour  condensed)  and  a  larger  pump  of 
the  wet  type  is  required,  but  the  operation  is  not  so 
costly. 

In  the  case  of  the  surface  condenser  the  receiver  is 
usually  directly  connected,  and  arrangements  are 
provided  for  discharge  from  time  to  time  without  in- 
terrupting the  main  process.  Jet  condensers  are  often 
connected  with  a  barometric  leg  35  feet  high  in  which 
the  condensing  water  stands  and  overflows  into  a  well 
without  breaking  the  vacuum. 

Multiple-Effect  Vacuum  Pans.— As  far  back  as  1830 
the  suggestion  was  made  of  connecting  vacuum  pans 
in  series  and  regulating  the  pressure  in  each  pan  so  that 
the  work  done  by  the  steam  could  be  greatly  increased, 
but  it  took  many  years  before  the  method  was  in  general 
use. 

In  the  multiple  effect  system  each  vacuum  pan  acts 
not  only  as  an  evaporator,  but  also  as  a  boiler,  producing 
heated  vapour  for  boiling  in  the  next  pan  and  acting  as  a 
condenser  for  the  preceding  pan.  Suppose,  for  example, 
steam  at  about  212°  F.  is  admitted  to  the  first  pan  of  a 
series,  and  the  vacuum  maintained  in  that  pan  is  15  inches. 
The  vapour  from  the  first  pan  will  have  a  temperature  of 


134  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

175°  F.,  and  passing  into  the  second  pan,  which  has  a 
vacuum  of  about  24  inches,  produces  more  vapour  at 
140°  F.,  which  in  turn  passes  to  the  third  pan.  having  a 
vacuum  of  27  inches,  and  so  on  until  the  highest  economical 
vacuum  attainable  limits  the  process. 

The  varied  applications  of  the  vacuum -pan  process  have 
produced  a  corresponding  variety  of  makes,  which  differ 
considerably  in  detail  and  operation,  but  which  would 
require  more  space  than  is  available  in  this  book  for  even 
the  briefest  examination. 

Nearly  a  hundred  years  ago  an  eminent  authority 
drew  attention  to  the  following  points  as  constituting 
the  essentials  of  a  good  evaporator:  (1)  The  liquor  to  be 
evaporated  as  quickly  as  possible,  so  as  to  avoid  any 
alteration;  (2)  the  movement  of  the  liquor  to  be  acceler- 
ated by  giving  it  great  speed  and  spreading  it  out  in  the 
form  of  a  thin  film. 

These  are  the  principles  involved  in  the  design  of  the 
Kestner  patent  film  evaporator,  and  hence  show  a  great 
departure  from  those  embodied  in  the  older  types  of 
vacuum  pan. 

It  is  a  truly  continuous  apparatus,  the  weak  liquor 
being  fed  by  gravity  or  by  means  of  a  pump  at  a  constant 
rate  into  the  bottom  box  of  the  evaporator,  and  the  con- 
centrated liquor  at  the  predetermined  density  issuing 
continuously  from  the  separator.  The  heating  surface 
and  the  passage  of  the  liquor  through  the  tubes  are  so 
disposed  that  the  liquor  to  be  concentrated  passes  over  the 
heating  surface  at  high  speed  in  the  form  of  a  thin  film, 
whilst  the  steam  space  surrounding  the  tubes  is  so 
arranged  that  the  outer  surface  of  the  tubes  is  swept 
at  high  speed  by  the  hot  steam,  so  that  not  only  is  the 
heat  transfer  improved,  but  the  condensed  steam  is 
rapidly  brushed  off  the  heating  surface,  thus  preventing 
any  loss  of  efficiency  from  the  tubes  becoming  water- 
logged. In  addition,  the  arrangement  is  such  that 
accumulation  of  air  and  non -condensable  gases  in  the 


DRYERS  AND  EVAPORATORS  135 

steam  space  is  entirely  prevented,  and  so  the  whole  of 
the  heating  surface  is  able  to  exert  the  maximum 
efficiency.  The  advantage  of  the  high  velocity  of  the 
liquor  and  its  short-time  contact  with  the  heating  surface 
is  threefold:  The  physical  properties  of  delicate  liquors 
remain  absolutely  undamaged,  owing  to  the  fact  that 
they  are  only  in  momentary  contact  with  the  heating 
surface.  Secondly,  the  rate  of  heat  transfer  is  enormously 
increased,  owing  to  the  fact  that  the  presence  of  large 
masses  of  water  in  feeble  circulation  is  entirely  eliminated. 
Thirdly,  the  formation  of  scale  on  the  internal  surfaces 
of  the  tubes  is  greatly  reduced  and  in  some  cases  pre- 
vented, giving  a  great  range  of  application  to  the 
apparatus. 

The  design  of  the  evaporator  has  a  further  advantage 
in  that  the  ground  space  occupied  is  exceedingly  small 
compared  with  that  of  many  other  pans,  and  that  it  lends 
itself  to  the  subsequent  addition  of  effects,  so  as  to 
convert  a  single  effect  into  a  multiple,  with  the  corres- 
ponding steam  economy. 

Fig.  98  shows  a  sectional  view  of  a  Kestner  single-effect 
climbing  film  evaporator.  It  consists  of  two  parts— 
namely,  the  calandria  and  the  separator,  the  former 
being  composed  of  a  shell  or  casing  containing  the 
evaporating  tubes,  which  are  about  23  feet  long  and 
fixed  into  the  upper  and  lower  tube  plates. 

The  liquor  is  fed  into  the  apparatus  at  the  lower  inlet  T, 
and  passes  from  the  feed  box  into  the  tubes.  The  steam 
or  exhaust  vapour,  whichever  medium  may  be  employed 
to  heat  the  liquor,  enters  the  calandria  of  the  evaporator 
at  A.  The  liquor  begins  to  boil  in  the  tubes  because  they 
are  surrounded  by  steam,  and  as  ebullition  takes  place 
a  column  of  vapour  rises  up  the  centre  of  the  tube.  This 
vapour  travels  at  a  high  velocity,  and  at  the  same  time 
draws  up  a  film  of  liquor,  which  forms  on  the  inner  surface 
of  the  tube  continuously  without  dry  patches,  so  pre- 
venting any  danger  of  burning  any  substances  sensitive 


136      INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 


M 


FIG.  98. — KESTNER  CLIMBING 
FILM  SINGLE-EFFECT  EVAP- 
ORATOR. 


FIG.  99.  —  KESTNER  FALLING 
FILM  SINGLE-EFFECT  EVAPOR- 
ATOR. 


to  heat.     Above  the  calandria  is  the  separator  S,  which 
consists  of  a  cylindrical  vessel  containing  a  centrifugal 


DRYERS  AND  EVAPORATORS  137 

baffle  placed  immediately  above  the  tubes,  and  so  con- 
structed that  the  liquor  and  vapour  rising  up  the  tubes 
in  the  calandria  strike  against  the  curved  vanes  of  the 
baffle  with  such  velocity  that,  due  to  centrifugal  motion, 
there  is  complete  separation  of  liquor  and  vapour.  The 
concentrated  liquor  passes  down  the  outlet  L,  and  the 
vapour,  passing  after  through  the  save-all,  leaves  the 
separator  at  B.  The  long  shell  of  the  Kestner  gives  two 
important  advantages  over  the  calandria  of  the  ordinary 
type  of  vacuum  pan:  first,  the  distilled  water  can  be 
removed  easily  by  running  it  off  at  the  opening  E  ;  and 
secondly,  all  air  and  non -condensable  vapours  in  the 
heating  system  are  removed  at  G ;  thus  all  the  tube 
surface  remains  operative. 

For  such  liquors  as  glue,  gelatine,  and  the  like,  the 
final  concentration  is  made  in  a  falling  film  evaporator, 
of  which  a  sectional  view  is  shown  in  Fig.  99.  The 
apparatus  consists  of — (1)  Tubes  18  to  23  feet  long 
secured  in  the  upper  and  lower  tube  plates,  divided  into 
two  groups  G  and  D,  forming  the  climbing  film  and 
falling  film  tubes  respectively.  (2)  The  separator,  placed 
below  the  lower  tube  plate,  contains  the  feed  box,  and 
is  fitted  with  a  centrifugal  baffle  and  the  necessary  openings 
for  the  concentrated  liquor  outlet  and  for  the  discharge 
of  the  vapour.  The  liquor  to  be  concentrated  is  delivered 
into  the  feed  box  B,  from  which  it  passes  into  the  tubes  G , 
where  the  climbing  film  action  takes  place.  The  liquor 
and  the  vapour  arrive  in  the  upper  box  above  the  tube 
plate,  where  they  are  distributed  to  the  tubes  Z>,  the 
liquor  running  down  as  a  thin  film,  and  the  high-speed 
vapour  forming  a  core  in  the  centre  of  the  tube.  Both 
liquor  and  vapour  pass  into  the  separator  8,  where  by 
means  of  centrifugal  action  complete  separation  takes 
place,  so  that  the  vapour  passes  at  C  and  the  liquor  atP 

By  means  of  this  apparatus  substances  such  as 
liquorice,  gelatines,  glue,  dyestuffs,  milk,  fruit  juice, 
and  sugar  can  be  delivered  in  such  a  high  state  of 


138      INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 


concentration  that  the  extract  solidifying  on  cooling  can 
be  run  into  drums  or  moulds  ready  for  transit.  Many 
substances  can  be  concentrated  without  a  vacuum  in  this 


;::ri  § 


apparatus^which  require  a  vacuum  in  the  older  types  of 
apparatus.  By  this  method  all  the  steam  required  for 
the  auxiliaries  is  saved,  and  when  multiple  effects  are 


DRYERS  AND  EVAPORATORS 


139 


used  great  economy  is  obtained,  as  only  a  single  feed 
pump  is  required;  moreover,  where  cooling  water  is 
scarce,  the  possibility  of  avoiding  the  use  of  a  condenser 
is  a  great  advantage. 


FIG.  101. — KESTNER  "SALTING"  TYPE  EVAPORATOR:  SECTION. 

Fig.  100  shows  a  direct-fired  evaporator  followed  by  a 
quadruple  effect,  and  a  single -effect  finisher  which  is 
stated  to  produce  caustic  liquor  of  60  per  cent.  Na^O. 

Fig.  101  shows  a  section  of  a  "  salting  "  type  evaporator 
which  is  used  for  the  concentration  of  dual  solutions 
and  for  the  production  of  crystals  direct  in  the  separator 
instead  of  in  the  usual  trays.  Separation  of  salts  by 


140  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

crystallization,  owing  to  difference  of  solubility,  can  be 
effected  in  this  apparatus — e.g.,  mixtures  of  NaCl  and 
NaN03,  NaOH  and  NaCl,  NH4N03  and  Na2S04. 

The  separator  is  a  cylindrical  vessel  round  which 
several  calandrias  can  be  grouped.  Liquor  is  admitted 
to  the  separator  to  above  the  opening  B,  at  which  point 
the  calandria  can  operate,  the  height  being  checked 
through  the  sight  glasses  S.  Steam  is  turned  on  in  the 
calandria,  the  liquor  passing  through  B  down  into  the 
bottom  box  of  the  calandria  through  the  tubes,  and  back 
into  the  separator  at  A.  The  circulation  is  continuous, 
and  the  crystals  formed  are  by  means  of  the  circular 
baffle  deposited  on  the  bottom  of  the  cone,  whilst  the 
liquor  passes  through  B  and  the  vapour  formed  passes 
into  the  save-all,  for  further  treatment  as  desired.  At 
the  bottom  of  the  separator  is  a  valve  capable  of  dealing 
with  liquors  heavily  charged  with  salt  crystals,  and 
discharging  into  a  salt  box  or  filter  box,  which  latter 
has  a  bottom  cover  arranged  with  a  balanced  hinge 
so  that  the  filtering  medium  can  be  easily  inspected. 

By  means  of  the  isolating  valves  A  and  B,  any  one 
of  the  heating  units  can  be  shut  off  from  the  system  for 
cleaning  or  repairs  without  interfering  with  the  running 
of  the  rest  of  the  apparatus. 

With  multiple -effect  apparatus  there  is  an  economy  of 
steam  and  condensing  water  amounting  to  one -half  in  a 
double  effect  and  two -thirds  in  a  triple  effect  of  that 
consumed  in  a  single -effect  apparatus.  Multiple -effect 
evaporators  have  not  been  universally  employed  because 
materials  which  are  sensitive  to  high  temperatures  could 
not  be  evaporated  in  such  an  apparatus  without  suffering 
injury,  as  the  operation  of  a  multiple  effect  requires 
evaporation  temperatures  up  to  about  176°  F.  in  a  triple 
effect,  and  still  higher  for  a  larger  number  of  effects. 
For  small  and  medium  quantities  of  liquid,  and  where 
work  is  done  for  an  hour  or  two  at  a  time,  the  use  of  a 
multiple  effect  was  precluded  because  of  the  difficulty  of 


DRYERS  AND  EVAPORATORS  HI 

starting  and  stopping  it,  the  large  space  required,  and  the 
very  considerable  first  cost. 

The  "  Multiplex  "  evaporator  made  by  Blair,  Campbell 
and  McLean,  Ltd.,  Glasgow,  overcomes  some  of  these 
objections,  although  high  temperatures  in  the  first  effect 
cannot  be  avoided.  By  special  construction  the  quantity 
of  liquid  contained  in  each  effect  is  so  small  that  the 
liquid  remains  in  it  only  one  or  two  minutes  at  the 
utmost,  and  is  then  drawn  off  into  the  next  compartment, 
which  is  at  a  lower  temperature,  and  finally,  after  a 
short  time,  is  completely  concentrated  and  discharged 
from  the  apparatus. 

Fig.  102  shows  a  view,  and  Fig.  103  shows  a  section 
of  a  "  Multiplex  "  triple -effect  apparatus.  When  the 
apparatus  has  been  exhausted  of  air  the  liquid  to  be 
concentrated  enters  at  1,  into  the  double  bottom  2, 
and  rises  to  a  uniform  height  in  the  tubes  3,  which  are 
surrounded  with  steam  which  enters  at  4.  The  liquid 
very  soon  boils,  bubbles  of  steam  first  forming  at  the 
underpart  of  the  heating  tubes  and  increasing  to  a 
stream  of  high  velocity.  The  liquid  attaches  itself  to 
the  tube  walls,  and  the  steam  drives  it  high  up  these, 
so  that  the  middle  and  upper  parts  of  the  tubes  are  no 
longer  filled  with  liquid,  only  the  tube  walls  are  wet 
with  it.  The  bubbles  of  froth  formed  in  the  lower  part 
of  the  tubes  are  thus  broken  up,  so  that  the  liquid  leaves 
the  tubes  in  the  form  of  drops  which  spring  off  the  top 
edges  of  the  tubes.  Close  above  the  upper  tube  plate 
another  plate  is  fixed,  between  which  the  velocity  of  the 
steam  is  so  great  that  the  drops  have  no  time  to  sink  down, 
but  are  blown  towards  the  tubular  connection  5,  and 
through  it  into  the  separator  6.  There  the  liquid  sinks  to 
the  floor,  and  thereafter  it  rises  through  the  tube  7  into 
the  double  bottom  2,  and  the  heating  tubes  of  the  second 
effect,  whilst  the  vapour  rises  into  the  heating  com- 
partment 8,  and  there  serves  as  heating  steam.  The 
process  of  evaporation  is  repeated  there  in  the  same  way 


142  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 


FIG.  102.—  "  MULTIPLEX  "  FILM  TRIPLE -EFFECT  EVAPORATOR 


DRYERS  AND  EVAPORATORS  143 


FIG    103.— " MULTIPLEX "  TRIPLE-EFFECT  EVAPORATOR:  SECTION. 


144  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

as  in  the  first  effect,  and  again  in  the  third  effect,  from 
which  the  liquid  is  drawn  off  at  9  after  it  has  been  con- 
centrated to  the  desired  degree.  The  vapour  from  the 
last  effect  is  then  condensed  in  the  condenser  through 
pipe  10. 

Frothing  interferes  very  much  with  the  evaporation 
in  a  vacuum  apparatus,  but  in  this  case  the  liquid  cannot 
rush  through  the  tubes  in  the  form  of  froth,  but  adheres 
to  the  walls  and  evaporates.  The  central  entrance  of  the 
steam  into  the  heating  space  causes  an  energetic  circu- 
lation, so  that  all  the  heating  tubes  are  heated  with  the 
utmost  possible  uniformity,  and  no  dead  corners  are 
formed  in  which  material  that  would  generate  deleterious 
gases  can  collect.  The  apparatus  is  constructed  in  such 
a  way  that  the  whole  amount  of  liquid  contained  per 
square  foot  of  heating  surface  is  only  a  few  gallons. 
Every  particle  of  the  liquid,  therefore,  only  remains  a  few 
minutes  in  the  apparatus,  and  is  then  forced  out  by  the 
liquid  following  upon  it,  so  that  the  material  undergoing 
concentration  is  very  soon  withdrawn  from  any  de- 
leterious action  of  high  temperatures. 

The  mode  of  operation  is  very  simple,  and  consists  of 
putting  the  vacuum  pump  in  action  and  setting  the  valves. 
It  sucks  in  the  liquid  which  is  to  be  concentrated  through 
a  pipe,  and  ejects  it  in  the  concentrated  state  through 
another  pipe,  the  degree  of  concentration  being  regulated 
by  the  amount  of  the  feed. 

The  sugar  and  the  salt  industries  have  had  the  longest 
connection  with  the  vacuum-pan  process,  and  as  both 
these  industries  are  widely  represented  on  the  American 
continent,  it  follows  that  there  are  many  types  of  pans 
made  by  American  firms.  Among  the  most  important 
vacuum  pans  used  in  Canada  and  America  are  the 
Manistee,  Lillie,  Brecht,  Craney,  Oscar  Krenx,  Swenson, 
Sanborn,  Wheeler,  and  Zaremba  vacuum  pans,  each  of 
which  is  worth  consideration  by  the  chemical  engineer. 


CHAPTER  V 
DISTILLING  APPARATUS 

DISTILLATION  is  the  term  usually  applied  to  the  applica- 
tion of  the  process  of  evaporation  to  the  separation  of  a 
solution  into  its  components.  There  are  three  principal 
parts  which  all  types  of  distilling  apparatus  have  in 
common — viz.,  (1)  a  vessel  or  still  in  which  the  material 
is  heated;  (2)  a  cooling  apparatus  for  condensing  the 
evaporated  material ;  and  (3)  a  receiver  for  collecting  the 
condensed  material  or  distillate. 

The  process  of  heating  materials  and  collecting  the 
bodies  formed  by  the  action  of  heat  is  termed  destructive 
distillation,  and,  when  the  main  object  of  the  process  is 
the  residue  in  the  still,  so  that  this  part  of  the  apparatus 
undergoes  great  modification,  the  terms  roasting,  burning, 
glowing,  and  firing  are  used,  and  the  apparatus  termed  a 
muffle,  furnace,  kiln,  etc.,  as  the  case  may  be. 

It  will  be  obvious  from  what  has  already  been  said  about 
vacuum  pans  that  they  are  a  form  of  still,  and,  indeed,  they 
are  often  used  for  this  purpose  in  suitable  cases,  but  the 
separation  of  liquids  of  close  boiling  point  demands 
the  type  of  apparatus  usually  termed  a  still. 

The  Column  Still. — This  commonly  used  apparatus, 
of  which  a  diagrammatic  view  is  shown  in  Fig.  104, 
derives  its  name  from  the  column  or  dephlegmator  A, 
through  which  the  vapours  from  the  boiler  are  made 
to  pass  before  being  condensed  and  collected  in  the 
receiver.  This  column,  which  is  fixed  over  the  still  or 
boiler,  contains  a  number  of  shallow  cups  or  plates  placed 
at  intervals,  thus  dividing  the  column  into  a  series  of 

145  10 


146  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

chambers  between  which  communication  is  maintained 
by  means  of  perforations  in  the  plates  or  by  small  tubes 
so  arranged  that  a  small  quantity  of  liquid  can  be  retained 
in  each  cup. 

When  the  process  has  been  continued  for  a  sufficient 
time  for  the  column  to  take  up  a  steady  state  there  is  a 
definite  drop  in  temperature  from  the  top  of  the  column 


FIG.  104. — DIAGRAM  OF  STILL  COLUMN. 


downwards,  and  each  cup  contains  a  small  quantity  of 
liquid  with  a  correspondingly  higher  boiling  point 
through  which  the  oncoming  vapour  from  the  boiler 
must  bubble.  In  each,  the  partial  pressure  of  the  con- 
stituents depends  upon  the  temperature  and  the  com- 
position of  the  liquid  therein,  so  that  the  higher  boiling 
constituents,  as  they  fall  back  down  the  column,  enrich 


DISTILLING  APPARATUS  147 

themselves  at  the  expense  of  the  ascending  vapours,  until 
only  the  lower  boiling  or  more  volatile  bodies  issue  from 
the  top  of  the  column.  From  the  top  of  the  column 
the  vapours  pass  through  a  series  of  U  -tubes  B,  which  are 
surrounded  by  a  bath  kept  at  a  definite  temperature. 
From  the  bottom  of  these  U -tubes  draining  pipes  lead 
back  to  the  column,  and  are  so  arranged  that  they  dis- 
charge into  it  at  various  points,  depending  upon  the 
boiling  point  of  the  condensate,  progressively  from  the 
bottom  of  the  column  with  the  highest  boiling  point  to 
the  top  with  the  lowest. 

By  this  means  the  vapour  which  issues  from  the 
U  -tubes  and  is  condensed  in  the  coils  C  is  comparatively 
free  from  foreign  substances,  and  has  a  constant  boiling 
point.  By  continuing  the  process  this  constituent  may 
be  generally  entirely  recovered,  and  the  apparatus 
taking  up  a  fresh  steady  state,  the  next  higher  boiling 
constituent  may  be  recovered,  and  so  on. 

This  is  the  method  known  as  fractional  distillation, 
and  it  should  be  noted  that  it  is  not  applicable  to  all  types 
of  liquid  mixtures,  of  which  a  short  account  is  given  in 
the  Appendix. 

Fig.  105  shows  a  patent  rectifying  still  made  by  John 
Dore  and  Co.,  London.  It  is  designed  for  the  strengthen- 
ing of  weak  alcoholic  liquors  and  the  recovery  and 
purification  of  solvents,  such  as  ether,  acetone,  and  the 
like,  and  it  is  claimed  that  in  one  operation  it  will  produce 
alcohol  of  0-815  specific  gravity  from  weak  liquors  of 
about  0-967  specific  gravity. 

Fig.  106  is  a  diagram  illustrating  a  continuous  still 
made  by  George  Adlam  and  Son,  Ltd.,  Bristol.  This 
still  consists  of — 

1.  A  boiling  or  analyzing  column  made  in  sections  of 
cast  iron  and  fitted  with  copper  plates  between  each 
joint,  on  which  are  fitted  copper  bell  plates  and  dip 
pipes.  In  the  bottom  chamber  is  placed  a  steam  heating 
coil  for  heating  the  liquor. 


148  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

2.  A  rectifying  column  constructed  of  strong  copper 
and  made  in  flanged  sections.  This  is  also  fitted  with 
copper  bell  plates,  bells  and  dip  pipes  similar  to  those 


FIG.  105. — RECTIFYING  STILL. 

in  the  analyzing  column,  but  with  four  plates  to  each 
section. 

3.  A  rectifier  or  reflux  condenser. 

4.  A  condenser  with  tube  plates  and  tubes. 

5.  Sight  glasses  or  still  watchers. 


DISTILLING  APPARATUS 


149 


The  liquor  is  fed  into  the  still  at  the  seventh  section 
of  the  analyzing  column,  and  exhausted,  waste,  or  spent 
liquor  is  run  off  from  the  bottom  chamber. 

The  vapours  pass  from  the  analyzing  column  to  the 
rectifying  column  through  the  connecting  pipe,  and 


ftect-ifier.       Condenser 


FIG.  106. — CONTINUOUS  DISTILLATION  APPARATUS:  DIAGRAM. 

from  the  rectifying  column  to  the  rectifier  through  the 
bent  pipe  shown.  Portions  condensed  here  are  returned 
to  the  rectifying  column  through  a  draining  pipe  at  the 
bottom,  and  the  rest  of  the  vapour  passes  on  for  con- 
densation in  the  spirit  condenser,  where  it  can  be  observed 
and  discharged  as  required. 


150  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 


FIG.  107. — CONTINUOUS  STILL:  DIAGRAM. 

Fig.  107  shows  a  continuous  still  made  by  George 
Scott  and  Son,  Ltd.,  London. 

The  Coffey  Still. — This  particular  type  of  still,  named 
after  the  original  maker,  ^Eneas  Coffey,  whose  successors 


DISTILLING  APPARATUS 


151 


are  John  Dore  and  Co.,  London,  has  found  a  most  varied 
application  in  many  of  the  branches  of  chemical  industry. 
To  trace  out  the  application  of  the  principles  of  the  Coffey 
still  to  the  various  branches  of  industry  is  impossible 
for  the  purposes  of  this  book,  but  the  student  should  make 
himself  acquainted  with  the  main  outlines  of  the  process, 
and  always  be  on  the  look-out  for  its  practical  applicaticn 
in  the  industrial  world. 

Fig.  108  is  a  diagram  which  gives  a  rough  idea  of  the 
principal  parts  of  a  Coffey  still.     It  consists  of  two  columns 


FIG.  108. — DIAGRAM  OF  COFFEY  STILL. 

or  towers  A  and  B,  known  as  the  analyzer  and  rectifier 
respectively.  The  internal  arrangement  of  the  analyzer 
is  similar  to  that  of  a  column  or  dephlegmator  on  a  large 
scale.  The  rectifier  consists  of  a  column  which  contains 
a  tubular  coil,  through  which  the  liquor  is  pumped  and 
discharged  at  the  top  of  the  analyzer  over  the  perforated 
plates  or  trays.  Steam  or  some  other  suitable  vapour 
is  admitted  at  the  bottom  of  the  analyzer,  and,  rising 
through  the  descending  stream  of  liquor,  is  partially 
condensed  whilst  vaporizing  the  volatile  constituents  of 
the  liquor.  The  action  of  this  tower  is  exactly  similar 


152  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

to  the  action  of  the  column  of  an  ordinary  still,  so  that 
from  the  top  of  the  analyzer  a  pipe  leads  away  a  heated 
mixture  of  steam  and  vapour  of  the  volatile  portions  of 
the  liquor.  This  hot  vapour  is  in  turn  delivered  to  the 
bottom  of  the  rectifier,  where  it  gradually  rises  through 
the  coils  of  the  liquor  tube,  heating  the  contents  and  at 
the  same  time  condensing  out  the  higher  boiling  portions, 
including  the  steam,  which  run  down  to  the  bottom. 
The  most  volatile  portions  pass  out  of  the  rectifier  at  the 
top,  and  are  led  to  a  condensing  apparatus  and  receiver. 
The  liquid  which  collects  at  the  bottom  of  the  rectifier 
is  pumped  up  to  the  top  of  the  analyzer,  and  there 
discharged  over  the  plates,  together  with  the  liquor  from 
the  tank.  With  proper  working,  by  the  time  the  liquor  has 
reached  the  bottom  of  the  analyzer  all  the  volatile  portion 
has  been  extracted,  and  it  may  be  drawn  off  and  discharged 
as  spent  liquor.  It  will  be  noticed  that  the  apparatus 
practically  consists  of  two  columns  arranged  on  the 
counterflow  system. 

It  need  hardly  be  mentioned  that  the  success  of  the 
process  depends  both  upon  the  design  of  the  parts  and  also 
upon  the  experience  and  skill  of  the  operator. 

Among  the  many  applications  of  this  apparatus  a  very 
interesting  one  is  its  use  in  the  liquefied  gases  industry 
for  the  separation  of  the  constituents  of  mixtures  such 
as  liquid  air,  liquid  natural  gas,  etc.,  whereby  formerly 
rare  gases,  such  as  argon,  neon,  and  helium,  are  obtained 
in  commercial  quantities. 

Extraction  Plant. — One  of  the  most  interesting  modi- 
fications of  distilling  apparatus  is  found  in  its  application 
to  the  extraction  of  oils  and  drugs. 

Fig.  109  shows  a  continuous  extraction  apparatus  made 
by  John  Dore  and  Co.,  London,  which  is  designed  for  the 
extraction  of  drugs  by  means  of  alcohol,  ether,  acetone, 
petrol,  benzene,  etc.,  and  is  so  arranged  that  there  is 
little  or  no  loss  of  the  solvent  used.  It  consists  of  three 
vessels — viz.,  an  evaporator,  extractor,  and  condenser, 


DISTILLING  APPARATUS 


153 


FIG.   109. — EXTRACTION  APPARATUS. 


154  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

all  mounted  on  a  self-contained  stand  with  the  necessary 
cocks  and  connections.  The  method  of  operation  is 
for  the  extractor  to  be  filled  with  the  plants  or  roots  to  be 
treated,  while  the  evaporator  is  filled  with  the  solvent. 
This  latter  vessel,  heated  by  a  steam  jacket,  vaporizes 
the  solvent,  which  is  conveyed  to  the  overhead  condenser, 
where  it  is  condensed  and  allowed  to  flow  or  percolate 
through  the  material  in  the  extractor  and  back  into  the 
evaporator  again,  together  with  the  dissolved  substances. 
Here  the  solvent  is  again  vaporized  and  returned  for 
extraction,  and  so  the  process  is  carried  on  until  the 
material  in  the  extractor  is  completely  extracted.  At 
this  stage  the  solvent  is  again  vaporized  and  drawn  off 
from  the  condenser,  while  the  product  is  collected  from 
the  lower  vessel  as  required.  The  centre  extraction 
vessel  is  also  fitted  with  a  steam  jacket  which  can  be 
used  for  driving  off  any  solvent  remaining  in  the  ex- 
hausted mass,  or  for  heating  the  drug  during  the  process 
of  extraction.  Both  vessels  are  fitted  with  removable 
covers  for  cleaning  purposes  and  for  charging. 

Fig.  110  is  a  diagram  showing  the  arrangement  of  an 
oil  extraction  plant  made  by  George  Scott  and  Son, 
Ltd.,  London. 

The  distillation  of  such  substances  as  crude  petroleum 
and  coal  tar  involves  both  distillation  proper  and  des- 
tructive distillation.  The  plant  used  is  comparatively 
simple  in  nature,  although  in  most  cases  of  huge  size. 
For  the  fractional  distillation  of  crude  petroleum,  cylin- 
drical steel  shells  up  to  a  size  of  15  feet  in  diameter 
and  42  feet  in  length  are  set  horizontally  in  brickwork, 
leaving  the  upper  half  exposed  except  for  an  iron  cover. 
Of  the  two  methods  of  firing — end  firing  and  side  firing — 
the  latter  is  preferred  on  account  of  the  greater  control 
of  the  still  which  ensues.  The  stills  are  fitted  with 
the  usual  dome,  from  which  the  vapour  main  of  12  inches 
to  18  inches  in  diameter  leads  to  the  condensers,  which 
are  very  often  simple  coils  immersed  in  a  water  bath. 


DISTILLING  APPARATUS 


155 


In  this  type  of  still  the  various  fractions  are  collected 
until  about  10  per  cent,  of  the  original  oil  is  left  as  a 
tarry  residue,  which  is  removed  and  distilled  in  tar 
stills. 


156  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

Sometimes  the  distillation  of  the  oil  is  carried  on  till 
the  residue  is   destructively  distilled  to   coke.     In  this 


case  the  vapours  are  led  through  a  kind  of  column,  which 
takes  the  form  of  a  number  of  towers  each  of  which 
corresponds  to  a  chamber  of  the  smaller  column.  These 


DISTILLING  APPARATUS 


157 


towers  consist  of  two  chambers  connected  by  tubes, 
around  which  the  air  circulates  and  in  which  the  vapours 
are  condensed  and  run  down  into  the  bottom  chamber, 
whence  they  are  drawn  off  as  a  separate  fraction  after 
passing  through  water  coolers.  The  towers  are  connected 
to  the  still  in  series,  the  vapour  entering  at  the  bottom 
of  the  fir?t  and  passing  out  at  the  top  to  the  bottom 


FIG.  112. — LUBRICATING  OIL  DISTILLING  PLANT:  PLAN. 

of  the  second,  and  so  on.  In  certain  cases  steam  is 
blown  into  the  still,  which  has  the  effect  not  only  of  keeping 
the  mass  agitated  and  preventing  overheating  of  the 
bottom  portion,  but  also,  by  its  additional  pressure  on 
the  surface,  lowers  the  partial  pressure  necessary  for  any 
constituent  to  boil,  and  so  causes  that  substance  to  boil 
off  at  a  lower  temperature.  It  need  hardly  be  mentioned 


158  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

that   some    manufacturers    obtain    the    same    effect    by 
working  the  process  under  a  vacuum. 

On  account  of  the  fact  that  a  high  distilling  temperature 
is  injurious  to  the  product,  in  the  case  of  lubricating  oils, 
the  process  of  vacuum  distillation  is  in  common  use. 

Figs.  Ill  and  112  give  a  view  in  elevation  and  plan 
of  a  continuous  vacuum  oil  distilling  plant  for  lubricating 
and  paraffin  oils  made  by  W.  J.  Fraser  and  Co.,  Ltd., 
Dagenham,  Essex. 

The  plant  is  so  designed  that  a  high  vacuum  is  main- 
tained in  the  entire  system  by  means  of  a  vacuum  pump 
under  a  continuous  or  periodical  distillation,  the  dis- 
tillates being  collected  in  their  respective  receivers. 
This  plant  may  be  advantageously  connected  direct 
with  the  crude  oil  distillation  plant,  effecting  thereby 
a  further  saving  in  fuel  and  labour.  Among  the  advan- 
tages of  this  type  of  plant  are  (1)  a  high  quality  product 
due  to  low  temperature  and  high  vacuum ;  (2)  no  cracking, 
as  the  vapours  do  not  have  contact  with  highly  heated 
plates  in  the  still. 

For  the  distillation  of  tar,  similar  stills  having  a 
capacity  of  about  5,000  gallons  are  in  common  use,  but 
very  often  the  still  is  of  the  vertical  type,  having  a  con- 
vex top  and  concave  bottom.  Constructed  of  J-inch 
boiler  plate  with  a  bottom  of  Ij  inches  set  in  a  brick 
arch  over  the  fire,  the  lower  half  is  heated  by  the  hot 
gases  from  the  fire  being  made  to  circulate  round  it  by 
means  of  flues.  The  vapours  are  led  away  to  the  usual 
type  of  condensing  coil,  and  provision  is  made  for  running 
off  the  pitch  from  the  still  into  a  vessel  for  cooling. 

Retorts. — The  greater  part  of  the  labours  of  the  early 
chemists  was  devoted  to  the  heating  of  all  manner  of 
materials  in  an  alembic  or  retort  and  investigating 
the  nature  of  the  resulting  products.  This  form  of 
distilling  apparatus  in  some  cases  yielded  important 
results  of  commercial  value,  so  that  industries  were 
started  and  the  retort  was  developed  in  accordance  with 


DISTILLING  APPARATUS  159 

the  particular  needs.  The  term  "  re  tori "  is  now  generally 
used  to  indicate  that  part  of  the  apparatus  in  which 
the  heating  of  the  material  is  carried  on.  The  construc- 
tion of  a  retort  depends  entirely  upon  the  particular 
industry  in  which  it  is  used  and  the  requirements  of  the 
individual  manufacturer. 

In  the  nitric  acid  industry  a  retort  is  required  in  which 
sulphuric  acid  and  nitrate  of  soda  can  be  mixed  and 
heated,  resulting  gases  collected,  and  provision  made 
for  removing  the  nitre  cake. 

These  retorts  are  usually  cast-iron  cylinders  about  5  feet 
in  diameter  and  10  feet  in  length,  closed  at  either  end  by 
stone  or  cast-iron  plates,  one  of  which  is  pierced  for  the 
separate  feeding  of  the  acid  and  the  soda,  and  the  other 
for  the  exit  of  the  gases  and  the  discharge  of  the  nitre 
cake.  These  retorts  are  fixed  in  a  brickwork  setting  and 
only  require  a  comparatively  small  fire  area. 

Another  common  form  is  known  as  the  pot  still,  which 
consists  of  a  pot  made  up  of  three  sections  luted  together 
with  an  acid-resisting  cement.  The  upper  sections  are 
lined  with  bricks,  but  the  bottom  section  is  unlined,  as 
it  is  not  so  liable  to  corrosion,  and  to  allow  of  easy  heat 
transfer.  The  bottom  section  is  provided  with  an  outlet 
for  the  discharge  of  the  nitre  cake,  and  the  top  section  is 
provided  with  a  charging  door  and  gas  exit  tube.  As  a 
rule  the  pots  receive  a  charge  of  about  1  ton  of  material 
a  day,  which  is  gradually  distilled. 

The  retorts  used  in  a  by-product  coke  oven  are  long 
narrow  structures  of  firebrick  about  30  feet  long,  6  feet 
high,  and  1J  feet  wide,  arranged  side  by  side,  separated 
by  flues.  The  ends  are  closed  by  sliding  iron  doors, 
which  are  luted  during  operations,  and  which  can  be 
raised  at  the  end  of  a  run  and  the  whole  of  the  contents 
pushed  out  by  mechanical  means. 

The  retorts  used  in  the  coal-gas  industry  are  of  three 
kinds — viz.,  (1)  horizontal,  (2)  inclined,  and  (3)  vertical. 

There    is    considerable    variation    in    the    length    and 


160  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

cross-section  of  these  retorts  and  in  the  method  of  heating, 
although  the  use  of  producer  gas  is  growing  in  favour. 
Horizontal  retorts  are  usually  provided  with  mechanical 
stokers,  and  are  charged  to  about  two -thirds  of  their 
capacity.  Inclined  retorts  are  charged  by  feeding  in  at 
the  top,  and  discharged  from  a  door  at  the  bottom, 
thus  saving  a  certain  amount  of  labour.  The  gas  is 
drawn  off  at  the  bottom  of  the  retort,  but  it  is  said  that 
the  yield  is  smaller  than  in  the  case  of  other  types  of 
retorts.  Vertical  retorts  are  arranged  in  groups  for 
filling  at  the  same  time,  and  the  gas  is  drawn  off  at  the 
top,  while  the  coke  is  removed  from  the  bottom  and 
used  directly  for  making  producer  gas  for  heating  the 
retorts. 

An  exceedingly  important  modification  of  the  gas 
retort  is  that  designed  by  Mr.  Dowson  for  the  production 
of  a  cheap  gas  fuel  for  driving  gas  engines  and  for  heating 
work  of  all  kinds  where  cocks  and  burners  are  used. 

Briefly,  the  gas  is  made  by  passing  superheated  steam, 
mixed  with  air,  through  red-hot  fuel  in  a  vertical  gas 
producer.  The  steam  is  decomposed,  the  oxygen  com- 
bining readily  with  the  carbon  of  the  fuel,  and  the  com- 
bustible constituents  of  the  gas  consist  of  hydrogen, 
carbon  monoxide,  and  a  small  percentage  of  marsh  gas. 
The  process  is  continuous  and  automatic,  and  there  is  no 
outside  fire,  as  there  is  with  an  oidinary  retort;  the 
cost  of  repairs  is  low,  and  the  apparatus  is  simple  and 
easy  to  work.  The  gas  is  made  as  quickly  as  it  can  be 
consumed,  and  its  production  being  governed  auto- 
matically to  suit  a  varying  rate  of  consumption,  it  can  be 
stopped  completely  for  meal-times  or  when  laying  off. 
The  gas  is  cooled,  washed  and  scrubbed,  and  passed 
into  a  gasholder  when  required,  although  in  many  cases 
the  latter  operation  is  found  not  to  be  necessary. 

The  original  Dowson  plant  is  worked  with  a  jet  of 
steam  at  pressure,  acting  as  an  air  injector,  and  is  known 
as  the  pressure  plant,  but  in  the  more  recent  plant  the 


DISTILLING  APPARATUS  161 

suction  plant,  air  and  steam  are  drawn  in  by  means 
of  a  fan  or  gas  engine,  the  only  difference  in  the  result 
being  that  pressure  gas  has  a  little  higher  calorific  power 
and  is  more  useful  for  heating  work  than  the  suction 
gas. 

Both  types  are  worked  with  anthracite  (peas,  beans, 
or  nuts),  charcoal,  or  gas  coke,  which  latter  should  be 
in  pieces  of  £  to  f  inch  cube,  and  should  not  contain 
more  than  10  to  12  per  cent,  of  ash.  Owing  to  the  forma- 
tion of  tar,  special  plants  are  needed  for  using  bituminous 
coal  and  for  the  utilization  of  wood  refuse,  shavings, 
sawdust,  etc. 


FIG.  113. — "DOWSON"  STEAM  JET  PRESSURE  GAS  PLANT. 

Fig.  113  shows  a  diagrammatic  sectional  view  of  a 
Dowson  pressure  plant.  A  jet  of  steam  at  pressure  from 
a  small  independent  boiler,  or  from  a  factory  or  other 
boiler  near  the  gas  plant,  plays  in  an  open  air  pipe, 
and  the  mixture  of  steam  and  air  is  forced  into  the  fire 
in  the  producer,  the  fuel  being  put  in  through  the  hopper 
on  the  top.  The  gas  is  made  continuously  so  long  as  the 
jet  of  steam  is  working,  and  if  shut  off  the  production 
of  gas  ceases  at  once.  On  the  steam  pipe  there  is  a 
governing  valve  and  lever  actuated  by  the  rise  and  fall  of 
the  gasholder,  so  that  the  rate  of  production  is  governed 
automatically  to  suit  a  varying  rate  of  consumption. 

11 


162  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

After  the  gas  leaves  the  producer  it  passes  through  a 
water  seal,  and  then  through  coke  and  sawdust  scrubbers. 
The  consumption  of  anthracite  or  charcoal  is  about 
13  pounds,  or  of  coke  about  14  pounds  per  1,000  cubic 
feet  of  gas,  and  it  may  be  taken  for  the  purposes  of  costs 
comparison  that  4,000  cubic  feet  of  this  gas  are  equivalent 
to  1,000  cubic  feet  of  town  gas. 


FIG.  114. — "  DOWSON  "  SUCTION  GAS  PLANT. 

This  type  of  plant  is  suitable  when  there  are  two  or 
more  gas  engines,  when  there  are  engines  and  heating 
work,  or  when  there  is  heating  work  only.  The  gas 
mains  are  then  simplified,  and  it  is  also  more  easy  to  start 
two  or  three  engines  from  a  pressure  plant  than  from  a 
suction  plant. 

When  this  type  of  plant  is  used  for  engine  work  the 
consumption  of  anthracite  or  charcoal  of  average  quality 
is  about  1  pound  per  b.h.p.  hour,  the  actual  consumption 


DISTILLING  APPARATUS  163 

depending  somewhat   on   the   efficiency   of   the  engine. 
With  coke  the  consumption  is  a  little  higher. 

Fig.  114  gives  a  sectional  view  of  the  Dowson  suction 
plant.  In  this  case  the  steam  is  formed  in  a  vaporizer 
inside  the  producer,  near  the  top,  and  the  steam  and 
air  are  drawn  into  the  fire  at  the  bottom  by  means  of 
a  fan  or  by  the  suction  of  the  engine,  which  works  in 
combination  with  the  plant.  Every  plant  has  a  small  fan 
for  blowing  up  the  fire  at  the  start,  and  when  the  engine 
is  started  this  fan  is  stopped  and  the  engine  itself  governs 
the  rate  of  producing  the  gas  to  suit  its  own  varying 
consumption.  After  the  gas  leaves  the  producer  it  passes 
through  a  water  seal,  and  then  through  coke  and  saw- 
dust, as  in  the  pressure  plant. 

Fig.  115  is  taken  from  a  photograph  of  a  30-h.p. 
plant.  The  chemical  process  of  making  the  gas  is  the 
same  as  in  the  pressure  plant,  but  as  there  is  no  inde- 
pendent boiler,  no  allowance  need  be  made  for  raising 
the  steam  required,  so  that  with  a  good  engine  the 
consumption  of  anthracite  or  average  charcoal  is  about 
|  pound  per  b.h.p.  hour.  From  tests  which  were  made 
on  a  40-h.p.  plant  the  heat  efficiency  was  found  to  be  as 
high  as  90  per  cent. 

For  plants  of  about  200  h.p.  and  upwards  it  is  found 
that  bituminous  coal  is  cheaper  than  anthracite,  and  so 
a  special  type  of  plant  is  used. 

Fig.  116  gives  a  sectional  view  of  a  Dowson  bituminous 
plant  for  making  gas  without  tar.  The  special  feature 
of  the  producer  is  that  it  is  double  acting — i.e.,  air  is 
drawn  in  through  the  top  and  through  the  bottom  of  the 
fuel  column,  as  indicated  by  the  arrows.  The  producer 
is  open  at  the  top,  and  coal  is  put  in  there,  but  there 
is  no  escape  of  smoke  as  air  is  drawn  inwards  by  an 
exhaust  fan.  The  upper  part  of  the  fire  burns  down- 
wards, the  hydrocarbons  are  distilled  off,  and  the  coke 
which  remains  sinks  downwards  into  the  lower  part 
of  the  producer,  where  it  meets  an  upward  current  of 


164  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

steam  and  air  and  is  converted  into  ordinary  producer 
gas.     The  mixture  of  gases  leaves  the  producer  through 


FIG.  115.— 30  H.P.  SUCTION  GAS  PLANT. 

an  outlet  about  halfway  between  the  top  and  the  bottom. 
The  producer  has  a  water  bottom,  so  that  clinker  and  ash 
can  be  drawn  out  while  the  plant  is  working,  and  almost 


DISTILLING  APPARATUS 


165 


any  kind  of  coal  can  be  used  which  does  not  contain  more 
than  31  to  35  per  cent,  of  volatile  matter.  After  leaving 
the  producer  the  hot  gas  passes  through  a  vaporizer  to 
cool  and  also  assist  to  raise  the  steam  required.  It  then 
passes  through  special  scrubbers  to  remove  dust,  scot,  etc., 


but  in  this  process  there  is  no  tar,  as  it  is  converted  into 
gas  in  the  producer,  and  no  mechanical  or  other  tar 
extractor  is  required. 

The  calorific  value  of  this  gas  is  nearly  the  same  as  that 
made  from  anthracite,  and  under  good  conditions  the 


166  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

consumption  of  coal  of  fairly  good  quality  in  pieces  of 
about  J  to  1  inch  cube  is  a  little  over  1  pound  per  b.h.p. 
hour. 

During  the  last  few  years  the  great  development  of  the 
oil-hardening  industry  has  created  a  demand  for  large 
quantities  of  pure  hydrogen.  In  the  Lane  process  this 
gas  is  produced  by  means  of  a  special  retort  which  is  the 
result  of  the  research  work  of  Mr.  Howard  Lane  during 
the  past  fourteen  years.  The  retorts  used  are  of  the 
vertical  type,  and  consist  of  cast-iron  tubes  1 J  inches 
thick,  9  inches  internal  diameter,  and  9  feet  9  inches  long, 
having  end  covers  for  charging  and  discharging,  and 
arranged  in  a  brickwork  casing.  The  basis  of  the  process 
is  the  alternate  oxidation  and  reduction  of  iron  by 
steam  and  water  gas  respectively,  and  the  purification  of 
the  hydrogen  formed.  The  retorts  are  first  charged 
with  spathic  iron  ore,  which  on  heating  parts  with  its 
carbon  dioxide  and  yields  ferrous  oxide.  This  oxide 
is  then  reduced  by  heating  in  a  stream  of  purified  town 
gas  or  water  gas,  and  then  subjected  to  the  action  of 
steam,  whereby  the  iron  is  oxidized  and  hydrogen 
liberated.  Although  the  process  is  chemically  simple, 
the  successful  results  obtained  depend  largely  upon  the 
inventor's  mode  of  working.  Since  the  production  pro- 
cess takes  twice  as  long  as  the  oxidation  process,  Mr.  Lane 
arranges  three  groups  of  retorts,  so  that  two  groups  are 
reducing  while  one  is  oxidizing.  In  the  experimental 
plant  at  Ashford  the  control  valves  are  operated  every 
10  minutes,  so  that  each  retort  produces  hydrogen  for 
10  minutes  every  half -hour.  From  time  to  time  it  is 
found  necessary  to  burn  out  the  iron  in  a  current  of  air, 
in  order  to  restore  its  activity,  the  iron  becoming  poisoned 
by  the  accumulation  of  sulphur  and  other  impurities 
which  find  their  way  past  the  scrubbers.  Owing  to 
the  conditions  of  the  reaction,  an  excess  of  water  gas 
is  needed  to  obtain  complete  reduction;  hence  a  certain 
amount  of  this  gas  passes  from  the  retorts  unused,  but  at 


DISTILLING  APPARATUS  167 

a  later  stage  it  is  dried  and  used  for  firing  the  retorts. 
The  purity  of  the  hydrogen  produced  by  this  process 
is  stated  to  be  from  99  to  99  J  per  cent.,  and  the  cost, 
depending  upon  local  conditions,  is  low  enough  for  its 
production  on  a  commercial  scale. 

Kilns. — This  type  of  apparatus  is  used  when  it  is 
necessary  to  subject  material  to  the  action  of  a  high 
temperature  in  order  to  drive  off  moisture  or  some 
volatile  constituent.  They  are  mostly  used  in  the  cement 
and  gypsum  industries,  and  may  be  divided  into  the 
stationary  and  rotary  types.  Of  the  former  type  the 
primitive  limekiln  needs  only  a  mention,  but  a  modified 
form  consists  of  a  vertical  steel  cylinder  lined  with 
firebrick  up  to  10  feet  in  diameter  and  50  feet  in  height. 
The  fuel  is  kept  apart  from  the  limestone  in  two  fire- 
places built  in  the  sides,  and  so  arranged  that  the  hot 
gases  pass  through  the  kiln  and  the  ashes  fall  into  a 
separate  ashpit  below. 

In  the  chamber  type  of  kiln  a  series  of  chambers  aie 
built  round  a  central  stack  and  connected  to  it  by  flues. 
The  chambers,  which  are  alternately  charged  with  fuel 
and  limestone,  are  so  arranged  that  any  one  may  be 
disconnected  from  the  flue  and  separated  from  the  other 
chambers  by  partitions  as  required.  Thus  the  lime  may 
be  removed  and  the  chamber  recharged  and  set  into 
operation  with  considerable  saving  of  fuel.  In  the  gypsum 
industry  the  kiln  takes  the  form  of  a  beehive  with  a 
flat  floor  resting  on  a  cylindrical  base  in  which  are 
doors,  each  opening  into  a  furnace.  The  kiln,  which  is 
built  of  brick,  is  about  16  feet  high  and  30  feet  in  dia- 
meter, and  is  arranged  so  that  the  hot  gases  are  led 
through  flues  on  the  inner  side  of  the  kiln  down  through 
the  material  to  an  underground  flue  to  the  stack.  As 
a  rule  a  white  heat  is  maintained  for  three  days,  when  the 
lumps  are  removed  and  reduced  to  a  fine  powder  for  the 
purposes  of  cement. 

The  rotary  calciner   (Fig.    117)  used  in  the  gypsim 


168  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 


industry  consists  of  an  inclined  cylinder  30  to  70  feet  long 
and  5  feet  or  more  in  diameter,  set  at  a  small  angle  to  the 
horizontal  and  caused  to  revolve  slowly,  having  roller 
bearings  and  trunnions  and  a  heavy  geared  driving 
wheel  at  one  end.  The  cylinder  is  housed  in  a  brick 


DISTILLING  APPARATUS  169 

casing,  in  one  part  of  which  is  situated  the  furnace,  the 
bottom  part  consisting  of  chambers  with  perforated 
tops,  about  2  feet  above  which  is  a  perforated  arch. 
Through  these  perforations  cool  air  passes,  and  mixes  with 
the  hot  gases,  which  are  drawn  by  a  fan  connected 
to  the  top  end  of  the  cylinder  through  the  bottom  chamber 
and  up  the  cylinder  as  the  material  passes  down.  A 
certain  amount  of  the  gases  passes  through  the  arch  into 
the  cylinder  through  ducts  arranged  in  the  length  of  the 
cylinder  and  protected  on  the  inside  to  prevent  any  loss 
of  material.  Lifting  blades  running  the  entire  length  of 
the  cylinder  keep  the  material  in  motion  during  the  ten 
minutes  or  so  that  it  takes  to  travel  the  whole  length. 

By  the  use  of  a  recording  thermometer  at  the  outlet 
and  the  operation  of  the  cool  air  damper  a  steady  tempera- 
ture can  be  maintained  throughout  the  operation. 

In  the  Portland  cement  industry  rotary  kilns  are  used 
up  to  150  feet  in  length,  made  of  J-inch  steel  plates  with 
single  strap  butt  joints  and  lined  with  some  refractory 
material.  The  cylinder,  which  has  an  inclination  of 
about  1  in  15,  is  driven  near  its  middle  by  a  train  of 
gears  at  a  speed  of  from  25  to  55  revolutions  an  hour. 
The  top  of  the  kiln,  where  there  is  a  water-cooled  feeding 
device,  projects  into  a  flue  connected  with  a  firebrick- 
lined  shaft  provided  with  a  door  or  damper.  The  lower 
end  of  the  kiln  has  a  removable  firebrick  cover  having 
openings  for  the  discharge  of  clinker  and  for  the  heating 
apparatus,  which  may  consist  of  a  jet  of  powdered  coal, 
worked  by  a  fan  or  compressor,  which  partly  supplies 
the  air  necessary  for  combustion. 

The  Muffle  Furnace. — When  it  is  necessary  to  calcine 
material  without  having  contact  with  the  hot  gases  the 
muffle  furnace  is  employed.  The  muffle  itself  is  usually  of 
firebrick,  and  the  flues  are  arranged  so  that  the  hot  gases 
first  pass  beneath  the  bottom  of  the  muffle  and  then  over 
the  top  back  to  a  point  near  the  grate,  and  thence  to  the 
chimney.  In  cases  where  any  gas  has  to  be  discharged 


170      INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

from  the  muffle  a  pipe  is  fixed  to  the  top  to  allow  of  its 
ready  escape. 

The  Reverberatory  Furnace. — In  this  type  of  furnace, 
which  has  extensive  application,  the  material  treated  is 
exposed  to  the  direct  action  of  the  gases  from  the  fire. 
It  consists  of  an  arched  brick  chamber  lined  with  fire- 
brick, at  one  end  of  which  is  placed  a  grate  for  heating, 
and  at  the  other  end  a  chimney  to  carry  off  the  waste 
gases.  The  material  is  placed  on  the  floor  of  the  arched 


FIG.  118. — SIEMENS  REGENERATIVE  FURNACE:  DIAGRAM. 

chamber  and  heated  directly  by  the  hot  gases  from 
the  grate,  which  are  deflected  upon  it  by  the  arched 
roof.  By  regulating  the  supply  of  air  an  oxidizing  or 
reducing  action  can  be  obtained  at  will.  To  obtain  the 
former  effect  the  firebars  must  be  set  well  apart  and  the 
fuel  fed  in  a  thin  layer,  and  for  the  latter  effect  the 
firebars  must  be  set  closer  and  the  fuel  fed  in  so  as  to  form 
a  thick  layer. 

The  Regenerative  Furnace. — Fig.  118  is  a  diagrammatic 
illustration  of  this  type  of  furnace,  which  owes  its  in- 


DISTILLING  APPARATUS  171 

ception  to  Siemens.  The  object  of  this  furnace  is  to 
recover  as  much  heat  as  possible  from  the  flue  gases. 
To  effect  this  the  furnace  is  connected  with  a  number 
of  chambers  or  flues  filled  with  firebrick,  through  a 
certain  number  of  which  the  hot  waste  gases  pass,  thus 
(riving  up  their  heat  to  the  firebrick  packing.  After 
about  twenty  minutes  to  half  an  hour  the  waste  gases  are 
diverted  by  means  of  dampers  to  a  fresh  set  of  cool  flues, 
and  at  the  same  time  the  incoming  gas  and  air  is  made 
to  pass  through  the  heated  flues  and  recover  the  heat 
therein.  In  the  glass -making  industry  the  pot  furnaces 
are  frequently  of  this  type,  although  the  recuperative 
furnace,  in  which  there  is  no  reversal  of  draught,  but 
the  incoming  gas  is  made  to  pass  over  fireclay  tubes 
heated  by  the  waste  gases,  is  also  in  use. 

Roasting  Furnaces.— The  chemical  industry  of  this 
country  requires  enormous  quantities  of  sulphuric  acid, 
the  production  of  which  depends  upon  the  oxidation  of 
huge  quantities  of  sulphur.  A  great  proportion  of  this 
sulphur  is  obtained  by  heating  ores  which  contain  sulphur, 
in  specially  constructed  furnaces,  which  aim  at  producing 
sulphur  dioxide  gas  in  as  pure  a  state  as  possible. 

Fig.  119  is  an  illustration  of  a  mechanical  roasting 
furnace  for  copper  and  iron  pyrites,  spent  oxide,  gold 
ores,  silver  lead  ores,  concentrates,  zinc  ores,  etc.,  made 
by  the  Harris  Furnace  Co.,  Ltd.,  Sheffield. 

The  furnace  is  built  in  vertical  sections  separated  by 
division  walls,  and  each  section  is  divided  into  the  desired 
number  of  tiers  by  arched  floors.  In  each  section  there 
are  two  vertical  rabble  shafts  mounted  on  substantial 
ball-bearing  pedestals,  which  are  adjustable  for  height 
and  separated  from  the  interior  of  the  furnace  by  an 
arched  opening  accessible  from  the  outside  at  any  time. 
There  are  two  types  of  shafts  used,  known  as  the  "  A  " 
and  "  B  "  types,  illustrations  of  which  are  shown  in 
Fig.  120  and  Fig.  121  respectively.  The  "  A  "  type  is 
so  constructed  that  it  can  be  easily  taken  to  pieces,  or  any 


172  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

one  arm  can  be  replaced  without  interfering  with  any 
other  part  of  the  shaft,  by  simply  removing  the  bolts 


in  the  top  and  bottom  joints.     The  shaft  has  a  separate 
flow  of  water  to  each  arm,  and  a  return  to  the  centre  of  the 


FIG.  120. — "  A  "  TYPE  SHAFT  FOR  ROASTING  FURNACE. 


174  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

shaft,  through  which  water  is  carried  up,  whence  it  is 
taken  off  at  a  lower  level  than  the  feed  into  the  pan, 
and  is  then  conveyed  through  suitable  piping,  to  be 
disposed  of  as  desired. 

When  only  hard  water  is  available  for  cooling,  type 
"  B  "  shaft  is  used,  as  the  "  A  "  type  is  liable  to  become 
choked  with  lime  deposit,  which,  stopping  the  flow  of 
cooling  water,  allows  the  arm  to  become  red  hot  and 
possibly  be  burnt  off,  thus  necessitating  the  closing 
down  of  the  whole  section.  In  the  "  B  "  type  the  arm  is 
detachable  from  the  shaft  by  removing  the  first  rake 
in  the  arm,  which  rake  also  acts  as  a  locking  piece  to  the 
cover  plate  on  the  front  of  the  boss.  The  cover  plate 
not  only  holds  the  arm  in  position,  but  also  prevents 
any  gases  from  the  furnace  entering  the  shaft,  or  air  in  the 
shaft  reaching  the  furnace.  The  arm  can  be  either  air 
or  water  cooled  on  any  or  all  of  the  hearths,  and  in  the 
latter  case  the  water  pipes  are  lowered  into  the  arms 
from  the  top  of  the  shaft,  the  joint  thus  being  inside 
the  shaft  and  obviating  the  possibility  of  water  getting 
inside  the  furnace.  The  very  simple  construction  on 
the  top  of  the  shaft  is  so  arranged  that  no  arm  but  the 
one  to  be  operated  on  need  be  interfered  with,  the  water 
pipes  being  lifted  from  the  arm  projection  inside  the 
shaft.  The  first  rake  and  cover  plate  having  been  re- 
moved (working  from  the  furnace  door),  the  arm  is  then 
free  of  the  shaft  and  can  be  drawn  out  and  replaced, 
and  the  necessary  repairs  to  the  defective  arm  carried 
out  as  desired.  Each  arm  has  at  least  a  1  J-inch  water  way 
and  a  separate  flow  and  return  governed  by  valves  at  the 
top  of  the  shaft,  so  that  the  heat  from  each  arm  can  be 
tested  and  the  growth  of  deposit  observed.  The  water 
is  taken  off  at  the  bottom  of  the  shaft,  thereby  causing 
a  current  of  cold  air  to  travel  up  the  shaft,  and  also 
relieving  the  arms  of  any  pressure.  When  air-cooling 
is  used  the  air  enters  the  shaft  at  the  bottom,  and,  passing 
through  an  opening  in  the  bottom  of  the  arm,  it  travels 


,  Water- 
cooled 
Arm. 


Air- 
cooled  i 
Arm. 


FIG.  121. — "B"  TYPE  SHAFT  FOR  ROASTING  FURNACE. 


176  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

along  and  returns  overhead;  thence  it  re-enters  the  shaft 
from  the  top  side  of  the  arm  and  travels  upwards,  finding 
its  exit  at  the  top  of  the  shaft.  The  illustration  shows 
the  lower  arm  being  air-cooled  and  the  upper  arm  water- 
cooled. 

The  rakes  are  of  the  slip-on  type,  and  can  be  easily 
changed  in  a  few  minutes;  consequently  the  pattern  or 
pitch  of  the  rakes  can  be  so  arranged  that  different 
depths  of  mateiial  can  be  maintained  on  each  bed  without 
interference  with  the  discharge.  Thus  on  the  top  bed, 
where  the  combustion  is  most  rapid,  a  shallow  working 
load  can  be  maintained,  while  on  the  lower  beds,  where 
the  sulphur  is  partly  burnt  off  and  it  becomes  necessary 
to  retain  all  the  heat  possible,  a  deeper  load  can  be 
kept  with  advantage.  This  interchangeability  of  the 
rakes  is  a  great  advantage  in  the  roasting  of  spent  oxide 
and  different  grades  of  copper  or  iron  pyrites. 

The  ore  to  be  roasted  is  fed  through  a  suitable  feeding 
arrangement  in  the  roof  of  the  furnace,  adjacent  to  the 
centre  of  one  of  the  shafts  in  the  uppermost  tier.  The 
rakes  on  the  first  arm  are  so  arranged  that  the  ore  is 
gradually  moved  towards  the  circumference  of  the  arm 
path,  whence  it  comes  under  the  control  of  the  other  arm 
in  that  tier,  the  rakes  on  which  are  arranged  to  move 
the  ore  towards  the  centre  of  the  arm  path,  whence  the  ore 
passes  through  a  feed  opening  to  the  next  tier.  This 
operation  is  repeated  in  each  tier  until  the  ore  is  finally 
delivered  from  the  lowermost  tier  into  a  discharge  spiral 
conveyor  or  other  suitable  arrangement  for  dealing  with 
burnt  ore.  The  gas  apertures  are  arranged  at  alternate 
ends  of  the  hearths,  and  rakes  are  provided  on  the  roof 
of  the  furnace  for  utilizing  waste  heat  for  drying  damp 
ore  or  other  material.  In  the  event  of  repairs  or  renewals 
being  necessary,  the  section  affected  is  cooled  by  stopping 
the  feed  to  the  same  and  opening  fully  all  its  air  doors, 
without  interfering  with  the  work  of  the  remaining 
sections. 


DISTILLING  APPARATUS 


177 


Driving  belts  are  dispensed  with  throughout  the  whole 
furnace,  and  the  separate  sections  are  driven  by  claw- 


I       I              i          '      i           i     i                                            lii'i 
i I        i J_J J._i 1 J.-I l__l__w 

FIG.  122. — H.H.  TYPE  MECHANICAL  ROASTING  FURNACE. 

clutch  gears  from  a  main  shaft,  which  is  in  turn  driven 
from  the  engine,  motor,  or  existing  line  shafting.     The 

12 


178  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

sections  which  are  independent  of  one  another  require 
about  1  b.h.p.  per  vertical  shaft,  and  the  additional  heat 
obtained  in  the  Glover  tower  through  having  no  separate 
dust  chamber  enables  the  whole  make  of  the  plant  to  be 
concentrated  in  the  tower  into  acid  of  from  145°  to 
150°  (T.). 

The  following  are  the  capacities  for  a  twenty  -four  hours' 
roast  of  various  sizes  of  the  Harris  furnace  : 

Copper  Pyrites  or 
Ground  Space. 


44  feet  x  20  feet.  28  tons. 

33     „   x20      ,,  21     „ 

23     „   x20     ,,  14     ,, 

12     „   x20      „  7     „ 

Australian  Zinc  Blende. 
22  feet  6  inches  x  22  feet.  12  to  14  tons. 

One  man  can  easily  attend  to  two  or  three  furnaces, 
roasting  from  45  to  60  tons  of  ore  per  twenty-four 
hours. 

Fig.  122  illustrates  the  type  of  furnace  made  by 
Huntington,  Heberlein  and  Co.,  Ltd.,  London.  It  has 
a  capacity  of  5  to  5J  tons  of  48  per  cent,  pyrites  in 
twenty  -four  hours,  according  to  the  composition  of  the 
ore,  and  has  an  air-cooled  shaft  with  natural  draught 
and  a  top  drying  shelf.  The  furnace  has  a  diameter  of 
13  feet,  requiring  370  square  feet  of  floor  space,  and  has 
seven  hearths  giving  a  total  hearth  area  of  624  square 
feet.  The  power  required  is  f  h.p.  and  a  dust-proof  dis- 
charge and  funnel  are  also  provided  when  necessary. 


CHAPTER  VI 
WATER  TREATMENT  PLANT 

THE  attempt  to  obtain  a  universal  solvent  engaged  the 
major  portion  of  the  time  of  a  great  many  alchemists. 
Had  they  been  content  with  a  comparatively  slow  action 
and  with  dilute  solutions,  they  would  have  found  that 
water  was  the  nearest  approach  to  their  ideal  that  it  was 
possible  to  find.  This  solvent  property  of  water,  to- 
gether with  the  operation  of  the  laws  of  mass  action, 
should  always  be  present  in  the  mind  of  the  chemical 
engineer.  All  natural  waters  are  more  or  less  impure, 
and  the  nature  and  extent  of  the  purification  required 
depends  upon  the  uses  to  which  they  are  put,  which  may 
be  roughly  classified  as  follows:  (1)  Food  purposes; 
(2)  the  manufacture  of  industrial  products;  and  (3) 
steam  raising. 

The  method  of  removing  insoluble  material  and  matter 
held  in  suspension  has  already  been  dealt  with  in  con- 
sidering filtering  apparatus,  so  that  the  matter  of  concern 
at  the  moment  is  the  removal  of  those  dissolved  substances 
by  methods  other  than  those  of  distillation,  also  previously 
mentioned. 

The  presence  of  dissolved  minerals  in  natural  waters 
is  the  cause  in  boiler-room  practice  of  the  trouble  of 
scale  formation,  corrosion,  and  foaming. 

From  the  nature  of  the  substances  concerned,  waters 
containing  a  certain  amount  of  inorganic  impurities  are 
termed  hard,  and  the  process  resorted  to  for  their  purifica- 
tion is  called  water-softening. 

When  hard  water  is  evaporated  the  mineral  impurities 
dissolved  in  it  are  precipitated,  and  settle  upon  the  sbeJJ 

179 


180  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

and  tubes  of  boilers  as  hard  scale,  the  rate  of  incrustation, 
its  composition,  hardness,  and  density,  depending  upon 
the  quality  of  the  water,  the  steam  pressure,  and  other 
circumstances. 

If  we  take  the  steam  requirement  of  the  average 
engine  as  being  equivalent  to  2  gallons  of  water  per 
horse -power  indicated  per  hour,  and  that  the  water 
contains  15  grains  of  scale-forming  salts  per  gallon,  which 
is  less  than  is  commonly  the  case,  the  scale  deposited 
in  a  working  day  of  ten  hours  amounts  to  about  f  ounce 
per  i.h.p. 

Calcium  and  magnesium  in  the  form  of  carbonates  and 
sulphates  form  about  90  per  cent,  of  the  scale  commonly 
found  in  boilers,  which  forms  an  insulating  medium 
with  a  high  power  of  resistance  to  heat.  Professor 
Rarikine  estimates  that  the  heat  resistance  of  carbonate 
of  calcium  is  seventeen  times  that  of  iron,  and  of  sulphate 
of  calcium  forty -eight  times  that  of  iron.  He  therefore 
calculates  that  J  inch  of  average  scale  necessitates  the 
expenditure  of  16  per  cent.,  J  inch  of  50  per  cent.,  and 
|  inch  of  150  per  cent.,  extra  fuel  to  generate  the  same 
amount  of  steam,  as  compared  with  a  clean  boiler. 
It  has  been  ascertained  in  this  connection  that,  whereas 
the  temperature  of  a  clean  boiler  plate  is  only  350°  F., 
the  temperature  of  the  same  plate  covered  with  |  inch 
of  scale  is  750°  F.— i.e.,  400°  F.  above  the  temperature 
actually  required  to  convert  the  water  into  steam,  in- 
volving the  danger  of  collapse  of  the  furnace  crowns. 

Corrosion  or  pitting  is  mainly  caused  by  the  presence  of 
free  acids  in  the  original  water  or  formed  by  the  inter- 
action of  the  solutes  under  certain  conditions  of  tem- 
perature and  pressure  obtained  in  the  boiler.  Chlorides 
of  the  metals  are  particularly  ready  to  dissociate  and  form 
hydrochloric  acid  in  the  presence  of  moisture,  and  the 
results  of  mass  action  become  apparent  wherever  different 
phases  of  iron  of  the  boiler  are  in  contact,  such  as  at  the 
rivets.  The  most  abundant  chloride  found  in  watei 


WATER  TREATMENT  PLANT  181 

is  that  of  magnesium,  and  it  is  the  frequent  cause  of 
serious  trouble  in  boilers.  Nitrates  are  also  found,  and 
also  exert  a  similar  corrosive  action. 

Foaming  is  essentially  the  formation  of  large  masses 
of  bubbles  on  the  surface  of  the  water  in  the  boiler  and 
in  the  steam  space  above,  which  do  not  break  readily 
and  release  the  steam.  The  strength  of  the  film  is 
dependent  upon  the  nature  of  the  water  in  the  boiler,  the 
steam  pressure,  and  other  conditions  present,  but  as  a 
rough  guide  the  tendency  to  foam  is  measured  by  the 
concentration  of  sodium  and  potassium  salts  in  the 
water.  It  is  obvious  that  since  surface  tension  is  so 
readily  a  variable  quantity,  the  prevention  of  foaming 
largely  depends  upon  the  skill  and  experience  of  the 
operators. 

The  following  mineral  impurities  are  of  common 
occurrence  in  water: 

Calcium  Carbonate. — In  its  pure  state  it  is  only  slightly 
soluble  in  water.  It,  however,  dissolves  freely  in  water 
containing  carbonic  acid,  forming  calcium  bicarbonate. 
When  water  containing  calcium  bicarbonate  is  heated, 
the  carbonic  acid  is  driven  off  and  the  normal  carbonate 
is  precipitated.  Calcium  carbonate  by  itself  forms  a 
comparatively  soft  scale,  but  with  other  ingredients  in  the 
water  forms  a  hard  scale. 

Cakium  Sulphate. — This  forms  a  hard  flinty  scale,  and 
attaches  itself  very  firmly  to  the  boilers. 

Calcium  Chloride. — This  substance  is  very  soluble  in 
water,  and  will  not  cause  incrustation  or  deposit,  but, 
being  a  chloride,  it  will  readily  react  to  form  calcium 
sulphate,  and  also  cause  corrosion. 

Calcium  Nitrate. — This  has  a  similar  action  to  the 
chloride,  and  readily  forms  the  sulphate,  and  also  causes 
corrosion . 

Magnesium  Carbonate. — Has  a  similar  action  to  calcium 
carbonate,  its  normal  carbonate  being  sparingly  soluble, 
while  its  bicarbonate  is  much  more  soluble. 


182  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

Magnesium  Sulphate. — It  is  very  soluble  in  water  and 
does  not  form  a  scale,  but  in  the  presence  of  calcium 
carbonate  both  calcium  sulphate  and  magnesium  car- 
bonate are  formed  as  scale. 

Magnesium  Chloride. — This  does  not  form  a  scale,  but, 
being  a  chloride,  it  readily  forms  hydrochloric  acid, 
which  causes  corrosion . 

Sodium  Sulphate. — Is  a  very  soluble  alkaline  salt 
which  does  not  form  a  scale,  but  increases  the  tendency 
to  foaming. 

Sodium  Chloride. — It  behaves  similarly  to  the  sulphate, 
and  is  fairly  stable  at  boiler  temperatures,  but,  being  a 
chloride,  must  be  reckoned  with  accordingly. 

Iron. — This  is  usually  present  in  the  form  of  the 
bicarbonate,  which  readily  gives  up  its  carbon  dioxide 
and  is  oxidized  to  the  hydroxide,  forming  a  gelatinous 
scum.  In  acid  water  the  sulphate  may  be  present, 
but  it  is  very  readily  treated. 

Alumina. — Is  found  in  small  quantities  in  most 
waters . 

Silica. — Is  found  in  nearly  all  waters,  and  when 
present  in  appreciable  quantities  it  unites  with  other 
ingredients  to  form  an  extremely  hard  scale. 

Carbon  Dioxide. — This  is  found  in  all  natural  waters 
in  excess  of  that  required  to  form  the  bicarbonates 
found  in  solution,  and  is  the  cause  of  a  certain  amount 
of  corrosion. 

Hardness  which  is  caused  by  the  presence  of  such 
substances  as  the  bicarbonates  which  are  precipitated 
on  boiling  is  known  as  temporary  hardness,  the  other 
salts  producing  permanent  hardness,  the  two  together 
making  up  the  total  hardness  of  the  water. 

Messrs.  Sofnol,  Ltd.,  Greenwich,  who  are  experts  in 
water- softening,  very  truly  remark  that  softening  is  not 
so  much  a  mechanical  as  a  chemical  process,  and  too 
much  attention  is  generally  paid  to  the  mechanical  part, 
whilst  the  chemistry  is  allowed  to  take  its  chance.  The 


WATER  TREATMENT  PLANT  183 

function  of  the  machine  is  to  bring  the  water  into  in- 
timate contact  with  the  proper  amount  of  the  chemicals, 
to  remove  the  precipitates  formed,  and  to  deliver  a  clear 
effluent. 

The  chemistry  of  the  process  is  the  formation  of  new 
combinations,  which,  being  insoluble,  allow  the  machine 
to  perform  the  mechanical  part  and  deliver  a  clear, 
softened  effluent. 

The  chemicals  must  be — 

1.  In  a  fine  state  of  division. 

2.  As  light  as  possible. 

3.  Quickly  soluble. 

4.  In  proper  proportions. 

5.  Uniform  in  composition. 

Further,  they  must  act  immediately,  do  their  work 
as  quickly  as  -possible,  and  yield  precipitates  which 
readily  settle. 

If  these  conditions  are  fulfilled  and  the  machine  brings 
the  chemicals  into  intimate  contact  with  the  water,  then 
the  water  will  be  properly  softened;  but  if  these  con- 
ditions are  not  fulfilled  the  process  is  a  haphazard  one, 
and  the  results  are  neither  concordant  nor  satisfactory. 

The  process  of  softening  a  carbonate  water  is  essentially 
different  from  that  required  by  a  sulphate  water.  In 
the  first  case  the  withdrawal  of  the  free  carbonic  acid 
removes  the  solvent  of  the  carbonates ;  they  thus  become 
insoluble  and  the  water  loses  its  hardness.  On  the  other 
hand,  the  sulphates,  being  dissolved  by  the  water  itself, 
are  not  eliminated  by  the  removal  of  the  carbonic  acid, 
and  some  other  material  requires  to  be  added  to  cause 
them  to  become  insoluble.  Carbonate  of  soda  is  gener- 
ally used  for  this  purpose,  but  this  cannot  act  so  long 
as  free  carbonic  acid  remains  in  the  water.  Each  grain 
of  free  carbonic  acid  means  that  every  1,000  gallons  of 
the  water  will  put  5  ounces  of  carbonate  of  soda  out 
of  action  and  prevent  it  doing  its  work  as  a  destroyer  of 


184  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

sulphate  of  lime  and  its  analogues.  Hence,  unless  the 
free  acid  is  removed  there  is  a  great  waste  of  soda,  and  the 
softened  water  has  a  high  residual  alkalinity,  which  will 
render  it  unfit  for  many  purposes  and  manifest  itself  un- 
pleasantly in  the  boilers. 

Water -softening  being  a  chemical  operation,  the  factors 
of  proportion,  time,  and  temperature  apply,  and  practical 
experience  serves  to  show  the  many  difficulties  to  be 
overcome.  A  great  deal  depends  upon  the  selection  of 
the  proper  type  of  plant  for  the  work  in  hand,  and  when 
the  water  exceeds  a  moderate  hardness  the  lime  and  soda 
type  becomes  a  necessity.  This  type  of  plant,  when 
properly  designed  and  with  due  attention,  will  give  satis- 
factory results. 

There  are  two  general  types  of  lime-soda  water -softening 
plants — the  intermittent  and  the  continuous  types.  The 
intermittent  type,  which  possesses  several  advantages, 
usually  consists  of  two  large  tanks,  each  tank  holding 
at  least  four  hours'  supply  of  water.  The  process  works 
intermittently,  so  that  when  one  tank  of  water  is  being 
softened  the  other  tank  is  being  filled  with  hard  water. 
The  volume  of  water  in  the  tank  is  known,  and  to  this 
measured  volume  of  water  of  known  hardness  a  weighed 
quantity  of  lime  and  soda  is  added — the  lime  in  the  form 
of  milk  of  lime  and  the  soda  in  solution  form.  The 
contents  of  the  tank  are  then  thoroughly  mixed  and 
allowed  to  settle,  when  the  calcium  and  magnesium 
compounds  fall  to  the  bottom  of  the  tank.  The  clear 
softened  water  may  then  be  drawn  off  for  direct  use  or 
into  a  store  tank,  and  the  precipitated  solids  drawn 
off  by  an  outlet  in  the  bottom  of  the  tank. 

Owing  to  the  facilities  for  control,  this  is  probably  the 
most  exact  method  of  water-softening,  and,  with  an 
ordinary  hard  water,  practically  the  whole  of  the  hard- 
ness-forming salts  can  be  removed,  and  the  softened 
water  contains  the  minimum  excess  of  lime  and  soda. 
In  a  works  where  there  is  sufficient  room  for  tanks,  and 


WATER  TREATMENT  PLANT  185 

first  cost  is  not  essential,  it  forms  probably  the  most 
satisfactory  plant. 

The  continuous -process  plant,  taking  less  room  and 
requiring  less  attention,  has  been  more  developed.  For 
successful  working  it  must  conform  to  the  following 
conditions : 

1.  The   lime    and    soda    control    system    must    work 
accurately. 

2.  The  tank  capacity  must  be  large  enough  to  enable 
the  chemical  reaction  to  complete  itself  fully. 

3.  The    lime    and    magnesia    sludge    must    be    easily 
removable  from  the  plant. 

Fig.  123  gives  a  view  of  a  rectangular  form  of  the 
"  Lassen-Hjort  "  automatic  water-softener  made  by  the 
United  Water  Softeners,  Ltd.,  London. 

This  apparatus  is  designed  to  perform  the  following 
functions : 

1.  Measurement  and  proportioning  of  the  water. 

2.  Measurement  and  proportioning  of  the  chemicals. 

3.  Settlement  and  filtration  of  the  precipitate. 

4.  Regulation  of  the  supply  of  both  untreated  and 
softened  water. 

The  main  parts  of  the  apparatus  are  the  mixing  and 
measuring  apparatus  and  the  settling  tanks  and  filters. 

The  measuring  apparatus  (Fig.  124)  operates  by  leading 
the  hard  water  into  the  plant  by  a  pipe  which  alternately 
fills  each  of  the  compartments  of  a  two -chambered  tipper 
oscillating  on  a  shaft  carried  in  bearings.  When  one  of 
these  compartments  is  full  of  water  the  disturbance 
of  equilibrium  causes  the  tipper  to  overbalance,  and,  by 
doing  so,  to  discharge  its  contents  into  the  tank  in  which 
it  is  suspended.  At  the  same  time  the  other  compart- 
ment of  the  tipper  is  brought  under  the  orifice  of  the 
inlet  pipe  and  filled  in  its  turn  with  hard  water,  to  be 
discharged  in  the  same  manner  when  full.  As  a  definite 
quantity  of  water  is  passed  at  each  oscillation,  by  at- 
taching a  counter  to  the  tipper  shaft,  the  quantity  of  water 


186  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

passing    through    the    plant    can    be    accurately    deter- 
mined.       * 

At  each  discharge  of  water  from  the  tipper  into  the 


tank  a  corresponding  amount  of  water  is  displaced  from 
this  tank  through  a  standpipe  and  shoot  into  the  re- 
action chamber,  and  here  it  receives  at  the  same  moment 


WATER  TREATMENT  PLANT 


187 


the  requisite  charge  of  chemical  solution  from  the 
circular  container  affixed  to  the  side  of  the  tipper 


semi- 
tank. 


This  is  effected  by  the  positive  discharge  valve  placed 
in  the  bottom  of  the  chemical  container,  which  is  opened 


188  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

at  every  movement  of  the  tipper,  and  caused  to  deliver 
into  the  reaction  chamber  the  exact  amount  of  softening 
reagent  (in  the  majority  of  cases  a  mixture  of  lime  and 
soda  ash)  required  to  soften  it  to  the  guaranteed  figure. 
The  valve  can  be  adjusted  to  deliver  any  specified 
quantity  of  reagent  required  by  the  volume  of  water 
in  the  tipper. 

In  the  illustration  of  this  valve  (Fig.  125),  A  is  a 
cylinder  fixed  to  the  bottom  of  the  chemical  reservoir, 
into  which  screws  an  adjustable  cylinder  B,  secured  in  any 
desired  position  by  the  back  nut  C.  Within  these  two 
cylinders  work  two  valves,  D  and  E,  the  latter  screwing 
on  to  a  tail  piece  F,  projecting  from  the  valve  D.  The 
pitch  of  the  threads  on  this  tail  piece  and  the  adjustable 
cylinder  being  the  same,  any  movement  of  the  cylinder 
B  results  in  a  corresponding  movement  of  the  valve  E, 
owing  to  the  valve  E  having  a  feather  G  working  in  a 
key -way  H  cut  into  the  cylinder  B.  The  valve  D  is 
provided  with  a  flat  face  and  a  piston  body,  which  latter 
prevents  any  chemical  solution  being  admitted  into  the 
adjustable  cylinder  until  the  lower  valve  E  has  closed 
the  outlet  ports  J.  The  operating  gear  consists  of  a 
double  lever  K  fixed  to  the  rocking  shaft  L  of  the  tipper. 
These  levers  are  fixed  to  the  vertical  valve  spindle  by 
two  loose  links  M  and  trunnions  N,  clamped  against  a 
screwed  sleeve  0  by  the  lock  nut  P.  These  levers,  when  in 
operation,  impart  an  up-and-down  motion  to  the  valve. 
The  screwed  sleeve  O  works  between  rollers  Q  carried 
on  to  the  bridge  R.  The  object  of  the  weight  8  is  to  keep 
the  valve  D  tight  on  its  seat. 

The  oscillating  receiver  is  prevented  from  tipping 
until  it  contains  a  predetermined  quantity  of  water  by 
means  of  a  locking  gear  constructed  as  follows:  To  the 
end  plate  of  each  compartment  of  the  tipping  bucket 
is  attached  a  bracket  carrying  a  ball  float  and  lever, 
and  a  vertically  sliding  rod  actuated  by  these,  which 
latter  at  a  certain  height  of  the  water  lifts  a  lever 


WATER  TREATMENT  PLANT 


FIG.  125. — POSITIVE  DISCHARGE  VALVEJFOR  WATER-SOFTENING 
APPARATUS. 


190  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

fulcrumed  on  the  angle -iron  edge  of  the  tank,  and 
engaged  with  a  notch  provided  on  the  bracket  before 
mentioned.  On  further  rising,  the  lever  is  disengaged 
from  the  notch  and  the  bucket  tips.  A  link  from  the  end 
of  the  tipper  shaft  operates  a  counter,  which  registers 
the  number  of  tips. 

The  heavier  portion  of  the  precipitate  produced  by  the 
addition  of  the  measured  quantities  of  softening  reagents 
to  the  water  settles  to  the  bottom  of  the  reaction  chamber, 
whence  it  is  removed  daily  by  opening  the  sludge  cocks. 
The  finer  precipitate,  which  will  not  settle,  is  retained  in 
filters  consisting  of  wood  fibre  packed  between  two  rows 
of  wood  bars.  The  filters  require  cleaning,  on  an  average, 
about  every  two  months,  which  operation  is  effected 
by  removing  the  top  bars,  by  loosening  the  fibre,  and 
washing  it  through  with  water. 

The  chemical  container  of  the  softener  is  designed,  in 
the  majority  of  cases,  to  hold  eight  to  twelve  hours' 
supply,  when  it  can  be  refilled  from  a  mixing  tank 
situated  in  any  convenient  position. 

Fig.  126  shows  a  cylindrical  type  of  softener  which  is 
useful  where  soft  water  is  required  to  be  delivered  at  a 
height.  The  operations  involved  are  the  same  as  pre- 
viously described,  but  the  water  from  the  measuring 
apparatus  passes  down  a  central  tube,  depositing  preci- 
pitate as  it  slowly  rises  up  the  tank  and  through  the 
filters  to  the  storage  tanks. 

Permutit. — This  is  the  name  given  to  an  artificial 
zeolite  having  the  formula  A^Og.lOS^.lONagO,  and 
marketed  by  the  United  Water  Softeners,  Ltd., 
London. 

The  valuable  property  of  this  substance  is  the  readiness 
with  which  it  will  exchange  its  sodium  for  calcium  and 
magnesium,  the  reaction  being  reversible,  and  therefore 
solely  a  question  of  mass  action.  Therefore,  if  hard  water 
is  passed  through  a  bed  of  Permutit,  a  calcium-magnesium 
Permutit  is  formed,  and  only  sodium  salts  pass  through ; 


WATER  TREATMENT  PLANT 


191 


but  although  the  hardness  is  removed,  the  total  amount 
of  solids  remains  the  same. 

When  the  sodium  of  the  Permutit  is  exhausted  by  the 


FIG.  126. — CYLINDRICAL  WATER-SOFTENING  APPARATUS. 

replacement  with  calcium  and  magnesium,  it  is  treated 
with  a  solution  of  salt,  which  by  mass  action  converts 
the  Permutit  back  to  its  original  condition. 


192     INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 


FIG.  127.— PERMUTIT  WATER-SOFTENING  APPARATUS:  DIAGRAM 


WATER  TREATMENT  PLANT  193 

The  simplicity  of  the  chemical  reaction  finds  its 
counterpart  in  the  extreme  compactness  and  convenience 
of  the  apparatus  requisite  for  the  softening  process. 
A  Fermutit  softener,  of  which  a  sectional  view  is  given 
in  Fig.  127,  consists  simply  of  a  cylinder  to  contain  the 
Permutit,  connected  with  a  receptacle  holding  the  salt 
solution  for  regeneration,  and  fitted  with  the  necessary 
valves  for  controlling  the  water  flow. 

The  design  of  the  plant  and  the  nature  of  the  Permutit 
process  favour  the  carrying  out  of  the  softening  under  the 
ordinary  pressure  of  the  water  mains,  thus  giving  this 
system  the  great  advantage  that  it  can  be  connected  to 
the  water  main  in  any  position  without  the  necessity  of 
pumping  twice,  or  of  arranging  for  a  gravity  flow  of 
softened  water. 

The  removal  of  iron  from  water  is  accomplished  by  a 
Permutit  in  wrhich  the  sodium  is  replaced  by  an  oxidized 
product  of  manganese  which  oxidizes  the  iron  to  the 
hydrate  which  is  retained  by  the  filter.  When  the 
oxidizing  properties  of  the  Permutit  are  exhausted  they 
are  restored  by  means  of  a  solution  of  potassium  per- 
manganate. 

The  Permutit  process  will  give  water  of  zero  hardness, 
which  is  of  inestimable  advantage  in  many  industries, 
such  as  silk  and  cotton  dyeing  and  bleaching,  wool 
scouring,  laundry  work,  etc. 

For  food  and  drinking  purposes  water  is  sterilized  by 
injecting  liquid  chlorine  and  removing  the  excess  by 
sulphur  dioxide,  and  the  plant  is  mostly  of  the  nature 
with  which  the  chemical  student  is  already  familiar. 


CHAPTER  VII 
THE  CONTROL  OF  TEMPERATURE 

IN  most  chemical  industries  reactions  have  to  be  carried 
out  at  definite  temperatures,  and  as  these  temperatures 
are  in  most  cases  well  above  the  normal  atmospheric 
temperature,  some  means  of  temperature  control  is 
necessary,  so  that  the  process  may  be  worked  efficiently 
with  the  least  possible  consumption  of  heat  units.  The 
commonest  form  of  heating  is  by  means  of  steam,  and 
James  Baldwin  and  Co.,  Keighley,  have  devised  a  system 
of  temperature  control  which,  applied  to  steam,  acts 
independently  of  the  boiler  and  controls  the  steam  supply 
during  boiling  and  other  processes.  This  device  is  known 
as  the  "Isothermal  "  (electric -mercury  thermometer -con- 
trol) valve,  which  is  claimed  to  regulate  automatically 
temperature  to  within  1°F. 

In  the  case  of  steam  the  supply  is  controlled  by  elec- 
tricity, so  that  the  parts  of  the  control,  consisting  of 
the  valve,  thermometer,  and  the  transformer,  may  be 
separately  fixed  in  suitable  positions. 

The  control  valve,  of  which  a  section  is  shown  in 
Fig.  128,  is  fixed  in  a  horizontal  position,  on  the  steam 
pipe  on  the  outlet  side  of  the  usual  steam  stop  valve,  the 
internal  parts  operating  vertically,  so  that  when  not 
in  use  the  valve  is  free  from  pressure.  As  illustrated 
in  the  section  the  valve  is  in  the  normal  position,  closed, 
there  being  no  pressure.  Instantly  steam  is  admitted 
the  action  of  the  pressure  upon  piston  C  lifts  the  piston 
valves  D  D  full  open,  allowing  a  full-bore  passage  for  the 
steam  at  any  or  varying  pressures.  The  valves  D  D  are 
of  the  equilibrium  type,  and  are  cast  on  the  same  stem 

194 


THE  CONTROL  OF  TEMPERATURE 


195 


as  the  pistons  B  and  C,  the  piston  C  being  smaller  in 
diameter  than  the  piston  B.     In  the  cover  of  the  valve- 


FlG.    128. "  ISOTIIERMAL  "    STEAM   VALVE. 

body  is  a  small  valve  A,  which  is  in  the  centre  of  a 
solenoid.     There  is  a  connecting  pipe  F  to  the  valve  A 


196  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

from  the  inlet  or  pressure  side  of  the  pistons  C,  D  D. 
When  pressure  is  admitted  to  the  valve  the  pistons 
C,  B  are  forced  up  against  the  cover  or  end  of  the  cylinder 
which  forms  the  outlet  side  of  the  small  valve  A,  and 
the  valves  D  D  are  fully  opened.  If  the  valve  A  be 


FIG.  129. — "ISOTHERMAL,"  THERMOMETER. 

raised  from  its  seating,  the  inlet  pressure  passes  along 
the  pipe  F,  and,  acting  on  the  large  piston  B,  forces  down 
into  their  seatings  the  valves  D  D,  shutting  off  the 
steam  supply.  If  the  small  valve  A  be  allowed  to  fall 
on  to  its  seating,  the  pressure  upon  the  large  piston  B 
is  removed  (a  small  escape  for  this  pressure  is  situated 


THE  CONTROL  OF  TEMPERATURE 


197 


between  the  valve  A  and  pis  ton  B),  and  the  boiler  pressure 
acting  on  the  piston  C  opens  the  valves  D  D  full  bore. 
It  will  be  noted  that  the  pistons  B,  C  and  the  valves  D  D 
are  operated  by  steam  pressure,  while  the  valve  A  in  the 
solenoid  is  operated  by  electricity. 

A  mercury -column  thermometer  acts  as  an  electric 
switch,  and  is  specially  constructed,  having  terminals 
for  connections,  as  shown  in  Fig.  129.  The  thermometer, 
suitably  calibrated,  is  fixed  in  a  selected  position  on  the 
vessel  of  which  the  temperature  of  the  contents  is  to  be 


THtRMOMEUR 


TRANSFORMER  ft  KELAV 


FIG.  130. 


G.A.  "  ISOTHERMAL  "  TEMPERATURE  CONTROL 
APPARATUS. 


controlled.  The  bulb  of  the  thermometer  is  connected 
to  one  terminal,  and  the  top  is  closed  by  a  cork  carrying 
a  platinum  wire  which  can  be  adjusted  so  as  to  make 
contact  with  the  mercury  at  any  desired  temperature. 

This  switch  operates  the  solenoid  in  the  valve  through 
a  transformer  and  relay  connected  up  as  shown  in  Fig.  130, 
the  current  required  for  each  valve  being  about  0'6 
ampere  at  110  volts,  and  for  the  thermometer  15  milli- 
amperes  at  1  volt. 

In  case  of  failure  of  the  current  supply  the  valve  is 
free  to  open,  and  the  steam  supply  can  be  manipulated  by 


198  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 


hand  in  the  ordinary  manner,  or  the  valve  can  be  con- 
structed to  shut  off  automatically  the  steam  supply 
until  the  current  is  again  restored. 

The  very  wide  range  of  application  of  this  system  of 
temperature  control  includes  the  steam  heating  of  factories. 


oz: 


STILL 


FIG.  131. — "  ISOTHERMAL  "  CONTROL  OF  STILL. 

etc.,  hot  water  heating,  and  the  cooling  of  vessels,  by  passing 
cold  water  to  maintain  a  lower  temperature  required  in 
many  chemical  processes.  Fig.  131  is  a  diagram  showing 
its  application  to  a  still,  and  Fig.  132  its  application 
to  a  jacketed  pan.  An  exceedingly  important  application 
is  its  use  in  a  dye  vessel  for  dyeing  piece  goods,  to  which 


THE  CONTROL  OF  TEMPERATURE 


199 


it  is  connected  as  shown  in  Fig.  133.  It  can  also  work 
as  a  reducing  valve  for  maintaining  an  exhaust  steam 
pressure  at  a  constant  pressure  of,  say,  5  pounds  per 
square  inch,  by  admission  of  high-pressure  live  steam  as 
shown  in  Fig.  134.  Applied  to  a  vulcanizing  press,  pan, 
or  cylinder,  as  shown  in  Fig.  135,  it  will  maintain  a  constant 
temperature  and  reduced  steam  pressure,  or,  as  shown 
in  Fig.  136,  maintain  the  blast  to  gas  producers  at 


FIG.  132. — '*  ISOTHERMAL  "  CONTROL  OF  STEAM-JACKETED  PAN. 

constant  temperature  and  composition.  Fig.  137  shows 
how  this  apparatus  can  be  used  for  the  automatic  regu- 
lation of  the  temperature  and  humidity  of  cotton-spinning 
and  other  rooms.  Fig.  138  is  a  diagram  of  the  valve  used 
for  regulating  the  temperature  of  superheated  steam  by 
the  admission  of  saturated  steam,  and  Figs.  139  and  140 
illustrate  in  section  the  valve  for  regulating  the  gas 
supply  for.  sizes  -fa  inch  to  J  inch  bore  and  f  inch  to 


200      INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 


FIG.  133. — "  ISOTHERMAL  "  CONTROL  OF  DYE  VESSEL. 


MAIN    STEAM  PIPE 
120    LBS    PRESSURE. 


FIG.  134. — "ISOTHERMAL"  CONTROL  OF  EXHAUST  STEAM. 


THE  CONTROL  OF  TEMPERATURE  201 


FIG.  135. — "  ISOTHERMAL  "  CONTROL  OF  VULCANIZING  PAN 


» 

FIG.  136. — "ISOTHERMAL"  CONTROL  OF  BLAST  FOR  GAS  PRODUCER. 


202  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 


FIG.  187. — "  ISOTHERMAL  "  CONTROL  OF  COTTON-SPINNING  ROOMS 


ii 

I 
f 

' 

— 

/M 

-' 

/ 

hi///////// 

Ess 

S^- 

-> 

1 

/,////////// 

3    i 

s^n 
i 

FIG.  138. — "  ISOTHERMAL  "  SUPERHEATED  STEAM  VALVE. 


THE  CONTROL  OF  TEMPERATURE 


203 


2  inch  bore  respectively  for  gas-heating  systems,  and 
automatically  regulating  the  temperatures  up  to  600°  F. 
It  may  be  used  to  regulate  a  fan  so  that  it  operates  at  any 
desired  temperature,  or  as  a  steam  main  isolating  valve, 
or  for  winding  engines  and  for  other  purposes  too  numerous 
to  mention. 


FIG.  139. — "  ISOTHERMAL  "  GAS 
VALVE. 


FIG.  140. — "  ISOTHERMAL,  "  GAS 
VALVE. 


Refrigerating  Machines. — The  problem  of  maintaining 
temperatures  below  the  normal  atmospheric  temperature 
demands  the  use  of  refrigerating  machinery  such  as  is 
made  by  the  Lightfoot  Refrigeration  Co.,  Ltd.,  London. 

The  cold  storage  of  food  is  familiar  to  all,  but  this 
forms  only  a  portion  of  the  field  of  application  of  the 
mechanical  production  of  cold.  In  dyeworks  refrigerating 
machinery  is  indispensable  for  producing  fast  colours 
and  even  for  colouring  with  certain  dyes.  The  supply 
of  natural  silk  is  considerably  augmented  by  its  use  to 
regulate  the  hatching  out  of  the  eggs  to  suit  the  supply 
of  food  available  for  the  silkworms,  while  artificial  silk 


204  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

also  depends  upon  it  in  the  process  of  converting  pulp 
into  silky  fibre.  It  forms  an  essential  part  of  the  equip- 
ment of  the  bacon -curing  factory,  the  brewery,  and  the 
margarine  factory,  to  name  but  a  few. 

In  the  Lightfoot  system  of  refrigeration  cold  is  produced 
by  the  evaporation  of  liquid  ammonia  or  carbon  dioxide, 
the  vapour  formed  being  afterwards  condensed  and  used 
over  again.  Fig.  141  is  a  diagram  illustrating  the 
principal  parts  of  which  each  machine  consists. 


REFRIGERATOR 


COJNDEINSER 

_J 


RELGULATiMG  VALVE 

FIG.  141. — DIAGRAM  OF  LIGHTFOOT  REFRIGERATION  SYSTEM. 

The  refrigerator  consists  of  a  series  of  coils  of  special 
welded  tube  wound  each  in  one  length  so  as  to  avoid 
inaccessible  joints,  inside  which  the  liquid  ammonia 
or  carbon  dioxide,  entering  through  a  regulating  valve, 
is  vaporized,  thus  reducing  the  temperature  of  the  liquid 
or  material  surrounding  the  coils. 

The  condenser,  of  which  a  normal  open  type  is  shown 
in  Fig.  142,  consists  of  a  series  of  coils  of  special  welded 
tubes,  inside  which  the  compressed  vapours  are  cooled 
and  liquefied,  the  liquid  being  returned  to  the  refrigerator 


THE  CONTROL  OF  TEMPERATURE  205 

through  the  regulating  valve.  In  order  to  cool  the 
vapours  the  condenser  coils  are  either  completely  im- 
mersed in  water  contained  in  a  wrought-iron  tank,  or  a 
spray  of  water  is  caused  to  trickle  over  the  surface  of  the 
coils.  The  ammonia  compressor,  of  which  a  small 
horizontal  type  is  shown  in  Fig.  143,  consists  of  a  cylinder 
of  tough,  close-grained  cast  iron,  with  back  and  front 
covers  of  the  same  material.  These  covers  contain  the 
suction  and  delivery  valves,  which  are  turned  out  of  solid 
steel,  each  fitted  into  a  box  in  which  is  formed  the  seat, 


FIG.  142. — OPEN  CONDENSER. 

the  arrangements  being  such  that  any  valve  can  be  readily 
withdrawn  and  replaced  without  disturbing  the  con- 
nections. The  piston  rod  is  of  polished  steel,  secured 
to  the  piston,  and  arranged  to  work  through  a  special 
stuffing  box  formed  in  the  front  cover.  The  cross-head 
is  of  wrought  iron,  provided  with  a  slipper  with  large 
wearing  surface  fitted  with  bronze  bearings,  and  the 
connecting  rod  of  polished  wrought  iron  is  fitted  with 
white  metal  bearing  at  the  large  end.  The  bed  plate  is 


206  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

of  cast  iron,  upon  which  are  formed  the  guides  for  the 
cross-head  and  the  bearing  for  the  crank-shaft,  which  is 
ring  lubricated.  Special  oiling  arrangements  are  pro- 
vided for  lubricating  the  piston  and  for  preventing  the 
oil  from  passing  over  into  the  coils  of  the  condenser  and 
refrigerator. 

The  carbonic  acid  compressor,  of  which  a  vertical  type 
is  shown  in  Fig.  144,  has  a  cylinder  machined  out  of  a 
billet  of  solid  steel,  as  also  are  the  covers  and  all  the 
fittings.  In  the  delivery  valve  cap  is  placed  a  safety 
valve,  which  will  relieve  the  pressure  in  the  event  of  the 
machine  being  started  up  with  the  delivery  stop  valve 
shut,  but  which  will  only  allow  just  sufficient  gas  to  escape 
to  keep  the  pressure  within  safe  limits.  Cup  leathers, 
which  are  a  frequent  source  of  trouble,  are  avoided  by 
having  a  metallic  packed  piston  and  gland.  In  some 
cases  the  cast-iron  frame  forms  a  casing  in  which  are 
contained  the  condenser  coils,  thus  making  a  compact 
machine. 

Ice-making. — The  appearance  of  the  ice  produced  is 
dependent  on  the  water  used  and  on  the  method  of 
freezing — e.g.,  ordinary  fresh  water  frozen  without  agita- 
tion produces  opaque  ice. 

There  are  three  systems  on  which  ice  is  made  viz., 
(1)  the  can  ice  system;  (2)  the  cell  ice  system;  and  (3)  the 
plate  ice  system. 

The  can  ice  system  employs  a  number  of  cans  of  lead- 
coated  steel,  of  rectangular  section,  tapering  slightly  from 
top  to  bottom,  in  which  the  water  to  be  frozen  is  placed. 
These  cans  are  placed  in  a  tank  containing  brine  sufficient 
to  immerse  them  to  within  2  or  3  inches  of  their  tops. 
The  brine  is  maintained  at  a  temperature  of  16°  to  20°  F. 
by  means  of  the  refrigerator  coils  of  the  machine,  and 
circulated  round  the  cans  until  all  the  water  in  the  latter 
is  frozen.  The  cans  are  then  removed  in  rows  and  dipped 
in  warm  water  for  a  short  time  to  loosen  the  ice,  so  that 
it  may  be  tipped  out. 


FIG.  143. — HORIZONTAL,  AMMONIA  COMPRESSOR. 


FIG.  144. — VERTICAL  CARBON  DIOXIDE  COMPRESSOR. 


208  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

The  can  system  of  ice-making  is  the  least  expensive 
in  first  cost,  and  also  the  most  economical  to  work, 
and  the  ice  formed  is  either  opaque  or,  by  the  adoption 
of  agitation  gear,  may  be  rendered  clear  to  within  about 
5  per  cent. 

In  the  cell  system  a  wooden  tank  is  used,  in  which  are 
placed  a  number  of  galvanized  iron  cells  from  10  to  14 
inches  apart,  through  which  cold  brine  is  circulated. 
The  space  between  the  series  of  cells  is  filled  with  water 
which,  during  freezing,  is  made  to  oscillate  gently  up  and 
down.  Ice  forms  on  the  sides  of  the  cells,  gradually 
increasing  in  thickness  until  the  two  plates  of  ice  on 
opposite  cells  join  in  the  centre  to  make  a  single  block. 
Warm  brine  is  then  circulated  through  the  cells  to  loosen 
the  blocks,  which  are  lifted  out  of  the  tank  by  means  of 
hooks  or  ropes  frozen  into  them .  Cell  ice  is  made  in  blocks 
weighing  from  4  to  6  cwt.,  and  from  9  to  14  inches  thick, 
which  are  of  convenient  size  for  handling. 

The  plate  ice  system  consists  of  placing  flat  hollow 
walls  of  galvanized  sheet  iron  in  a  large  wooden  tank 
which  is  filled  with  the  water  to  be  frozen.  Brine  or 
ammonia  is  circulated  through  the  hollow  walls,  causing 
a  plate  of  ice  to  form  on  each  side  of  them,  the  water 
being  agitated  by  means  of  compressed  air.  When  the 
plates  of  ice  are  of  the  desired  thickness — say,  12  or  14 
inches — warm  brine  or  ammonia  is  pumped  through  the 
walls,  so  as  to  loosen  the  ice  and  permit  of  its  being 
withdrawn  from  the  tank.  Plate  ice  is  transparent,  and 
is  the  finest  quality  obtainable. 

Cold  Storage- — There  are  three  systems  in  use,  known 
as — (1)  The  brine  pipe  system;  (2)  the  direct  expansion 
pipe  system;  and  (3)  the  air  circulation  system. 

The  brine  pipe  system  may  be  used  with  advantage 
for  certain  purposes,  such  as  for  cooling,  fermenting  and 
storage  cellars  in  breweries,  bacon-curing  beds,  etc.  The 
pipes  are  placed  under  the  ceilings  and  sometimes  on  the 
walls  of  the  rooms  to  be  cooled,  and  cold  brine  from  a 


THE  CONTROL  OF  TEMPERATURE  209 

brine  refrigerator  is  pumped  through  them.  An  advantage 
of  the  brine  system  is  that  the  large  volume  of  cold  brine 
in  the  pipes  will  maintain  the  low  temperature  in  the 
rooms  for  a  considerable  time  after  the  refrigerating 
machine  has  stopped. 

The  direct  expansion  pipe  system  consists  in  placing 
the  ammonia  or  carbonic  acid  refrigerator  coils  directly 
in  the  cold  rooms,  these  coils  being  arranged  in  a  similar 
manner  to  the  pipes  in  the  brine  system.  The  refrigerat- 
ing agent  is  vaporized  in  these  coils,  thereby  reducing 
the  temperature  of  the  chamber. 

The  air  circulation  system  consists  in  circulating  a 
current  of  pure,  cold  dry  air  at  the  desired  temperature 
through  the  cold  rooms.  There  is  entire  absence  of  snow, 
moisture,  or  drip  in  the  rooms,  and  they  are  kept  dry 
and  free  from  smell.  The  apparatus  is  simple  and  less 
costly  than  the  brine  system,  and  owing  to  its  compact 
arrangement  much  larger  cooling  surfaces  are  obtainable, 
with  a  consequently  much  increased  efficiency.  The 
apparatus  being  external  to  the  rooms,  its  full  power 
can  be  applied  to  any  room  without  loss  of  efficiency, 
whereas  with  the  pipe  system  the  pipes  in  the  rooms  that 
are  not  being  cooled  are  useless. 

Lubrication  is  one  of  the  practical  difficulties  of  re- 
frigerating machinery,  and  great  care  should  be  exercised  in 
the  choice  of  a  suitable  lubricant.  The  condenser  coils 
of  every  machine  should  be  examined  at  least  once  every 
year,  and  should  the  slightest  sign  of  corrosion  or  pitting 
be  discovered  at  any  part  of  the  coil,  this  part  should  be 
carefully  cleaned  and  painted  with  two  coats  of  some 
reliable  bitumastic  solution  or  protective  paint. 

The  Absorption  System. — In  this  system  the  cooling 
effect  is  also  produced  by  the  evaporation  of  liquid 
ammonia,  but  the  cycle  of  operations  is  more  extensive. 

Aqueous  ammonia  is  boiled  by  means  of  steam-heated 
coils  in  a  still,  and  the  vapours  pass  upwards  through 
an  analyzing  column,  where  they  meet  a  descending 

14 


210  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

stream  of  strong  liquor  which  robs  them  of  some  of  their 
moisture.  The  vapours  pass  thence  to  a  dehydrator, 
where  complete  drying  is  effected,  and  the  ammonia 
passes  to  the  condenser  to  be  liquefied  and  used  for 
cooling  purposes.  The  expanded  gas  then  enters  an 
absorber  containing  weak  ammonia  solution,  which, 
when  strengthened,  flows  into  a  tank,  and  is  thence 
pumped  to  a  heat  exchanger,  where  it  is  raised  to  within 
30°  or  40°  F.  of  the  still  temperature.  It  is  then  dis- 
charged down  the  analyzer  into  the  still,  and  is  again 
boiled  and  the  cycle  of  operations  repeated. 


CHAPTER  VIII 
TRANSPORT 

THE  method  adopted  for  the  movement  of  material 
from  one  part  of  a  chemical  works  to  another  depends 
upon  the  nature  of  the  material,  whether  it  is  a  solid  or 
a  fluid.  Fluids  possess  inherent  advantages  for  trans- 
portation, and  it  may  be  stated,  in  a  general  way,  that 
the  development  of  the  methods  of  transporting  solids 
has  been  along  the  lines  of  obtaining  mechanical  fluidity. 
Conveying  Solids. — The  simplest,  least  efficient,  and 
most  common  method  adopted  for  the  conveying  of 
solids  takes  the  form  of  the  man-handled  wheelbarrow. 
A  barrow  weighs  from  60  to  70  pounds,  and  with  this  a 
man  can  move  about  J  ton  of  material  100  yards  per  hour 
over  a  level  or  slightly  inclined  surface .  The  proportion  of 
shovellers  to  wheelers  is  determined  by  the  nature  of  the 
particular  job,  but  it  may  be  taken  that  on  an  average 
a  man  can  wheel  a  barrow  having  a  capacity  of  2  cubic 
feet  about  200  feet  a  minute,  and  that  it  takes  from 
one  to  two  minutes  to  fill  the  barrow  and  about  the  same 
time  to  unload  it.  Barrows  weighing  up  to  250  pounds, 
and  having  a  capacity  of  9  cubic  feet,  are  sometimes  used, 
and  these  are  provided  with  two  wheels  as  a  rule.  Steel 
plate  ways  are  frequently  provided  to  ease  the  running 
and  to  save  the  track  when  much  barrow  work  is  done 
in  any  area. 

Tipping  Waggons.— For  dealing  with  heavy  loads  a 
more  efficient  method  is  to  use  light  four-wheeled  cars 
provided  with  tyres  suitable  for  running  on  steel  rails 
and  drawn  by  a  small  locomotive  or  electric  motor.  The 

211 


212  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

shape   of  the   cars  and   the   method  of   dumping   vary 
considerably,  but  the  commonest  forms  are  the  V-shaped 


FIG.  145. — SIDE-TIPPING  WAGGON. 

cars  tor  side  tipping,  as  shown  in  Fig.  145,  and  end-tipping 
cars,  of  which  a  sample  is  shown  in  Fig.  146. 


FIG.  146. — END  TIPPING  WAGGON. 


A  cheap  and  efficient  method  is  to  run  the  cars  on 
runways  or  overhead  rails  carrying  a  small  trolley, 
from  which  the  skip  or  bucket  is  suspended  by  means  of 


TRANSPORT 


213 


a  hook.     This  method,  which  is  illustrated  in  Fig.  147,  has 
a  very  wide  range  of  application. 

Aerial  Wire  Ropeways. — During  the  last  decade  there 
has  been  a  great  development  of  this  means  of  transport, 
and  there  is  a  constantly  increasing  field  of  employment 
for  these  ropeways,  which  are  now  designed  with  great 
efficiency  in  working,  combined  with  largely  reduced 
working  costs,  provided  that  care  be  exercised  in  adopting 
the  best  type  of  ropeway  for  any  given  duty. 


FIG.  147. — RUNWAY  FOR  MINE. 

To  give  an  account  of  this  system  even  in  outline 
would  take  up  more  space  than  is  available  at  the 
moment.  It  may  be  very  inadequately  described  as 
consisting  of  a  cable  or  wire  rope,  usually  endless,  whicli 
is  suspended  from  towers,  and  along  whicli  are  run 
carriages  to  which  skips  or  buckets  are  attached.  Fig.  148 
illustrates  the  sectional  portable  ropeway,  for  inter - 
works  traffic,  made  by  R.  White  and  Sons,  Widnes,  who 
are  specialists  in  aerial  wire  ropeways. 

Among  the  various  systems  of  aerial  ropeways  reference 
must  be  made  to  the  single  and  the  double  rope  system, 
the  former  in  which  the  single  rope  acts  both  as  the 


214  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

hauling  and  the  carrying  rope,  and  the  latter  where  one 
rope  does  the  hauling  and  the  other  the  carrying  of  the 
load. 


FIG.  148. — INTERWORKS  TRAFFIC:  PORTABLE  ROPEWAY. 

In  the  single-rope  system  an  endless  rope  passes  round 
a  grooved  driving  wheel  6  to  12  feet  in  diameter  at 
one  end,  and  at  the  other  end  round  a  similar  wheel 


TRANSPORT  215 

kept  up  by  a  tension  weight  so  that  a  constant  tension 
is  put  on  the  rope.  About  every  100  yards  the  wire  is 
supported  by  standards  with  cross -heads  having  four 
sheaves  on  the  loaded  side  and  two  sheaves  on  the  empty 
side.  These  sheaves  are  fixed  to  arms  pivoted  finally 
at  the  centre  of  the  cross -head  itself,  so  that  each  sheave 
as  it  receives  the  load  is  depressed  and  the  weight  of  the 
rope  is  distributed  over  the  other  three  sheaves.  This 
arrangement  can  be  clearly  seen  in  the  illustration  of 


FIG.  149. — STANDARD  FOR  SINGLE-ROPE  SYSTEM. 

one  of  the  standards  of  a  single-rope  installation  in 
Fig.  149.  Cars  are  attached  to  the  rope  by  means  of  a 
saddle,  of  which  there  are  many  types  designed  for  quick 
engaging  and  disengaging  and  for  maintaining  a  firm  grip 
on  inclines. 

This  type  of  ropeway  is  simple  and  efficient,  and 
for  straight  lines  with  easy  gradients  and  moderate 
loads  is  the  best  form,  as  it  requires  little  attention 
and  is  practically  fool-proof.  The  defects  are  that  it 


216  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

cannot  automatically  negotiate  horizontal  angles,  nor 
can  the  carriers  be  automatically  carried  round  the  return 
terminal,  from  the  outwards  to  the  return  rope. 

The  double -rope  system  has  been  greatly  developed 
to  deal  with  severe  gradients,  heavy  loads,  automatic 
angles,  automatic  tipping,  and  automatic  return  of  the 
carriers. 

In  this  system  two  separate  fixed  ropes  are  used, 
stretched  from  one  terminal  to  the  other,  and  supported 


FIG.  150. — STANDARD  FOR  DOUBLE-ROPE  SYSTEM. 

on  standards,  as  shown  in  Fig.  150,  placed  usually  from 
100  to  200  yards  apart.  One  end  of  each  rope  is  generally 
fixed,  whilst  the  other  is  led  over  guiding  sheaves  and 
terminates  in  a  heavy  tension  weight.  Saddles  are 
fixed  to  the  cross -heads  about  6  to  12  feet  apart,  each 
saddle  being  long  enough  to  support  2  to  3  feet  of  the 
rope,  which  lies  in  a  groove.  A  fixed  curved  rail  at  each 
terminal  connects  the  ends  of  the  fixed  ropes  and  com- 
pletes the  circuit.  The  carriers  travel  along  these 


TRANSPORT  217 

ropes  by  means  of  two  or  more  wheels  fixed  into  the 
head  of  the  carrier,  and  a  separate  and  lighter  rope  is 
used  to  haul  the  carriers  along.  This  haulage  rope  is 
driven  and  kept  tight  as  in  the  single  rope  system,  and  is 
supported  at  the  standards  by  rollers. 

Elevators. — The  bucket  elevator  is  the  machine 
commonly  used  when  it  is  desired  to  lift  material  any 
distance.  It  consists  of  a  number  of  buckets  fastened 
to  an  endless  belt  or  link  chain  which  passes  over  a  wheel 
in  the  hood  at  the  top  and  another  wheel  in  the  boot 
at  the  bottom.  Power  for  driving  is  applied  to  the  top 
wheel  in  order  to  keep  the  loaded  side  taut,  and  the 
whole  machine  is  lightly  boxed  in  with  wood  or  sheet 
metal  in  order  to  prevent  the  dispersal  of  dust.  Ac- 
cording to  the  nature  of  the  material  operated  upon, 
the  buckets  are  made  of  steel,  copper,  or  malleable  iron, 
and  may  be  perforated  to  admit  of  drainage  or  have  a 
toothed  edge  to  assist  in  raising  fibrous  materials.  For 
working  with  pasty  material  L-shaped  buckets  are 
the  best,  as  they  are  readily  emptied,  but  the  V-shaped 
bucket  is  more  commonly  used,  as  it  has  a  larger  capacity ; 
in  any  case  the  buckets  must  be  so  arranged  on  the 
chain  or  belt  that  at  a  given  speed  they  discharge  the 
whole  of  their  contents  by  centrifugal  force  as  they  go 
over  the  top  pulley.  The  material  is  discharged  through 
a  spout  in  the  hood,  and  the  machine  is  capable  of  being 
inclined  so  that  the  buckets  give  a  clean  discharge.  When 
the  material  to  be  lifted  is  in  small  particles  and  not  of 
a  wearing  nature,  webbing  or  leather  belts  are  used, 
to  which  the  sheet  steel  buckets  are  riveted.  Such 
machines  are  used  in  sizes  having  a  bucket  from  3  to  10 
inches  wide  with  an  internal  pulley  from  9  to  24  inches 
in  diameter,  driven  at  90  to  40  revolutions  per  minute 
When  the  material  is  in  a  rough  condition  a  link  chain, 
such  as  is  shown  in  Figs.  151  and  152,  is  used,  and  the 
machine  is  driven  at  a  slower  speed  than  is  the  cast  when 
webbing  or  leather  bands  can  be  used.  Some  form  of 


218  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 


tightening  device  is  located  at  either  end,  according  to 
whether  interference  with  the  feed  or  the  drive  is  of 
lesser  moment.  The  boot  is  usually  constructed  so  that 


TRANSPORT 


219 


Jj 
LL! 
UJ 

CO 


i/) 

LU 


o 

»  D 
-\CD 


(f)   - 

"1 
_i  g 

<  r 


2 


O 

D 
CD 


oc 
O 


220  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 


FIG.  153. — DUST-PROOF  ELEVATOR. 

the  buckets  can  fill  themselves  by  scraping  up  the 
material  as  they  travel  round  the  bottom  pulley,  but  it 
is  very  desirable  to  give  the  buckets  a  direct  and  positive 


TRANSPORT  221 

feed  when  practicable.  Owing  to  the  slow  speed,  it 
is  found  that  with  this  type  of  elevator  it  is  necessary 
to  give  it  a  considerable  inclination  in  order  to  get  a 
proper  discharge,  and  for  this  reason  the  gravity  type  of 
bucket  is  employed,  so  as  to  obtain  a  full  load. 


FIG.  154. — BOOT  FOR  ELEVATOR. 

Fig.  153  shows  a  view  of  a  dust-proof  elevator  made 
by  Edgar  Allen  and  Co.,  Ltd.,  Sheffield,  and  Figs.  154 
and  155  show  the  boot  and  hood  on  a  larger  scale. 

Conveyors. — These  machines  are  used  for  the  continuous 
transport  of  material,  and  are  of  various  types,  such  as 
worm,  scraper,  belt,  apron,  vibrating,  and  bucket,  to 
meet  the  need  of  transport  of  various  classes  of 
material. 


222  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

Worm  Conveyor. — The  worm  or  screw  conveyor  con- 
sists of  a  shaft  carrying  an  endless  screw  formed  by  bolting 
on  metal  nights.  It  rotates  in  a  trough  having  a  loose 
lid,  which  will  lift  in  case  the  material  as  it  is  carried  along 
should  accumulate  at  any  one  spot  and  cause  choking, 
which  would  damage  the  screw.  During  the  progress  of 
the  material  a  certain  amount  of  mixing  takes  place, 


FIG.  155. — HOOD  FOR  ELEVATOR. 


depending  upon  the  type  of  worm  employed,  the  selection 
of  which  will  be  regulated  by  the  nature  of  the  material 
conveyed.  In  some  cases  the  worm  is  made  of  separate 
blades  or  paddles  bolted  to  the  shaft,  or  a  continuous 
helix  is  made  up  of  cast-iron  sections  threaded  on. 
The  more  modern  form  consists  of  a  spiral  attached  to 
the  shaft  at  a  few  points,  as  shown  in  Fig.  156.  This 


TRANSPORT  223 

is  the  type  of  worm  employed  in  the  spiral  conveyor  shown 
in  Fig.  157,  made  by  the  above-mentioned  firm  in  all 
sizes  from  4  inches  to  24  inches  in  diameter,  and  for 
conveying  from  1  ton  to  200  tons  per  hour.  These 
machines  are  suitable  for  conveying  cements,  lime, 
chalk,  coal,  ores,  flour,  phosphates,  wheat,  barley,  seeds, 
sugar,  and  other  ground  material,  over  distances  up  to 
about  100  feet.  The  nature  of  the  material  transported 
determines  the  pitch,  which  on  an  average  is  about  half 
the  diameter  of  the  screw,  and  the  speed,  which  is  highest 
for  the  small  sizes,  which  are  driven  at  about  100  revolu- 
tions per  minute.  The  output  of  a  spiral  conveyor 
depends  upon  the  size  of  the  machine,  and  the  power 


FIG.  156. — SPIRAL  FOR  WORM  CONVEYOR. 

required  to  drive  is  obviously  a  function  of  the  length 
of  the  machine,  amount  of  the  output  in  unit  time,  the 
efficiency  of  the  worm,  and  the  coefficient  of  friction  of 
the  materials  used. 

There  are  various  other  types  of  screw  conveyors  having 
the  worm  fixed  to  the  inner  surface  of  the  cylinder,  which 
itself  revolves,  but  these  are  often  combined  with  sifters, 
mixers,  and  suchlike  machines,  which  have  already  been 
dealt  with. 

Scraper  Conveyor. — In  this  type  of  machine,  also  known 
as  a  drag  or  flight  conveyor,  the  material  is  pushed  along 
by  means  of  scrapers  fixed  to  an  endless  rope  or  chain. 
In  this  simple  form  it  finds  many  applications  in  factories 
where  sludges  have  to  be  transported  which  would 


TRANSPORT 


225 


rapidly  settle  and  choke  a  trough  through  which  they 
flow. 

A  typical  scraper  conveyor  is  the  suspended  draw 
type,  which  consists  of  a  trough  along  which  the  material 
is  dragged  by  flights  attached  to  cross-bars  fitted  with 
shoes  at  the  ends  for  sliding  on  iron  tracks  at  each  side. 
By  this  means  lateral  motion  is  prevented  and  the  scrapers 
given  the  necessary  clearance  from  the  sides  and  bottom 
of  the  trough.  Fig.  158  illustrates  this  type  as  made  by 
Pott,  Cassels  and  Williamson,  Motherwell. 


FIG.  158. — SCRAPER  CONVEYOR. 

In  another  type  of  machine  the  wearing  shoes  are 
replaced  by  rollers,  which  also  serve  to  give  the  necessary 
clearances  and  to  reduce  friction. 

A  form  of  scraper  known  as  a  mechanical  raker  is 
used  for  removing  salt  crystals  as  they  are  formed  during 
evaporation  in  large  pans.  It  consists  of  a  framework 
suitably  braced,  and  supported  on  both  sides  by  sliding 
shoes  on  tracks  provided  for  that  purpose.  On  this 
framework,  feathering  blades  are  placed  at  intervals  of 
about  8  feet,  and  the  whole  is  given  a  to-and-fro  move- 

15 


226  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

ment  of  about  9  feet,  so  that  there  is  about  1  foot  of 
overlap  in  the  travel  of  the  blades.  The  engine  used 
has  a  cylinder  of  about  8  inches  diameter,  and  with  a 
9-foot  stroke,  which  it  makes  about  every  two  minutes, 
thus  bringing  up  a  load  every  four  or  five  minutes. 

Belt  Conveyor. — The  belt  or  band  conveyor  forms 
a  very  efficient  means  of  transportation,  for  it  can  be 
erected  in  almost  any  position,  and  there  is  a  great  saving 
in  power  over  that  required  for  worm  conveyors  for  large 
quantities  over  long  distances . 

It  consists  of  endless  belts  of  rubber  (rubber -coated 
cotton  duck),  cotton,  or  metal  (wire  mesh,  etc.),  which 
may  be  flat  or  troughed,  supported  at  intervals  on  rollers, 
and  motion  is  imparted  by  a  head  pulley  and  the  slack 
taken  up  by  a  foot  pulley. 

Although  these  machines  were  originally  used  for  light 
materials,  they  are  now  adapted  for  heavy  work,  and  for 
this  purpose  the  rubber  belt  is  designed  for  rough  usage, 
whereas  the  cotton  belt  is  more  often  used  for  carrying 
boxes  and  packages.  The  capacity  of  a  belt  conveyor  is 
determined  by  its  width,  which  is  usually  from  10  to  20 
inches,  and  its  speed,  a  troughed  belt  being  capable 
of  transporting  two  or  three  times  that  of  a  flat  belt. 
Fig.  159  shows  the  rollers  for  a  three-pulley  belt  carrier 
made  by  Edgar  Allen  and  Co.,  the  upper  rollers  on  the 
loaded  side  making  the  belt  into  a  trough,  and  the  lower 
roller  supporting  the  belt  on  the  unloaded  side.  In  the 
ordinary  way  the  material  is  discharged  over  the  head 
pulley  by  centrifugal  force,  but  very  often  it  is  required  to 
tap  off  the  material  at  some  intermediate  spot.  This 
function  is  performed  by  a  travelling  throw-off  carriage 
such  as  is  shown  in  Fig.  160,  which  makes  an  S-bend 
in  the  belt,  so  that  the  material  is  delivered  over  the  top 
pulley  into  a  hopper  placed  alongside.  With  such  an 
arrangement  it  is  necessary  to  keep  the  proper  tension 
on  the  belt,  and  this  is  usually  effected  in  the  ordinary 
way  of  running  the  belt  round  a  weighted  pulley  on  the 


TRANSPORT 


227 


228    INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 


TRANSPORT 


229 


unloaded  side.  Material  is  fed  to  the  belt  by  means 
of  a  shoot,  which  is  so  adjusted  that  there  is  the  minimum 
relative  motion  between  the  material  and  the  belt  at  the 
point  of  feed,  thus  reducing  the  wear  on  the  belt. 

Apron  Conveyor. — This  machine,  which  is  largely  used 
for  handling  light  packages,  consists  of  light  slips  of 
wood  or  metal  attached  to  link  chains.  An  ordinary  type 
of  conveyor  will  not  work  satisfactorily  at  a  greater 
inclination  than  about  25°;  hence  there  are  many 
modifications  of  the  belt  to  enable  greater  elevations 


FIG.  161. — ELEVATOR  AND  CONVEYOR. 

to  be  used.  For  packages  and  such-like  the  belt  may  be 
provided  with  raised  crossbars  which  prevent  any  back- 
slip  or  tendency  to  overturn. 

Fig.  161  shows  a  conveyor  and  elevator  made  by 
R.  White  and  Sons,  Widnes. 

Fig.  162  shows  a  slat-conveyor  made  by  Pott,  Cassel, 
and  Williamson. 

A  modification  of  the  belt  conveyor  is  becoming  familiar 
to  most  people  in  the  form  of  the  moving  staircase, 
which  is  installed  in  railway  stations  and  other  places. 

Bucket  Conveyor. — Sometimes  it  is  necessary  to  trans- 
port material  which  from  its  rough  or  heated  nature  is 


230  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 


unsuitable  for  the  belt  conveyor.  For  such  purposes 
the  bucket  conveyor  is  used,  and  it  consists  of  buckets 
carried  on  rollers  and  joined  together  by  a  roller  chain. 


TRANSPORT  231 

Shaking  Conveyors. — These  machines  have  already  been 
dealt  with  under  the  heading  of  shaking  sifters. 

There  are  various  modifications  of  these  machines, 
but  the  underlying  principles  are  the  same.  They  require 
considerably  more  power  than  belt  conveyors,  but  this 
is  somewhat  compensated  by  balancing  one  shaking 
conveyor  against  another,  thus  securing  a  comparatively 
smooth  action. 

Fig.  163  shows  the  grasshopper  conveyor  made  by 
this  same  firm. 

Conveying  Liquids. — liquids  are  transported  from  one 
place  to  another  through  pipes  under  the  action  of 
gravity — that  is,  by  maintaining  a  certain  head  of  liquid. 
Apart  from  the  means  used  to  obtain  a  head  of  the  liquid, 
the  main  problem  in  a  chemical  works  consists  of  selecting 
a  pipe  which  will  remain  more  or  less  unaffected  by 
the  liquids  which  flow  through  it. 

For  conveying  water,  pipes  are  used  made  of  wrought 
iron,  plain  or  galvanized,  cast  iron,  lead,  copper,  tin, 
alloys,  and  ebonite.  Earthenware  and  cement  pipes  are 
commonly  used  for  waste  liquids  of  all  kinds.  For  dilute 
acids,  organic  acids,  beer,  and  vinegar,  wrooden  pipes 
made  of  staves  held  together  by  metal  bands  are  widely 
used.  Lead  pipes  are  useful  for  resisting  corrosion,  but 
they  are  not  satisfactory  under  heat  or  pressure,  so  that 
lead-lined  iron  pipes  are  frequently  employed. 

Tin  pipes  are  used  for  conveying  liquids  which  are 
used  in  food  or  for  drinking  purposes,  but  a  cheaper 
article  is  produced  by  tinning  a  copper  or  iron  pipe. 
Copper  and  brass  pipes  have  as  wide  an  application  as 
any  material  used  in  the  construction  of  pipes. 

The  conveying  of  strong  acids  and  other  chemically 
active  liquids  is  a  problem  to  the  solution  of  which 
there  have  been  many  attempts.  Silicon  compounds,  in 
the  form  of  iron  alloys  or  ceramic  materials,  form  the 
bulk  of  the  acid-resisting  substances  which  are  placed 
on  the  market  under  various  trade  names,  such  as  Ironac, 


232  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 


Tantiron,  Vitreosil,  Vitreon,  Ceratherm,  and  Vitresoate 
stoneware,  and  intended  to  replace  the  regulus  metal 
which  has  been  so  commonly  used. 


TRANSPORT  233 

Tantiron  is  the  name  given  to  a  ferro -silicon  alloy 
manufactured  by  the  Lennox  Foundry  Company,  Ltd., 
London.  It  is  a  hard,  close-grained,  silvery  white  alloy, 
melting  at  about  1,200°C.,  which  does  not  rust  or 
oxidize,  nor  is  it  attacked  by  ordinary  corrosives  to  any 
extent.  It  can  be  treated  exactly  like  cast  iron,  and 
castings  varying  from  a  few  ounces  to  many  tons  in 
weight  can  be  made  with  equal  ease.  It  differs  from  other 
non-corrosive  alloys  in  that  its  resistance  to  corrosion  is 
general  and  not  specific.  Muntz  metal,  for  instance, 
is  not  attacked  by  sea  water,  and  nickel  alloys  do  not 
rust,  but  all  such  metals  are  easily  attacked  by  acids. 
Again,  truly  non-corrosive  bodies  such  as  carbides  are 
quite  unfitted  for  the  manufacture  of  plant,  as  they 
cannot  be  cast  in  the  foundry  nor  be  machined.  Although 
in  the  earlier  stages  Tantiron  was  found  difficult  to 
machine,  and  all  finished  surfaces  had  to  be  ground  from 
the  rough  casting,  it  can  now  be  drilled,  turned,  planed, 
or  screwed,  and  still  retains  its  non-corrosive  properties. 
By  immersing  weighed  samples  of  Tantiron  in  different 
corrosive  liquids  for  periods  of  one  to  three  days,  and 
carefully  weighing  the  washed  and  brushed  samples  at 
intervals,  the  table  on  p.  234  of  corrosive  actions,  giving 
percentage  loss,  has  been  obtained. 

As  regards  physical  properties  it  has  been  found,  as  a 
result  of  many  experiments  carefully  conducted,  to 
possess  practically  twice  the  thermal  conductivity  of 
lead  and  four  to  five  that  of  stoneware  or  quartz — an 
immense  gain  in  either  heating  or  cooling  fluids.  Its 
hardness  is  some  fifteen  times  that  of  regulus  metal, 
which,  together  with  its  lower  density,  allows  lighter 
and  more  practical  apparatus  to  be  designed  than  is 
possible  in  the  case  of  lead-antimony  alloys. 

Tantiron  has  been  used  in  the  manufacture  of  nitric 
acid  and  sulphuric  acid  plants,  acid  pumps,  cocks, 
valves,  pipes,  fittings,  and  various  vessels  required  to 
withstand  exposure  to  corrosive  materials. 


234  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 


First 
24  Hours. 

Second 
24  Hours. 

Third 
24  Hours. 

Sulphuric  acid  98  per  cent. 

0-10 

0-02 

0-02 

„  30 

0-07 

nil 

nil 

Nitric  acid  1-4  sp.  gr. 

0-03 

0-01 

nil 

„  1-1       ,, 

0-01 

nil 

nil 

Acetic  acid  60  per  cent. 

0-03 

0-01 

nil 

Chromic  acid  10     ,, 

0-07 

nil 

nil 

Tartaric  acid  25     ,, 

0-05 

0-03 

0-03 

Iodine,  saturated  solution 

nil 

nil 

nil 

Bromine  water,  saturated 

0-01              0-01 

nil 

Bleaching      powder,     saturated 

solution 

0-04 

0-01 

0-01 

Copper  sulphate,  acid    .  . 

nil 

nil 

nil 

,,             ,,          alkaline 

nil 

nil 

nil 

Ferric  sulphate  solution 

0-06 

nil 

nil 

Zinc  chloride  30  per  cent. 

0-03 

nil 

nil 

Ammonium  chloride  solution  .  . 

0-05 

0-02             0-01 

Fused  sulphur 

0-06 

0-01 

nil 

Fused  ammonium  nitrate 

nil 

nil                nil 

The  following  physical  constants,  contrasted  with 
those  of  cast  iron,  will  be  of  use  to  the  designer  of  plant 
where  a  non-corrosive  metal  is  required. 


Cast  Iron.              Tantiron. 

Density      

7-3 

6-8 

Tensile  strength,  tons  per  square 

inch 

9  to  10 

6  to  7 

Transverse   strength,    12  inch  x 

1  inch  bars 

2,500  pounds       1,600  pounds 

Crushing,  1-inch  cubes    .  .          .  .    40  tons                 34  tons 

Melting-point 

1,150°C. 

1.200°  C. 

Hardness 

1 

1-6 

Thermal  conductivity 

10 

8 

Electrical  resistance 

8 

10 

Corrosion  resistance 

1 

1,000 

Contraction  allowance  in  casting 

|  inch   per 

Jg    inch    per 

foot 

foot 

Ironac  is  a  similar  product  manufactured  by  Houghton's 
Patent   Metallic    Packing   Co.,    Ltd.,    London,   which    is 


TRANSPORT  235 

chiefly  used  in  the  construction  of  special  types  of  nitric 
acid  and  sulphuric  acid  plants.  It  resists  the  action  of 
nitric  acid  and  sulphuric  acid  of  all  densities,  and  has 
sufficient  strength,  both  tensile  and  transverse,  to  with- 
stand the  necessary  handling  to  which  such  plants  are 
subjected,  and  it  will  resist  varying  changes  of  tempera- 
ture. The  conductivity  of  this  material  is  nearly  twenty 
times  that  of  pottery  and  similar  material,  and  conse- 
quently tubes  may  be  made  quite  thin  in  section  and 
cooling  effected  very  rapidly  where  required. 

Owing  to  the  increased  efficiency  thus  gained,  a  very 
great  saving  in  space  is  effected  as  compared  with  that 
required  for  the  old-type  pottery  installations. 

Vitreon  ware  is  made  by  Shanks  and  Co.,  Barrhead, 
Scotland.  It  is  a  pure  white,  dense  body,  vitreous 
throughout,  homogeneous  in  texture,  and  free  from 
laminations  and  from  iron.  It  can  be  used  unglazed, 
as  it  is  vitreous  throughout,  and  has  therefore  a  very  low 
absorption.  It  resists  the  action  of  heat  and  chemicals 
equally  as  well  as  Berlin  porcelain,  but  it  has  a  very 
much  greater  strength.  Its  compression  strength  is 
24  tons  to  the  square  inch,  and  its  tensile  strength, 
calculated  by  the  Nielsen  and  Garrow  formula,  is  more 
than  1,800  pounds  per  square  inch,  as  against  842  pounds 
for  the  best  German  stoneware.  A  2-inch  diameter  pipe 
with  J-inch  walls  has  successfully  withstood  a  test 
pressure  of  900  pounds  per  square  inch  of  internal 
pressure.  Pipes  of  all  sizes  are  made,  those  of  6  inches 
diameter  being  6  feet  long  and  small  bores  up  to  9  feet 
in  length.  Owing  to  the  hardness  and  fine  texture  of 
the  material,  a  fine  surface  can  be  obtained  by  grinding, 
so  that  it  can  be  used  for  the  manufacture  of  acid  taps 
of  all  descriptions. 

Vitreosil  is  a  pure  fused  silica  made  by  the  Thermal 
Syndicate,  Ltd.,  Wallsend-on-Tyne,  and  used  for  the 
construction  of  all  kinds  of  appliances  used  in  the  acid 
industries. 


236  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

It  has  great  resisting  powers  to  high  temperatures  and 
the  action  of  chemicals,  and  is  readily  made  into  all 
kinds  of  pipes,  basins,  stills,  etc. 

Ceratherm  is  an  earthenware  composition  made  by 
Guthrie  and  Co.,  Accrington,  and  used  for  the  con- 
struction of  all  kinds  of  chemical  machinery.  It  is  un- 
affected in  the  slightest  degree  by  corrosive  liquids,  and, 
unlike  porcelain  and  earthenware,  sudden  changes  of 
temperature  will  not  crack  it.  This  material  has  a  much 
higher  thermal  conductivity  than  porcelain  or  stoneware, 
and  even  violent  variations  of  temperature  do  not  crack 
it,  also  it  can  be  made  of  considerable  strength  without 
showing  the  brittle  nature  of  porcelain.  Its  specific 
gravity  is  about  one -third  that  of  cast  iron,  and  it  has  an 
exceedingly  high  thermal  conductivity  and  emissivity, 
and  by  using  a  special  cement  it  can  be  used  for  lining 
iron  vessels  where  great  strength  is  required. 

Vitreosate  is  another  earthenware  composition  made 
by  the  same  firm,  and  largely  used  for  lining  iron  pipes 
and  acid  cocks. 

Elevating  Liquids. — Liquids  are  elevated  by  the  direct 
action  of  a  plunger  pump,  centrifugal  pump,  pulsometer, 
or  hydraulic  ram,  constructed  of  non-corrosive  material, 
or  indirectly  by  the  use  of  compressed  air  in  the  acid  egg 
system  and  the  Pohle  air  lift  system. 

The  Acid  Egg. — This  apparatus  is  almost  universally 
used  for  lifting  strongly  corrosive  liquids,  despite  the 
fact  of  its  low  efficiency  and  the  labours  of  chemical 
engineers  to  perfect  automatic  elevators.  Its  simplicity 
is  a  great  point  in  its  favour,  but  its  limitation  up  to  the 
present  has  been  its  corrodibility  if  made  of  iron  or  steel, 
and  its  weakness  if  made  of  earthenware  or  similar  non- 
corrodible  substances. 

Fig.  164  is  an  illustration  of  an  acid  egg,  as  made 
by  The  Lennox  Foundry  Co.,  in  Tantiron,  and  is  formed 
of  two  cups  joined  by  their  top  flanges  to  form  a  horizontal 
cylinder  with  hemispherical  ends.  These  eggs  are  filled 


TRANSPORT 


237 


with  the  liquid  through  a  pipe  which  contains  a  check 
valve  to  prevent  its  return,  and  air  is  pumped  in  through 
a  second  pipe  having  an  automatic  or  manually  operated 
valve.  The  liquid  is  then  forced  out  through  a  third  pipe 
which  goes  to  the  bottom  of  the  egg,  and  at  each  discharge 
the  liquid  is  followed  by  a  rush  of  the  air  used  for  raising 
the  liquid  and  so  becomes  wasted.  Various  devices  for 


FIG.  164. — TANTIRON  ACID  EGG. 

automatically  charging  and  discharging  the  eggs  have 
been  made  and  successfully  put  into  operation  at  acid 
plants  throughout  the  world. 

The  Air  Lift  or  Pohle  System. — In  this  system  air  under 
pressure  is  forced  down,  a  pipe  within  the  tubing  of  a  well 
containing  the  liquid.  The  air  is  broken  up  into  small 
bubbles,  which  rise  up  the  tube,  accompanied  by  a 
certain  amount  of  the  liquid,  which  is  discharged  at  the 


238  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

top  in  a  steady  stream.  In  this  system  the  air  escapes, 
but  the  amount  required  is  only  about  half  that  con- 
sumed in  the  working  of  an  acid  egg.  The  successful 
working  of  these  pumps  demands  considerable  practical 
experience,  but  in  general  the  deeper  the  submersion 
of  the  air  pipe,  the  higher  the  air  pressure,  and  consequent 
greater  efficiency,  which  also  increases  with  increase  of 
temperature  of  the  liquid  pumped.  The  absence  of  moving 
parts  and  the  freedom  from  wear  makes  this  pump 
compare  very  favourably  with  positive-acting  steam 
pumps,  which  suffer  from  corrosion,  except  in  the  case  of 
low  lifts  of  75  feet  and  under,  when  the  centrifugal  pump 
is  probably  more  economical. 

For  practical  working  it  is  found  that  the  velocity 
of  the  air  should  not  exceed  20  feet  per  second,  that  the 
submersion  should  be  about  1*5  times  the  lift,  measured 
from  the  working  water  level,  and  the  cross-sections 
of  the  air  tube  and  the  rising  tube  should  be  in  the  ratio 
of  1  to  6-25.  As  a  rough  estimate  it  takes  1  cubic  foot 
of  air  to  raise  1  gallon  of  water,  but  this  amount  of  air 
can  be  considerably  decreased  in  the  case  of  an  efficient 
pump.  The  average  air  pressure  used  is  60  pounds  per 
square  inch,  and  at  the  commencement  of  operations, 
owing  to  the  unbroken  column  of  liquid  in  the  tube,  a 
larger  pressure  is  required  than  is  subsequently  needed  for 
steady  working. 

Plunger  Pumps. — These  pumps  exist  in  all  forms  and 
sizes,  and  are  too  well  known  to  need  any  description 
here.  In  the  design  of  these  pumps  for  chemical  work 
care  should  be  taken  to  render  all  valves  easily  ac- 
cessible and  to  proportion  each  part  to  withstand  rough 
usage. 

Fig.  165  shows  a  standard  horizontal  pump  made  of 
Tantiron  by  the  Lennox  Foundry  Co.  specially  for  acid 
work.  It  is  a  single-acting  ram  pump  with  a  ram  2  inches 
in  diameter  and  6  inches  stroke,  and  when  run  at  80 
revolutions  per  minute  has  a  capacity  of  about  280 


TRANSPORT 


239 


gallons  per  hour.  The  diameters  of  the  suction  and 
delivery  pipes  are  each  lj  inches. 

Fig.  166  shows  a  Tantiron  standard  vertical  pump 
made  for  the  same  duties  as  the  horizontal  pump,  the 
dimensions  of  the  cylinder  and  pipes  being  exactly  the 
same. 

This  type  of  pump  is  also  largely  used  for  pumping 
wort,  molasses,  sugar  juice,  oil,  glue,  varnish,  and  other 
thick  liquids.  In  the  case  of  liquids  of  heavy  density  or 


FIG.  165. — TANTIRON  HORIZONTAL  PUMP. 

of  a  sticky  nature  the  output  of  such  pumps  is  somewhat 
reduced,  and  for  such  cases  it  is  advisable  to  have  large 
pipe  connections,  the  suction  and  delivery  pipes  being  of 
the  same  diameter  as  the  pump  barrel. 

Centrifugal  Pumps. — The  moving  of  highly  corrosive 
liquids  is  principally  effected  by  compressed  air,  but  this 
method  is  being  seriously  threatened  by  the  latest  types 
of  centrifugal  pumps.  The  manufacture  of  centrifugal 
pumps  for  this  purpose,  however,  raises  a  variety  of  very 
complicated  questions,  and  that  is  the  reason  why  the 


240  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

development  in  this  direction  has  been  so  slow.  Lead  and 
regulus  metal  have  been  used  for  strong  sulphuric  acid, 
but  are  not  satisfactory  for  weak  acid,  and  quite  useless 
for  nitric  and  hydrochloric  acids  or  sulphuric  acid  con- 
taining certain  common  impurities.  In  addition,  all 


,  FIG.  166. — TANTIRON  VERTICAL  PUMP. 

metal  pumps  are  unsuitable  for  many  chemicals  and  for 
a  large  range  of  solutions  of  metallic  salts.  For  example, 
an  iron  pump  could  not  be  used  for  a  solution  of  chloride 
of  copper.  Pumps  made  from  ferro -silicon  alloys  are  not 
satisfactory  when  organic  acids  are  used,  and  the  brittle- 


TRANSPORT 


241 


ness  of  the  alloy  and  the  difficulty  in  making  suitable 
castings  have  prevented  its  development  as  a  material 
of  which  to  make  pumps . 

It  is  out  of  the  question  to  use  enamelled  iron  for  making 
pumps,  however  good  the  enamel  may  be,  as  the  enamel, 
in  all  probability,  will  be  scratched  off  the  impeller  or 
the  casing.  In  fact,  for  a  number  of  corrosive  liquids  no 
metallic  substance  is  a  suitable  material  from  which  to 
make  the  centrifugal  pump,  as  at  every  revolution  of  the 
impeller  the  casing  and  impeller  are  washed  by  the 


FIG.  16 T. — CERATHERM  BODY  IN  IRON  CASTING. 

contained  liquid.  Porcelain  is  inert,  but  is  not  suitable 
for  the  preparation  of  pumps  because  of  its  brittle  nature. 
Stoneware  pumps  have  been  produced,  but  they  have  the 
disadvantage  that  if  used  with  boiling  liquids  they  are  liable 
to  crack.  They  are  also  very  fragile,  and  are  hardly 
safe  to  use  above  30  pounds  pressure  or  40  feet  acid 
head.  • 

Cera  therm  is  the  material  used  by  Guthrie  and  Co., 
Accrington,  as  the  basis  for  the  construction  of  centri- 
fugal pumps  of  all  kinds. 

Taking  first  of  all  the  case  where  only  low  lifts  are 
required  and  small  pumps,  a  thin  casing  of  Ceratherm 

16 


242  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 


FIG.  168. — CERATHERM  IMPELLER. 


i 


FIG.  169. — CERATHERM  PUMP:  INTERIOR 


TRANSPORT 


243 


is  set  into  an  outer  casing  of  cast  iron  by  means  of  an 
acid-resisting  cement,  which  will  withstand  continued 
treatment  with  nitric  acid,  and  affixes  the  lining  to  the 
casing  in  a  permanent  fashion,  as  shown  in  Fig.  167. 

Fig.  168  shows  an  impeller  screwed  on  to  a  steel  shaft 
which  is  protected  by  a  Cera  therm  boss,  after  which  the 
Cera  therm  is  machined  and  ground  accurately.  Fig.  169 
shows  the  interior  of  a  pump  where  the  liquids  passing 
through  only  meet  the  Ceratheim  and  do  not  touch 


FIG.  170. — CERATHERM  PUMP:  SMALL  SIZE. 

any  metal,  and  in  Fig.  170  the  complete  pump  is 
shown.  These  pumps  are  suitable  for  a  number  of 
purposes,  and  will  handle  20  to  100  gallons  per  minute 
to  a  head  of  15  to  20  feet  without  trouble,  and  they  are 
not  affected  by  boiling  corrosive  liquids.  Stronger 
pumps  are  made  by  using  a  Ceratherm  lining  up  to  2f 
inches  in  thickness. 

No  matter  how  generous  the  stuffing  box  of  an  acid 
centrifugal  pump  may  be,  it  is  most  desirable  that  the  acid 
at  this  point  should  not  be  under  pressure  but  rather 
under  suction,  so  as  to  avoid  leaks  with  high  heads, 


244  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 


H.!' 


FIG.  171.— CERATHERM  PUMP:  SUCTION  SIDE  INTERIOR. 


FIG.  172.— CERATHERM  PUMP:  PRESSURE  SIDE  INTERIOR. 


TRANSPORT  245 

especially  in  the  case  of  liquids  of  high  specific  gravity. 
Fig.  171  shows  the  interior  of  the  suction  side  of  the 
pump  containing  the  feed  chamber,  inlet,  and  race,  and 
Fig.  172  shows  the  pressure  side  of  the  pump  containing 
the  race. 

The  Ceratherm  impellers  are  tested  by  running  to  about 
3,000  revolutions,  and  as  the  pumps  are  designed  in  such 
a  way  as  to  give  the  desired  head  at  about  1,000  revolu- 
tions, it  will  be  seen  that  the  safety  factors  in  these  pumps 
are  high.  The  factors  are  based  on  a  calculation  of  the 
tensile  strength,  and  are  probably  somewhere  in  the 
neighbourhood  of  14  to  15.  The  distribution  of  thrust 
in  a  pump  of  this  description  is  quite  different  from  that 
of  the  normal  centrifugal  pump,  and  this  is  catered  for 
by  the  strong  casing.  It  is  clear  from  the  above  that 
the  thicknesses  of  the  material  found  to  be  desirable 
lead  to  certain  modifications  in  the  feed  and  in  the  design 
of  the  impellers,  but  by  careful  experimentation  thoroughly 
efficient  combinations  have  been  attained.  The  mechani- 
cal efficiency  of  these  pumps  is  much  higher  than  that 
of  their  only  possible  competitor  in  most  cases — namely, 
the  compressed  air  system.  It  is  not  so  high  as  that 
attained  in  metallic  pumps,  for  certain  definite  reasons— 
for  instance,  75  per  cent,  efficiency  in  a  metallic  pump 
is  quite  easy  to  attain,  given  sufficient  quantity.  In  the 
armoured  Ceratherm  pump  a  small  amount  of  horse- 
power is  deliberately  spent  in  preventing  the  pump  from 
leaking  at  the  gland,  in  doing  away  with  troublesome 
stuffing  boxes,  and  permitting  such  contrivances  as  will 
avoid  any  rubbing  surfaces  or  bearings  within  the 
chemicals.  It  is  fatal  practice  in  chemical  pumps  to 
have  bearings  running  in  acids,  as  this  soon  causes  the 
pump  to  be  scrapped. 

According  to  De  Laval,  until  recently  40  per  cent,  was 
considered  the  highest  efficiency  for  a  metal  centrifugal 
pump  of  ordinary  volute  type,  and  for  the  quantities 
which  are  generally  dealt  with  in  the  chemical  practice — 


246  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

namely,  below  250  gallons  per  minute — 55  per  cent,  is  as 
high  efficiency  as  can  be  attained.  It  is  only  when 
quantities  reach  the  neighbourhood  of  500  to  600  gallons 
per  minute  that  efficiency  can  be  attained  up  to  70 
to  75  per  cent.  For  practical  purposes  these  pumps 
are  at  least  three  times  as  efficient  as  the  compressed 
air  system,  and  are  greatly  superior  to  metallic  pumps 
which  lose  their  efficiency  owing  to  rapid  corrosion.  It 
will  be  noticed  that  only  single-stage  impellers  are  used, 
as  it  has  been  found  that  for  corrosive  liquids,  one -stage 
pumps  with  very  large  impellers,  which  at  low  revolu- 
tions will  give  the  head  required  in  chemical  practice, 
will  give  the  best  results. 

These  pumps  are  used  in  bleaching  and  dyeing  works 
where  chemicals  must  be  circulated  without  any  impurity 
being  yielded  to  the  liquors;  in  acid  factories;  for  the 
circulation  of  weak  acid  in  nitric  towers;  for  improved 
methods  of  absorbing  hydrochloric  acid;  for  electro- 
chemical purposes,  in  the  wool  carbonizing  trade,  the 
dope  trade,  and  the  fermentation  industries. 

To  maintain  freedom  from  corrosion  in  the  plant 
actuated  by  these  pumps,  armoured  Vitreosate  piping, 
another  form  of  earthenware,  is  used,  and  armoured 
Vitreosate  acid  cocks,  of  which  latter  a  sample  is  shown 
in  Fig.  173. 

Conveying  Gases. — The  gases  which  are  met  with  in  the 
chemical  industry  may  be  classified  as — (1)  Those  which 
are  circulated  because  they  are  valuable,  and  (2)  those 
which  are  exhausted  into  the  air  because  at  present  they 
are  of  no  value.  Transportation  is  effected  through 
pipes  which  are  of  various  materials,  such  as  iron,  in  the 
cast,  wrought,  galvanized,  or  sheet  form,  copper,  and 
for  large  pipes  or  flues,  bricks,  concrete,  and  similar 
materials  are  used. 

A  chimney  is  the  simplest  means  of  exhausting  waste 
gases  to  the  atmosphere  and  at  the  same  time  providing 
a  draught  for  promoting  the  combustion  of  fuel,  but  it 


TRANSPORT  247 

may  be  confidently  expected  that  the  future  will  see 
the  abolition  of  chimneys  and  the  economical  use  of 
present  waste  gases — a  subject  up  to  the  present  sadly 
neglected.  For  the  removal  of  noxious  gases  the  size  of 
the  chimney  is  more  important  than  height,  which  latter 
is  of  importance  for  draught,  a  height  of  400  feet  giving  a 
draught  pressure  equal  to  about  2J  inches  of  water. 

For  low  pressures  and  rarefactions,  fans  and  blowers 
are  used,  and  for  high  pressures  and  rarefactions  com- 
pressors and  vacuum  pumps  are  employed. 


FIG.  173. — VITREOSATE  THREE-WAY  TAP. 

Fans. — These  consist  of  a  number  of  blades  fixed  on  a 
rapidly  revolving  shaft,  the  design  of  the  impeller  and 
casing  depending  upon  the  nature  of  the  work  to  be  done. 
For  large  volumes  of  air  up  to  4  inches  water  pressure 
shallow  blades  are  required;  for  pressures  up  to  10  inches 
side  plates  are  provided  and  the  blades  are  deeper ;  up  to 
15  inches  the  wheel  is  narrower  and  deeper  and  the 
scroll  casing  has  to  be  carefully  designed;  high -pressure 
fans  for  cupolas,  etc.,  are  provided  with  a  greater  number 
of  blades. 

For  hot  or  corrosive  gases  a  water-cooled  steel  fan 


248  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

may  be  employed,  or  the  fan  may  be  made  of  regulus 
metal  or  stoneware. 

For  supplying  the  air  to  a  producer -gas  apparatus 
the  radial-flow  fan  is  frequently  employed.  It  consists 
of  a  shaft  carrying  a  spider  of  six  T-iron  arms,  each  having 
a  sheet-iron  paddle  with  annular  discs  riveted  at  the 
sides.  The  paddle  has  a  radial  direction  at  the  inlet, 
but  is  curved  back  at  the  tip  at  an  angle  of  about  50 
degrees.  The  side  clearance  of  the  impeller  is  about 
f%  inch,  and  the  tip  clearance  varies  from  3  inches  at 
the  beak  to  12  inches  at  the  discharge  orifice.  A  vortex 
chamber  is  provided  for  by  the  eccentric  setting  of  the 
impeller  in  the  casing. 

For  large  and  varying  volumes  of  gases  these  fans  are 
particularly  useful,  and  in  spite  of  losses  due  to  eddy 
currents  and  other  causes  they  have  an  efficiency  of 
from  50  to  70  per  cent. 

For  circulating  large  volumes  of  gases  at  comparatively 
high  pressures  a  mixed-flow  fan,  where  the  inlet  flow  is 
axial  and  the  outlet  flow  radial,  such  as  in  the  Rateau 
fan,  has  come  into  common  use.  The  shaft  of  the  im- 
peller has  a  conical  boss  on  which  are  riveted  up  to  twenty- 
four  specially  designed  blades  having  an  angle  at  the 
tip  of  about  45  degrees  opposite  to  the  direction  of 
rotation,  and  the  vortex  chamber  is  of  rectangular  cross- 
section.  Delivery  is  taken  from  the  now  usual  conical- 
shaped  funnel,  and  the  bearings  are  of  the  high-speed 
type,  while  carbon  rings  are  provided  to  prevent  leakage 
at  the  impeller.  This  type  of  fan  has  a  much  higher 
efficiency  than  the  radial -flow  type,  and  with  a  single 
impeller  can  maintain  a  head  of  from  35  to  40  inches 
of  water,  so  that  by  using  several  impellers,  through 
which  the  gas  passes  in  series,  large  volumes  may  be 
passed  against  high  heads. 

When  a  centrifugal  fan  is  run  at  constant  speed  the 
power  increases  as  the  pressure  falls  and  the  volume  of 
air  increases, 


TRANSPORT  249 

Rotary  Blower. — This  machine  is  designed  to  maintain 
constant  blasts  of  small  capacity,  and  is  chiefly  used  for 
forge-smiths'  fires,  furnaces,  heating  and  drying  stores, 
glass  blowing,  brass  smelting  and  gas  exhausting,  besides 
the  circulation  of  gases  where  high  pressures  up  to 
15  pounds  per  square  inch  are  required.  The  action  is 
positive,  and  when  run  at  constant  speed  the  power 
increases  directly  with  the  pressure,  while  the  volume 
remains  practically  constant.  These  machines  will  run 
for  years  without  repair,  as  their  mechanism  is  simple, 
being  designed  to  scoop  the  gas  at  the  inlet  and  discharge 
it  at  the  outlet,  and  they  are  made  in  large  sizes. 

Compressors. — These  machines  are  used  for  pressures 
considerably  above  that  of  the  atmosphere,  and  as  such 
are  the  development  of  the  last  fifty  years.  All  com- 
pressors operate  by  first  allowing  the  gas  to  flow  into 
a  cylinder  under  its  own  pressure  on  the  so-called  suction 
stroke  of  the  piston,  and  then  on  the  return  stroke,  by 
closing  the  inlet  valve  compressing  the  gas  until  the 
desired  pressure  is  reached,  when  the  delivery  valve 
opens.  The  following  conditions*  should  be  fulfilled  in 
a  good  compressor :  (1)  On  the  suction  stroke  the  cylinder 
should  be  filled  with  the  maximum  mass  of  gas.  (2)  On 
the  compression  stroke  there  should  be  no  loss  of  gas  by 
too  late  closing  of  the  inlet  valves,  nor  should  there  be 
any  leakage  back,  but  the  whole  contents  of  the  cylinder, 
less  the  minimum  clearance,  should  be  discharged  through 
the  outlet  valves.  (3)  The  outlet  valves  should  have 
ample  area  of  opening,  should  open  automatically  on  the 
pressure  in  the  receiver  being  reached  in  the  compression 
cylinder,  and  the  gas  should  be  discharged  at  a  pressure 
as  little  above  that  in  the  receiver  as  possible,  as  excess 
pressure  causes  a  rise  in  temperature,  with  increase  in 
volume,  requiring  a  corresponding  increase  in  the  work 
necessary  to  compress  and  discharge  the  air.  (4)  The 
discharge  valves  should  have  sufficient  width  of  seating 
to  ensure  their  keeping  quite  tight,  so  that  no  loss  by 


250  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

leakage  back  into  the  cylinder  may  take  place.  (5)  The 
valves  should  be  self-adjusting  under  all  speeds  and 
pressures.  (6)  Highest  volumetric  efficiency  should  be 
obtained.  (7)  All  valves  and  pistons  should  be  easily 
accessible  for  examination  and  renewal.  (8)  Wear  and 
tear  should  be  reduced  to  a  minimum. 

Compressors  are  usually  of  the  horizontal  type  for 
slow  speeds  and  of  the  vertical  type  for  high  speeds, 
both  requiring  very  heavy  foundations.  The  horizontal 
type  is  more  accessible  than  the  vertical,  but  needs  a 
larger  flywheel;  but  at  slower  speeds  the  more  even 
turning  of  the  horizontal  type  is  most  marked. 

When  compressing  in  a  single  cylinder  to  the  final 
pressure  desired,  the  water  jacket  of  a  single-stage 
compressor  is  not  sufficient  to  extract  the  heat  of  com- 
pression, and  the  compound  compressor,  with  intercooler, 
should  always  be  adopted  when  the  most  economical 
results  are  required.  The  rise  in  temperature  not  only 
represents  the  loss  of  work  in  compression,  but,  should 
it  exceed  the  ignition  temperature  of  the  lubricating  oil, 
an  explosion  may  result.  To  prevent  this,  and  to  obviate 
the  serious  loss  of  efficiency  in  compression  at  high  terminal 
pressures  which  would  be  caused  by  the  heating  of  the 
air,  the  compression  is  carried  out  in  stages  in  a  compound 
compressor,  with  intercoolers  to  cool  the  air  between  each 
stage  of  the  compression.  The  intercooler  should  be  of 
sufficient  capacity  to  reduce  considerably  the  temperature 
of  the  gas  before  it  is  admitted  to  the  second-stage  cylinder. 
Provided  the  work  is  equally  distributed  between  the 
cylinders  and  the  intercoolers  are  properly  designed,  the 
final  temperature  in  each  cylinder  will  be  the  same, 
and  the  final  temperature  of  compression  very  much  lower 
than  if  the  compression  were  done  in  one  cylinder,  with 
corresponding  direct  saving  in  power,  as  the  resistance 
due  to  compression  is  directly  proportional  to  changes  in 
temperature.  The  compounding  of  the  air  cylinders 
should  be  so  proportioned  as  to  divide  the  work  of 


TRANSPORT 


251 


compression  equally  between  them,  and  thus  distribute 
the  load  more  equally  throughout  the  stroke,  thereby 
admitting  of  an  earlier  cut-off  on  the  steam  cylinders, 
with  attendant  economy  in  steam  consumption. 


Compressors  may  be  classified  according  to  the  manner 
in  which  their  inlet  and  discharge  valves  are  actuated: 
(1)  Inlet  and  outlet  poppet  valves  arranged  (a)  in  the 


252  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

cylinder  covers;  (6)  partly  in  the  cylinder  covers  and 
partly  in  the  cylinder  walls ;  (c)  with  inlet  valves  in  the 
piston  and  discharge  valves  either  in  the  cylinder  covers 
or  walls.  (2)  With  large  hinged  flap  valves  in  the 
cylinder  covers,  and  actuated  similarly  to  poppet  valves. 
(3)  With  mechanically  operated  valves  which  open  and 
close  gradually.  (4)  With  mechanically  operated  inlet 


FIG    175. — VERTICAL,  OPEN-TYPE  AIR  COMPRESSOR. 

valves  and  poppet  discharge  valves.  (5)  Direct  air  con- 
trolled and  balanced  inlet  and  discharge  valves.  (6)  Light 
automatic  disc  valves  with  small  lift. 

The  first  four  types  have  a  low  efficiency  and  output, 
owing  to  the  limitations  of  speed  of  the  pistons  due  to 
the  heavy  valves  in  motion,  and  the  air -con  trolled  system, 
although  admitting  of  high  speeds  and  increased  efficiency, 
has  not  been  generally  adopted  owing  to  the  cost  of 
maintaining  the  complicated  valve  gear  in  good  order. 


TRANSPORT  253 

The  automatic  disc  valve  is  the  best  valve  for  practical 
purposes,  as  it  is  silent,  simple,  and  gives  great  efficiency 
at  high  speeds. 

Fig.  174  shows  a  horizontal  type  two -stage  belt-driven 
air  compressor  made  by  Robey  and  Co.,  Lincoln,  and 
Fig.  175  a  vertical  open- type  compressor  made  by  the 
same  firm. 


FIG.  176. — BELT-DRIVEN  THREE-STAGE  COMPRESSOR. 

Probably  the  largest  field  for  compressed  air  is  for 
pressures  up  to  6  atmospheres,  but  the  rapid  progress  of 
the  chemical  industry  has  called  for  higher  pressures 
and  for  the  compression  of  many  other  gases.  The  pro- 
duction of  oxygen  for  welding,  etc.,  of  nitrogen  for  ammonia 
and  nitrates,  of  argon  for  electric  lamps,  depends  upon 
the  liquefaction  of  air  demanding  up  to  200  atmospheres. 
Hydrogen,  chlorine,  carbon  dioxide,  and  sulphur  dioxide 
are  also  stored  under  pressure. 


254  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

Fig.  176  shows  a  belt-driven  3 -stage  stationary  type 
of  small  air  compressor  for  simple  working  made  by  Peter 
Brotherhood,  Ltd.,  Peterborough,  in  which  the  cylinders 
are  water-cooled  and  control  is  effected  by  an  automatic 
governor. 

Fig.  177  shows  an  oxygen  compressor  made  by  this 
same  firm.  It  is  a  four -stage  machine  (2,000  cubic  feet 
per  hour,  250  atmospheres  at  200  r.p.m.)  with  forced 


FIG.  177. — FOUR-STAGE  OXYGEN  COMPRESSOR. 

lubrication,  driven  by  a  two -crank  compound  steam 
engine.  This  type  of  compressor  has  lubrication  suited 
to  the  chemical  nature  of  the  gas  compressed,  and  the 
materials  of  construction  are  also  adapted  to  the  same 
end.  Generally,  the  pump  is  made  of  bronze  of  great 
strength  and  non-corrodible,  except  by  acetylene  and 
similar  gases.  There  is  a  minimum  number  of  joints  to 
give  trouble,  and  the  piston  packing  is  easily  renewable 


TRANSPORT  255 

without  the  use  of  moulded  leather  or  special  piston 
rings. 

Vacuum  Pumps. — These  machines  have  been  dealt  with 
from  time  to  time  in  connection  with  other  types  of  plant 
already  mentioned,  and  are  of  the  wet  and  the  dry  type 
designed  to  give  what  the  ordinary  engineer  terms  a 
perfect  vacuum.  However,  the  production  of  the  ionic 
valve,  the  latest  forms  of  electric  lamps,  vacuum  vessels 
for  holding  liquefied  gases,  etc.,  require  a  high  vacuum, 
which  is  only  limited  by  the  nature  of  the  materials 
used  for  construction.  For  these  purposes  the  high-speed 
rotary  or  molecular  pump,  such  as  the  Gaede,  which 
has  a  porcelain  grooved  disc  half -immersed  in  mercury, 
or  the  Siemens  or  Langmuir  pumps,  which  are  completely 
immersed  in  oil,  will  give  when  working  alone  up  to  a 
vacuum  equal  to  10100  mm.  Hg.  They  are  usually  worked 
in  series  with  a  large  capacity  vacuum  pump  known  as 
a  roughing  pump  and  followed  by  a  diffusion  pump, 
which  consists  of  a  vessel  surrounded  by  a  hot -water  bath 
and  containing  mercury,  which  is  vaporized  continu- 
ously, thus  providing  a  wall  of  vapour  through  which 
the  attenuated  gases  diffuse  to  the  rotary  pump,  a  liquid- 
air  cooled  trap  holding  back  any  straying  mercury  vapour. 
By  this  means  much  higher  vacuums  than  10100  mm.  Hg. 
can  be  obtained  on  an  industrial  scale. 


CHAPTER    IX 
APPENDIX 

Distillation  of  Liquid  Mixtures. — If  the  liquids  do  not 
mix  to  any  appreciable  extent,  each  exerts  its  own  vapour 
pressure  independently  of  the  other  liquids  which  may  be 
present.  The  vapour  pressure  is  the  sum  of  the  vapour 
pressures  of  the  liquids  contained  in  the  mixture.  Such 
a  mixture  will  boil  lower  than  the  lowest  boiling  con- 
stituent, since  the  sum  of  the  vapour  pressures  becomes 
equal  to  that  of  the  atmosphere  at  a  lower  temperature 
than  is  required  for  any  one  constituent.  The  vapour 
of  such  a  mixture  will  contain  all  the  constituents  in  the 
same  proportions  as  the  relative  vapour  pressures  of  the 
liquids  present.  On  distillation  the  distillate  will  contain 
all  the  liquids  present  in  the  proportions  depending  on  the 
relative  vapour  pressures  at  the  temperature  of  distil- 
lation. 

If  the  liquids  are  partly  miscible,  the  vapour  pressure 
of  the  mixture  is  less  than  the  sum  of  the  vapour  pressures 
of  the  constituents.  The  boiling  point  may  be  below 
that  of  the  lowest  boiling  constituent,  or  coincident  with  it, 
or  even  above  it.  The  composition  of  the  distillate  remains 
constant  so  long  as  there  are  two  layers  present,  and  the 
effect  of  distillation  is  to  diminish  the  lower  boiling 
more  rapidly  than  the  higher  boiling  solution.  During 
this  period  the  boiling  point  remains  constant  until  one 
layer  has  disappeared. 

If  the  liquids  are  soluble  in  one  another  in  all  pro- 
portions, the  vapour  pressure  of  the  mixture  is  always  less 
than  the  sum  of  the  vapour  pressures  of  the  constituents 
at  the  same  temperature.  The  composition  of  the 

256 


APPENDIX  257 

vapour  from  this  mixture  bears  no  close  relation  to  the 
composition  of  the  mixture,  but  the  vapour  contains  a 
preponderating  amount  of  the  most  volatile  constituent, 
and  upon  this  fact  rests  the  possibility  of  separating  such 
mixtures  by  fractional  distillation.  No  general  relation- 
ship exists  between  the  boiling  point  of  such  a  mixture 
and  the  boiling  points  of  the  constituents. 

Air  Compression. — When  air  is  subjected  to  pressure  its 
volume  is  reduced  and  its  temperature  is  raised.  If 
during  compression  air  neither  loses  heat  to,  nor  gains 
heat  from,  any  outside  source  it  is  said  to  be  adiabatically 
compressed.  In  this  case  the  temperature  does  not 
remain  steady,  but  rises  throughout  the  operation.  In 
the  case  where  the  heat  due  to  compression  is  removed 
as  quickly  as  it  is  formed,  so  that  the  temperature  of  the 
air  remains  steady  throughout  the  operation,  the  com- 
pression is  said  to  be  isothermal.  When  the  operation  is 
reversed  and  the  air  is  expanded  instead  of  being  com- 
pressed, the  above  holds  true,  but  in  the  reverse  direction 
— e.g.,  the  volume  is  increased  and  the  temperature  is 
decreased.  The  rate  of  increase  of  temperature  of 
air  during  compression  decreases  as  the  compression 
increases,  and  also — what  is  very  important  in  practice — 
it  depends  upon  the  initial  temperature  of  the  air  before 
compression. 

The  rate  of  increase  of  temperature  due  to  compression 
increases  not  only  as  the  initial  temperature  increases, 
but  also  increases  throughout  the  compression  when  com- 
pared with  the  rates  of  increase  of  temperature  throughout 
compression,  of  air  compressed  at  a  lower  initial  tempera- 
ture. For  a  considerable  range  of  temperatures  and 
pressures  of  air,  the  relation  pressure  x  volume  =  constant, 
provided  the  temperature  is  unaltered,  holds  sufficiently 
accurately.  The  effect  of  increase  of  temperature  is  to 
increase  the  volume  of  the  air  if  the  pressure  is  kept 
unaltered,  and  hence  it  follows  from  the  above  relation 
that  increase  of  temperature  will  increase  the  pressure  of 

17 


258  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

air  if :  the  volume  is  kept  unaltered.  The  final  volume  or 
pressure  of  air  under  the  conditions  just  mentioned 
depends  directly  upon  the  final  absolute  temperature 
of  the  air- — e.g.,  a  certain  volume  V  of  gas  under  pressure 
P  at  ^°C.  is  heated  to  Z2°  C.  If  the  pressure  is  kept 

T7   .     V(273+^) 
constant    its    volume    increases    irom  V  to       *    +^  .  -, 

and  if  the  volume  is  kept  constant  its  pressure  increases 
from  P  to  ^fJ3  +  \^-  If  the  Fahrenheit  scale  is  used> 

then  461  must  be  used  in  place  of  273.  The  impor- 
tant facts  to  be  known  in  connection  with  air  com- 
pression are  the  temperature  when  any  given  pressure 
is  reached,  and  the  relative  volume  of  the  air  at  that 
pressure.  It  will  be  seen  from  the  above  that  as  during 
compression  the  temperature  rises,  so  the  pressure 
rises  also;  that  is,  the  back  pressure  of  the  air  on  the 
piston  of  the  compressor  during  compression  is  due 
in  part  to  the  heat  generated  by  the  compression.  Since 
air  is  required  to  be  delivered  at  a  definite  temperature 
and  pressure,  any  rise  of  the  temperature  of  the  air  above 
this  definite  temperature  during  compression  results  in 
setting  up  a  back  pressure  which  has  to  be  overcome 
by  the  prime  mover,  which  is  a  distinct  disadvantage. 
The  required  temperature  of  delivery  is  usually  that  of 
the  free  air  at  the  intake,  hence  the  ideal  compressor 
should  compress  free  air  isothermally.  This  means  that 
in  a  compressor  the  heat  produced  by  compression  must 
be  taken  away  as  quickly  as  it  is  produced.  In  any 
compressor  some  heat  is  removed  by  radiation  and  by 
conduction  through  the  metal  parts  in  contact  with  the 
air,  and  usually  this  operation  is  assisted  by  a  flow 
of  cold  water  round  the  parts  wherever  possible.  The 
cold-water  jacket  is  more  effective  on  the  cylinder  head, 
because  that  portion  is  longer  exposed  to  the  heated 
air  than  any  other  part;  and  it  should  be  noted  that, 
apart  from  other  reasons,  cooling  is  a  necessity  for  obtaining 


APPENDIX  259 

proper  lubrication  and  preventing  firing  in  the  cylinders. 
Further,  it  is  obviously  an  advantage  to  have  a  slow- 
running  compressor,  for,  apart  from  purely  mechanical 
considerations,  the  longer  the  time  allowed  for  the  air 
to  cool,  the  greater  will  be  the  cooling  effected,  and  the 
less  the  power  required  for  compression.  There  are  two 
distinct  operations  in  air  compression  which  should  be 
noted  —  viz.,  (1)  the  compression  of  the  air  to  a  given 
pressure,  and  (2)  the  delivery  of  the  air  from  the  cylinder 
after  the  given  pressure  is  reached.  It  will  be  seen  that 
these  operations  are  the  inverse  of  those  occurring  in  a 
steam-engine  cy  Under.  In  making  any  calculations  as 
to  the  h.p.  required  to  compress  a  given  quantity  of  air 
to  a  definite  pressure,  it  is  best  to  take  values  for  adiabatic 
compression  and  allow  a  small  percentage  for  friction  of 
the  apparatus,  as  a  part  of  the  friction  loss  is  set  off  by 
the  reduction  of  power  required  due  to  cooling  in  actual 
practice.  Assuming  there  is  no  clearance  in  a  cylinder 
of  volume  %  to  which  air  is  admitted  at  a  pressure  plf 
and  that  the  air  is  compressed  to  a  volume  vz  at  a  pressure 
Pz  adiabatically,  the  following  relations  can  be  deter- 
mined : 


1.  Work  done  by  external  air  in  filling  the  cylinder  — 

foot-pounds. 

/p\o-29        i 

2.  Work    of    compression  =  2*463^%  -j  —  J       —  1  !•  foot- 

pounds. 

/P  \0-29 

3.  Work  of  expulsion  =  PiV^--}      foot-pounds. 

The  total  work  done  "is  the  algebraic  sum  of  these 

(  /«  x  0-29  \ 

three,  and  equals  3.463^^1  (  —  j      —  1  1  foot-pounds,  and 

from  this  the  mean  effective  pressure  (M.E.P.)  during  the 

f/#2\°'29       ) 
stroke  equals  3.463^M  (  —  J      -  1  1  in  pounds  per  square 

foot. 

The  question  of  clearance  cannot  be  avoided  in  practice, 


260  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

but  as  the  compressed  gas  in  the  clearance  is  expanded 
on  the  back  stroke  of  the  piston,  it  serves  as  an  additional 
source  of  cooling.  For  pressures  above  100  pounds  per 
square  inch  compressors  work  in  two  or  more  stages, 
according  to  the  ultimate  pressure  desired,  and  inter  - 
coolers  between  the  stages  are  provided  to  assist  in  the 
cooling  required.  In  such  cases  the  stroke  in  each 
cylinder  except  the  last  stage  is  a  complete  compression 
stroke,  without  any  work  of  delivery  being  done,  as  each 
cylinder  compresses  its  air  into  the  volume  of  the  cylinder 
of  the  next  stage.  This  will  modify  any  calculation  for 
the  h.p.  required  for  a  multistage  compressor.  Since  in 
an  air  compressor  the  back  pressure  on  the  piston  is 
greatest  at  the  end  of  its  stroke,  the  compressor  must 
be  kept  in  motion  by  other  means  than  that  of  the  prime 
mover,  and  so  far  this  has  been  effected  by  heavy  fly- 
wheels and  reciprocating  parts.  The  efficiency  of  the 
compressor  largely  depends  upon  securing  the  largest 
possible  mass  of  air  in  the  first  cylinder,  which  should  be 
at  as  low  a  temperature  as  possible,  as  it  is  found  that  a 
difference  of  5°  F.  of  the  air  at  the  intake  secures  a 
saving  of  1  per  cent.  The  inlet  should  have  an  area  not 
less  than  50  per  cent,  of  the  area  of  the  air  piston. 

Belt  Conveyors.  —  The  power  required  varies  very 
much  with  the  design,  but  the  following  formula  may 
be  taken  as  giving  an  average  result: 


33,000 

where  V=  speed  of  belt  in  feet  per  minute;  6  =  weight 
of  belt;  h—  height  of  elevation  in  feet;  Wi  =  maximum 
weight  of  material  on  the  belt  at  any  one  time;  W2  = 
weight  of  material  delivered  per  minute. 

Belting.  —  The  power  transmitted  by  any  belt: 

HP  =£?-*)* 

"  33,000' 


APPENDIX  261 

T  =  tension  in  pounds  on  pulling  side ;  £= tension  in  pounds 
on  slack  sides;  v= speed  of  belt  in  feet  per  minute. 

Size  of  pulley  and  area  of  contact  of  belt  have  no  effect 
on  the  power  transmitted ;  centrifugal  force  reduces 
power  by  10  per  cent,  at  3,000  r.p.m.  and  30  per  cent, 
at  5,000  r.p.m.;  the  arc  of  contact  of  belt  has  consider- 
able influence;  the  greater  the  arc,  the  greater  the  power 
transmitted. 

A  simple  rule  for  belts  is  that  1  foot  per  minute  of  belt 
speed  per  inch  of  width  of  belt  is  safely  equal  to  the 
transmission  of  1  watt  of  electrical  energy;  add  25  per 
cent,  for  light  double  bands  and  60  per  cent,  for  heavy 
double  bands.  This  fixes  a  constant  for  working  tensions 
of  44-24  pounds  pull  per  inch  width  of  belt.  The  extra 
pull  on  the  tight  side  is  obtained  by  dividing  the  total 
output  in  watts  by  the  velocity  in  feet  per  minute  and 
multiplying  by  this  number. 

Rubber  belts  transmit  25  to  40  per  cent,  more  power 
than  leather  for  the  same  arc  of  contact,  but  should  not 
be  used  for  temperatures  above  90°  F. 

Shafting. — For  ordinary  light  shafting  carrying  pulleys, 
H.P.=0-013xD3xN;  for  shafts  carrying  gears,  H.P.= 
0-01xD3xN;  for  heavy  shafting,  H.P.  =  0*008  x  D3x  N 
where  D  =  diameter  of  shaft  in  inches  and  N  =  speed  of 
shaft  in  r.p.m. 

For  wrought-iron  shafts,  the  diameter  in  inches  at  the 

/  TT  T*  x1 
bearings  =  5  x  (  — - — ~  j3.    Distance  between  supports,  when 

no  power  is  taken  off  between,  =  5  %Jd2,  where  d  = 
diameter  in  inches.  In  other  cases  the  distance  is  from 
7  to  12  feet. 

Maximum  safe  loads  in  pounds  per  square  inch  on 
ordinary  bearings  for  shafting:  Wrought  iron  on  cast 
iron  =  250;  wrought  iron  on  gun -metal  or  mild  steel 
on  cast  iron  =  300;  mild  steel  on  gun -metal  =  3  70;  cast 
steel  on  gun -metal  =  600;  flywheel  shaft=250. 


262  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

Refrigerating  Machines. — 25  h.p.  will  cool  15,000 
cubic  feet  of  air  per  hour;  20,000  cubic  feet  of  air 
saturated  at  90°  F.  contains  42  pounds  of  water,  and 
at  60°  F.  contains  17  pounds.  The  amount  of  cooling 
water  required  for  air -compression  machines  in  gallons1 

TT 

per  minute  =-—= —    where  H=heat  to  be  withdrawn 

1UV1l~  J-2) 

from  the  water,  Tx  and  T2  inlet  and  outlet  temperatures 
respectively. 


Low  Boiling-Point  Liquids. — 


Boiling-Point.  \  Melting-Point. 


Ammonia 
Carbon  dioxide 
Ethyl  chloride 
Liquid  air.  . 

-38-5°C. 

-  78-2°  C. 
-19-5°  C. 
-  190°  C 

-  77-34°  C. 
-65-0°  C. 
-141-6°  C. 

Nitrogen 
Oxygen      
Sulphur  dioxide    .  . 

-  195-5°  C. 

-  182-7°  C. 
-  10°  C. 

-210-5°  C. 
-227°  C. 
-76-l°C. 

Freezing  Points  of  Common  Salt  Brine. — 

Freezing-Point, 


Specific  Gravity  at 
15°  C. 
1-037 
1-073 
1-111 
1-150 
1-191 


-  3-7 

-  7-4 
-11-0 
-13-9 
-17-2 


Freezing  Points  of  Calcium  Chloride  Solutions. — 


Specific  Gravity  at 
20°  C. 
1-100 
1-125 
1-150 
1-175 
1-120 
1-225 
1-250 


Freezing  -  Point, 
0  C. 

-  7-8 

-  10-8 
-14-2 

-  18-9 
-24-7 

-  30-8 

-  38-0 


APPENDIX 


263 


Freezing  Mixtures- 
Alcohol  77:  Snow  73  gives  -  30°  C. 
Alcohol  and  C02  solid  gives  -  72°  C. 
Ammonium  chloride  30:  Water  100  gives  -  5-1°  C. 
Ammonium  chloride  25:  Snow  100  gives  -  15-5°  C. 
Ammonium  nitrate  100:  Water  131  gives  -  17-5°  C. 
CaC]2  2HaO  100:  Snow  70  gives  -  50°  C. 
Chloroform  and  C02  solid  gives  -  77°  C. 
Ether  and  C02  solid  gives  -  100°  C. 
S02  liquid  and  C02  solid  gives  -  82°  C. 
66  per  cent.  H2S04  100:  Snow  110  gives  -  37°  C. 

Table  Showing  CaO  in  Milk  of  Lime  at  Varying  Density 

(Mateczel) 


Degree 
Beaumc. 

Per  Cent. 
CaO. 

100  Litres. 

§ 

Per  Cent. 
CaO. 

100  Litres. 

Weight 
Kilos. 

CaO 
Kilos. 

Weight 
Kilos. 

CaO 
Kilos. 

10 

10-60 

125-9 

13-3 

38 

19-72 

149-8 

29-5 

11 

11-12 

127-4 

14-2 

39 

19-80 

149-9 

29-6 

12 

11-65 

129-2 

15-2 

40 

19-88 

149-9 

29-8 

13 

12-16 

130-8 

16-1 

41 

19-95 

150-0 

29-9 

14 

12-68 

132-6 

17-0 

42 

20-03 

150-0 

30-1 

15 

13-20 

134-5 

18-0 

43 

20-10 

150-0 

30-2 

16 

13-72 

136-3 

18-9 

44 

20-16 

150-1 

30-3 

17 

14-25 

138-2 

19-8 

45 

20-22 

150-1 

30-4 

18 

14-77 

139-9 

20-7 

46 

20-27 

150-1 

30-5 

19 

15-23 

141-7 

21-6 

47 

20-32 

150-2 

30-6 

20 

15-68 

143-6 

22-4 

48 

20-37 

150-2 

30-7 

21 

16-10 

145-1 

23-3 

49 

20-43 

150-3 

30-7 

22 

16-52 

146-2 

24-0 

50 

20-48 

150-3 

30-8 

23 

16-90 

146-9 

24-7 

51 

20-53 

150-3 

30-9 

24 

17-23 

147-4 

25-3 

52 

20-57 

150-4 

31-0 

25 

17-52 

147-8 

25-8 

53 

20-62 

150-4 

31-1 

26 

17-78 

148-1 

26-3 

54 

20-66 

150-4 

31-1 

27 

18-04 

148-4 

26-7 

55 

20-70 

150-5 

31-2 

28 

18-26 

148-6 

27-0 

56 

20-74 

150-5 

31-3 

29 

18-46 

148-8 

27-4 

57 

20-78 

150-5 

31-3 

30 

18-67 

149-0 

27-7 

58 

20-82 

150-5 

31-4 

31 

18-86 

149-1 

27-9 

59 

20-85 

150-6 

31-4 

32 

19-02 

149-2 

28-2 

60 

20-89 

150-6 

31-5 

33 

19-17 

149-3 

28-4 

61 

20-93 

150-6 

31-5 

34 

19-31 

149-4 

28-7 

62 

20-97 

150-6 

31-6 

35 

19-43 

149-5 

28-9 

63 

21-00 

150-6 

31-6 

36 

19-53 

149-6 

29-1 

64 

21-03 

150-7 

31-7 

37 

19-63 

149-7 

29-3 

65 

21-05 

150-7 

31-7 

264  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 
Comparison  of  Thermometer  Scales. 

n  Degree  Celsius  —  ^n  Degree  Reaumur  =  32  +  f  n  Degree  Fahrenheit, 
n  Degree  Reaumur  =%n  Degree  Celsius  =  32  +  %n  Degree  Fahrenheit, 
n  Degree  Fahrenheit  =  §(n  —  32)  Degree  Celsius  =f  (n  —  32)  Deg.  E. 


c. 

E. 

F. 

\j  . 

E. 

F. 

/-> 

E. 

F. 

ri 

E. 

F. 

-20 

-16 

_4 

20 

16 

68 

60 

48 

140 

100 

80 

212 

-19 

-15-2 

-2-2 

21 

16-8 

69-8 

61 

48-8 

141-8 

101 

80-8 

213-8 

-18 

-14-4 

-0-4 

22 

17-6 

71-6 

62 

49-6 

143-6 

102 

81-6 

215-6 

-17 

-13-6 

1-4 

23 

18-4 

73-4 

63 

50-4 

145-4 

103 

82-4 

217-4 

-16 

-12-8 

3-2 

24 

19-2 

75-2 

64 

51-2 

147-2 

104 

83-2 

219-2 

-15 

-12 

5 

25 

20 

77 

65 

52 

149 

105 

84 

221 

-14 

-11-2 

6-8 

26 

20-8 

78-8 

66 

52-8 

150-8 

106 

84-8 

222-8 

-13 

-10-4 

8-6 

27 

21-6 

80-6 

67 

53-6 

152-6 

107 

85-6 

224-6 

-12 

-  9-6 

10-4 

28 

22-4 

82-4 

68 

54-4 

154-4 

108 

86-4 

226-4 

-11 

-  8-8 

12-2 

29 

23-2 

84-2 

69 

55-2 

156-2 

109 

87-2 

228-2 

-10 

-  8 

14 

30 

24 

86 

70 

56 

158 

110 

88 

230 

g 

-  7-2 

15-8 

31 

24-8 

87-8 

71 

56-8 

159-8 

111 

88-8 

231-8 

-  8 

-  6-4 

17-6 

32 

25-6 

89-6 

72 

57-6 

161-6 

112 

89-6 

233-6 

-  7 

-  5-6 

19-4 

33 

26-4 

91-4 

73 

58-4 

163-4 

113 

90-4 

235-4 

-  6 

-  4-8 

21-2 

34 

27-2 

93-2 

74 

59-2 

165-2 

114 

91-2 

237-2 

K 

-  4 

23 

35 

28 

95 

75 

60 

167 

115 

92 

239 

-  4 

-  3-2 

24-8 

36 

28-8 

96-8 

76 

60-8 

168-8 

116 

92-8 

240-8 

f\ 

-  2-4 

26-6 

37 

29-6 

98-6 

77 

61-6 

170-6 

117 

93-6 

242-6 

2 

1-6 

28-4 

38 

30-4 

100-4 

78 

62-4 

172-4 

118 

94-4 

244-4 

1 

-  0-8 

30-2 

39 

31-2 

102-2 

79 

63-2 

174-2 

119 

95-2 

246-2 

0 

0 

32 

40 

32 

104 

80 

64 

176 

120 

96 

248 

1 

0-8 

33-8 

41 

32-8 

105-8 

81 

64-8 

177-8 

121 

96-8 

249-8 

f 

1-6 

35-6 

42 

33-6 

107-6 

82 

65-6 

179-6 

122 

97-6 

252-6 

t 

2-4 

37-4 

43 

34-4 

109-4 

83 

66-4 

181-4 

123 

98-4 

253-4 

^ 

3-2 

39-2 

44 

35-2 

111-2 

84 

67-2 

183-2 

124 

99-2 

255-2 

r 

«. 

4 

41 

45 

36 

113 

85 

68 

185 

125 

100 

257 

6 

4-8 

42-8 

46 

36-8 

114-8 

86 

68-8 

186-8 

126 

100-8 

258-8 

7 

5-6 

44-6 

47 

37-6 

116-6 

87 

69-6 

188-6 

127 

101-6 

260-6 

8 

6-4 

46-4 

48 

38-4 

118-4 

88 

70-4 

190-4 

128 

102-4 

262-4 

( 

7-2 

48-2 

49 

39-2 

120-2 

89 

71-2 

192-2 

129 

103-2 

264-2 

10 

8 

50 

50 

40 

122 

90 

72 

194 

130 

104 

266 

11 

8-8 

51-8 

51 

40-8 

123-8 

91 

72-8 

195-8 

131 

104-8 

267-8 

12 

9-6 

53-6 

52 

41-6 

125-6 

92 

73-6 

197-6 

132 

105-6 

269-6 

13 

10-4 

55-4 

53 

42-4 

127-4 

93 

74-4 

199-4 

133 

106-4 

271-4 

14 

11-2 

57-2 

54 

43-2 

129-2 

94 

75-2 

201-2 

134 

107-2 

273-2 

15 

12 

59 

55 

44 

131 

95 

76 

203 

135 

108 

275 

16 

12-8 

60-8 

56 

44-8 

132-8 

96 

76-8 

204-8 

136 

108-8 

276-8 

17 

13-6 

62-6 

57 

45-6 

134-6 

97 

77-6 

206-6 

137 

109-6 

278-6 

18 

14-4 

64-4 

58 

46-4 

136-4 

98 

78-4 

208-4 

138 

110-4 

280-4 

19 

15-2 

66-2 

59 

47-2 

138-2 

99 

79-2 

210-2 

139 

111-2 

282-2 

APPENDIX 


265 


Temperature,  Pressure,  and  Total  Heat  of  Steam,  with 
Corresponding  Vacuum,  reduced  to  a  30-inch  Barometer. 


Vacuum  in 
Inches. 

Absolute  Pres- 
sure, Pounds 
per 
Square  Inch. 

.fc 

H° 

•^  OQ  OTOJJ  H 
1*911  TOOJ, 

Vacuum  in 
Inches. 

Absolute  Pres- 
sure, Pounds 
per 
Square  Inch. 

Temperature 
Degrees  F. 

Total  Heat 
H  from  0°  F. 

0 

14-7 

212 

1178-6 

24-4 

2-744 

138-2 

1156-2 

1 

14-21 

210-4 

1178-2 

24-6 

2-646 

136-8 

1155-8 

2 

13-72 

208-4 

1177-6 

24-6 

2-548 

135-7 

1155-4 

3 

13-23 

206-9 

1177-1 

25-0 

2-450 

133-8 

1154-9 

4 

12-74 

204-9 

1176-5 

25-2 

2-352 

132-3 

1154-4 

5 

12-25 

203-0 

1175-9 

25-4 

2-254 

130-7 

1153-9 

6 

11-76 

201-0 

1175-3 

25-6 

2-156 

129-1 

1153-4 

7 

11-27 

198-7 

1174-6 

25-8 

2-058 

127-3 

1152-8 

8 

10-78 

196-8 

1174-1 

26-0 

1-960 

125-6 

1152-3 

9 

10-29 

194-4 

1173-4 

26-1 

1-911 

124-6 

1152-0 

10 

9-8 

192-5 

1172-7 

26-2 

1-862 

123-6 

1151-7 

10-5 

9-555 

191-3 

1172-4 

26-3 

1-813 

122-7 

1151-4 

11 

9-31 

190-0 

1172-0 

26-4 

1-764 

121-7 

1151-1 

11-5 

9-065 

188-8 

1171-6, 

26-5 

1-715 

120-7 

1150-8 

12 

8-82 

187-1 

1171-1 

26-6 

1-666 

119-7 

1150-5 

12-5 

8-575 

185-9 

1170-8 

26-7 

•617 

118-6 

1150-2 

13 

8-33 

184-7 

1170-4 

26-8 

•568 

117-5 

1149-8 

13-5 

8-085 

183-5 

1170-0 

26-9 

•519 

116-4 

1149-5 

14 

7-84 

182-0 

1169-6 

27-0 

•470 

115-2 

1149-2 

14-5 

7-595 

180-6 

1169-1 

27-1 

•421 

114-0 

1148-8 

15 

7-35 

179-1 

1168-7 

27-2 

•372 

112-8 

1148-4 

15-5 

7-105 

177-6 

1168-2 

27-3 

•323 

111-6 

1148-0 

16 

6-86 

176-0 

1167-7 

27-4 

1-274 

110-2 

1147-6 

16-5 

6-615 

174-4 

1167-2 

27-5 

1-225 

108-9 

1147-2 

17 

6-37 

172-8 

1166-7 

27-6 

1-176 

107-3 

1146-8 

17-5 

6-125 

171-0 

1166-2 

27-7 

1-127 

105-9 

1146-3 

18 

5-88 

169-3 

1165-7 

27-8 

1-078 

104-5 

1145-9 

18-5 

5-635 

167-4 

1165-1 

27-9 

1-029 

103-1 

1145-4 

19 

5-39 

165-6 

1164-5 

28-0 

0-980 

101-3 

1144-9 

19-5 

5-145 

163-5 

1163-9 

28-1 

0-931 

99-6 

1144-4 

20 

4-9 

161-5 

1163-3 

28-2 

0-882 

97-7 

1143-8 

20-5 

4-655 

159-3 

1162-6 

28-3 

0-833 

96-1 

1143-3 

21 

4-41 

157-1 

1162-0 

28-4 

0-784 

94-1 

1142-7 

21-5 

4-165 

155-7 

1161-6 

28-6 

0-735 

91-8 

1142-0 

22 

3-92 

152-2 

1160-5 

28-6 

0-686 

89-7 

1141-4 

22-2 

13-822 

151-2 

1160-2 

28-7 

0-637 

87-4 

1140-6 

22-4 

3-724 

150-3 

1159-8 

28-8 

0-588 

84-9 

1139-9 

22-6 

3-626 

149-1 

1159-5 

28-9 

0-539 

82-5 

1139-2 

22-8 

3-528 

148-0 

1159-2 

29-0 

0-490 

79-3 

1138-2 

23-0 

3-43 

146-9 

1158-8 

29-1 

0-441 

76-1 

1137-2 

23-2 

3-332 

145-7 

1158-5 

29-2 

0-392 

72-3 

1136-1 

23-4 

3-234 

144-5 

1158-1 

29-3 

0-343 

68-8 

j  1135-0 

23-6 

3-136 

143-3 

1157-7 

29-4 

0-294 

64-2 

1  1133-6 

23-8 

3-038 

142-1 

1157-4 

29-5 

0-245 

59-5 

1132-2 

24-0 

2-94 

140-8 

1157-0 

29-6 

0-196 

53-3 

1130-3 

24-2 

2-842 

139-6 

1156-6 

29-7 

0-147 

45-5 

1127-9 

266  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 


Specific  Gravities  of  Soda  Solutions  at  15  C.,  with  Beaume 
Degree  and  Percentages  of  Dry  and  Crystallized  Soda. 


Specific 
Gravity. 

Beaume 
Degree. 

Dry       Cryst.  Soda 
Soda.           10  Aq. 

1  Cubic  Me 
conta 
Dry  Soda 

(Kilos). 

tre  Solution 
ins  — 
Cryst.  Soda 
(Kilos). 

1-007 

I 

0-67             1-807 

6-8 

18-2 

1-014 

2 

1-33             3-587 

13-5 

36-4 

1-022 

3 

2-09             5-637 

21-4 

57-6 

1-029 

4 

2-76 

7-444 

28-4 

76-6 

1-036 

5 

3-43 

9-251 

35-5 

95-8 

1-045 

6 

4-29 

11-570 

44-8 

120-9 

1-052 

7 

4-94 

13-323 

52-0 

140-2 

1-060 

8 

5-71 

15-400 

60-5 

163-2 

1-067 

9 

6-37 

17-180 

68-0 

183-3 

1-075 

10 

7-12 

19-203 

76-5             206-4 

•083 

11 

7-88 

21-252 

85-3 

230-2 

•091 

12 

8-62 

23-248 

94-0 

253-6 

•100 

13 

9-43 

•25-432 

103-7 

279-8 

•108 

14 

10-19 

27-482 

112-9 

304-5 

•116 

15 

10-95 

29-532 

122-2 

329-6 

•125 

16 

11-81           31-851 

132-9 

358-3 

•134 

17 

12-61           34-009 

143-0 

385-7 

•142 

18 

13-16           35-493 

150-3 

405-3 

•152 

19 

14-24           38-405 

164-1 

442-4 

Liquids. 


Specific 

Density 

Specific 

Boiling- 

Gravity 

in  Pounds 

Heat 

Point  in 

Substance. 

(Water  = 

per 

(Water  = 

Degrees 

1-00). 

Cubic 

1-00). 

Cent. 

Foot. 

Alcohol 

0-791 

49 

0-673 

78 

Benzine 

0-85 

53 

0-395 



Ether 

0-723 

45 

0-516 

35 

Mercury 

13-596 

848 

0-033 

357 

Turpentine  (oil  of  ).  . 

0-865 

54 

0-463 

160 

Water  (almost  boil- 

ing) 

0-958 

60 

1-013 

100 

APPENDIX 
Solids. 


267 


Substance. 

Specific 
Gravity 
Water  = 
1-00). 

Density 
n  Pounds 
per 
Cubic 
Foot. 

Specific 
Heat 
(Water  = 
1-00). 

Melting- 
Point  in 
Degrees 
Cent. 

Aluminium  (cast)  .  . 

2-6 

162 

0-212 

625 

Antimony 

6-7 

417 

0-051 

435 

Arsenic        .  . 

5-9 

368 

0-081 



Bismuth 

9-82 

613 

0-031 

260 

Brass 

8-4 

525 

0-094 

900 

Cadmium 

8-6 

539 

0-057 

320 

Charcoal 

0-36 

22 

0-241 



Coal  (anthracite)    .  . 

1-43 

89 

0-241 

—  . 

Cobalt 

8-5 

530 

0-161 

1500 

Coke 

1-0 

62 

0-203 



Copper 

8-8 

550 

0-092 

1090 

Fluorspar 

3-15 

196 

— 

900 

Glass 

2-89 

181 

0-198 

1100 

Gold  

19-3 

1200 

0-032 

1050 

Ice(atO°C.) 

0-92 

57 

0-504 

0 

Iridium 

22-4 

1400 

0-033 

1950 

Iron  (cast) 

7-2 

451 

0-130 

1100 

Iron  (wrought) 

7-7 

485 

0-114 

1600 

Lead 

11-4 

710 

0-031 

325 

Limestone 

3-16 

197 

0-217 

.  — 

Magnesium 

1-74 

109 

0-250 

500 

Manganese 

8-0 

499 

0-122 

— 

Nickel 

8-7 

542 

0-107 

1500 

Oak  

0-86 

54 

0-57 



Palladium 

11-4 

710 

0-059 

1500 

Pine  

0-55 

34 

0-65 



Platinum 

21-5 

1340 

0-032 

1775 

Silver 

10-5 

653 

0-056 

950 

Steel 

7-85 

490 

0-116 

1500 

Sulphur 

2-07 

127 

0-203 

115 

Thallium 

11-8 

736 

0-034 

290 

Tin   

7-3 

455 

0-056 

230 

Zinc.. 

7-12 

445 

0-095 

415 

i 

INDEX 


ABSORPTION  system  of  cold  storage, 

209 

Acid  egg,  236 
—  retort,  nitric,  159 
Aerial  wire  ropeways,  single  wire, 

213 

_ double  wire,  216 

Air     circulation     system     of     cold 

storage,  209 
Air  compression,  257 

—  drying,  103 

—  lift  system,  237 

—  separators,  49 

—  gravity  leg,  50 

—  "Stag,"  51 
Ammonia  compressor,  205 
Apron  conveyor,  229 
Armoured  ceratherm  pumps,  241 
Aspinall  evaporating  pan,  125 

"  Atlas  "  pebble  grinding  mill,  31 

B 

Bag  filter,  70 

Ball  mill,  29 

Bearing  for  centrifugal  spindle,  86 

Belt  conveyor,  226 

power  for,  260 

Belting,  260 
Blower,  rotary,  249 
Boiler,  corrosion,  180 

—  foaming,  181 
Brine-pipe  system,  208 
Bucket  conveyor,  229 

—  "  Weston  "  centrifugal,  84 
Buhrstone  mill,  24 
By-product  coke  oven  retort,  159 


Calciner,  rotary,  169 

Can  ice  system,  206 

Cane-juice  subsider,  57 

CaO  in  milk  of  lime,  263 

Carbon  dioxide  compressor,  206 

Cast-iron  calandria,  129 

Cell  ice  system,  208 

Central  screw  closing  of  filter  press, 

81 
Centrifugal  machines,  84 


Centrifugal  machines,  basket  for,  84 

—  basket  linings,  85 

—  bearings  for  spindle,  86 

—  electric- driven,  90 

—  friction  pulley  for,  90 

—  interlocking  gear,  96 
"Weston"  type,  84 

dressing,  44 

Centrifugal  pumps,  239 

Ceratherm  ware,  236 

Chamber  kiln,  167 

Chamber  press,  75 

Chaser,  10 

Climbing  film  vacuum  pan,  135 

Coal-gas  retorts,  160' 

Coffey  still,  150 

Cold  storage  system: 

air  circulation,  209 

brine  pipe,  208 

direct  expansion,  209 

Column  still,  145 
Combination  tube  mill,  37 
Comparison  of  thermometer  scales, 

264 

Compression  of  air,  257  i 

Compressors : 

—  ammonia,  205 

—  carbon  dioxide,  206 

—  oxygen,  etc.,  253 
Cone  paint  mill,  65 

Continuous  cone  vacuum  dryer,  115 
Continuous  still,  147 
Continuous    water- softening    plant, 
cylindrical,  188 

—  rectangular,  185 
Control  of  temperature,  194 

—  of  dye  vessel,  200 
of  gas  producer,  201 

—  of  jacketed  pan,  199 

of  spinning  rooms,  202 

of  still,  198 

Control  steam  valve,  194 
Conveying  gases: 

—  blowers,  249 

—  chimneys,  246 

—  compressors,  249 

—  fans,  247 
—  liquids: 

—  acid  egg,  236 
pipes,  231 


268 


INDEX 


269 


Conveying  liquids: 

—  Pohle  system,  237 

—  solids: 

bucket  elevators,  217 

—  runways,  212 

—  tipping  waggons,  212 

wheelbarrows,  211 

wire  ropeways,  213 

Conveyors : 

—  apron,  229 

—  belt,  226 

—  bucket,  229 

—  scraper,  223 

—  shaking,  231 

—  worm,  222 
Corrosion  of  boilers,  180 
Cracker,  10 

Crusher,  fine  rotary,  10 

—  jaw-,  1 
Crushing  rolls,  5 

high  speed,  6 

fine,  8 

Crutcher,  68 

D 

Direct  heat  evaporators,  118 
Discharge  valve,  Lassen-Hjort,  188 
Disintegrators,  14 

—  sifter  for,  18 

—  fixing  of,  20 

Distillation  of  liquid  mixtures,  25C 
Double  mixer  for  semi-liquids,  66 
"  Dowson  "  gas  producers: 

pressure,  161 

suction,  163 

bituminous,  163 

Drag  conveyor,  223 

Dresser,  powder,  44 

Dressing  machine,  centrifugal,  47 

Dryer,  mixer,  and  ball  mill,  115 

Dryers,  non- vacuum: 

combination,  101 

"Firman,"  100 

—  "  Hersey,"  101 

—  rotary,  99 
Sturtevant,  107 

—  vacuum: 

continuous  cone,  115 

drum,  112 

"  Johnstone,"  114 

—  rotary,  114 
shelf,  109 

E 
Edge  runner  mill,  10 

granite,  13 

iron,  12 

overhead- driven,  14 

Electric  control,  "  Isothermal,"  197 


Electro-magnetic     separating     ma- 
chines, 52 
Elevating  liquids : 

acid  egg,  236 

Pohle  system,  237 

Elevators,  217 

Evaporating  pan,  "Aspinall,"  124 

open  type,  121 

"Wetzel,"  125 

Evaporators,  118 
—  direct  heat,  119 
Extraction  plant,  152 


Fans: 

—  mixed  flow,  "  Rateau,"  248 

—  radial,  248 
Filter,  bag,  70 
Filter  press: 

frame  type,  72 

—  plates  for,  74 

recessed  type,  75 

clips  for,  78 

double  cloth  system,  79 

—  plates,  79 

methods  of  closing,  79 

central  screw,  81 

hydraulic,  81 

pneumatic,  81 

—  rack  and  pinion,  81 

methods  of  feeding,  82 

"  Firman  "  dryer,  100 
Flight  conveyor,  223 
Flue  heater,  98 
Freezing-point  of  brine,  262 
CaCL,,  262 

—  mixtures,  263 

Friction  pulley  for  centrifugals,  90 
Furnaces : 

—  "Harris,"  171 

—  shafts  for,  172 
—  "  H.  H."  mechanical,  178 

—  muffle,  169 

—  regenerative,  170 

—  reverberatory,  170 

—  roasting,  171 


G 
Gas  compressors,  254 

—  conveyance,  246 

—  retorts,  coal,  160 

*'  Dowson  "  bituminous,  163 

pressure,  161 

suction,  163 

hydrogen,  166 

Gas  valves,  "  Isothermal,"  203 
Grainer,  121 


270      INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 


Grasshopper  conveyor,  234 
Grizzly,  40 


Hand-driven  portable  screen,  42 
Harris  roasting  furnace,  171 

—  shaft,  172 
Heater,  flue,  98 
"Hersey"  dryer,  101 
"  H.  H."   mechanical  roasting  fur- 
nace, 178 

Horizontal  mixer,  65 
Hydraulic  closing  of  filter  press,  81 
Hydrogen  retorts,  Lane  process,  166 


Ice  making : 

—  can  ice,  206 

cell  ice,  208 

—  plate  ice,  208 

Interlocking  gear  for  centrifugals,  96 
Intermittent  water-softening  plant, 

184 

Ironac,  231 
"  Isothermal" : 

—  control  apparatus,  197 

—  gas  valve,  203 

—  steam  valve,  195 

—  superheated  steam  valve,  199 

—  thermometer,  196 


Jaw-crusher,  1 

Jet  condenser,  133 

"  Johnstone"  dryer,  114 

K 

"Kestner"  evaporators: 

climbing  film,  135 

falling  film,  137 

—  quadruple  effect,  139 

—  salting  type,  139 
Kilns: 

—  chamber,  167 

—  lime,  167 

—  rotary,  168 


Lane  hydrogen  retorts,  166 
Lassen-Hjort  water  plant: 

—  cylindrical,  190 

rectangular,  185 

Levigating  mill,  56 

—  plant,  61 

Lightfoot  refrigeration  system,  204 


Lime  kiln,  167 

Lime-soda  water  softening  plant: 

continuous,  185 

intermittent,  184 

Liquid  mixtures,  distillation,  256 
Linings  for  "Weston"  basket,  85 
Low  boiling-point  liquids,  262 
Lubricating  oil  stijl,  158 

M 
Machines : 

—  centrifugal,  84 
dressing,  44 

—  crutching,  68 

—  electro-magnetic  separating,  52 

—  mixing,  61 

—  vibration,  45 
Magnetic  pulley,  55 

Measuring  apparatus,  Lassen-Hjort, 

185 

Mechanical  raker,  225 
Methods  of  closing  filter  press,  81 

—  feeding  filter  press,  82 
Milk  of  lime,  263, 

Mill: 

—  ball,  29 

—  Buhrstone,  24 

—  combination  tube,  37 

—  cone  paint,  65 

—  edge  runner,  10 
granite,  13 

iron,  12 

—  levigating,  56 

—  overhead- driven,  14 

—  pebble,  31 

—  pug,  64 
-  putty,  62 

—  roller,  27 

—  triple  roller,  28 

—  tube,  34 

—  vertical  runner,  26 
Mixer: 

—  double,  67 

—  horizontal,  65 

—  open  drum,  67 

—  undergeared,  68 
Mixing  machinery,  61 
Muffle  furnace,  169 

Multiple  effect  vacuum  pan,  133 
"Multiplex"  evaporator,  141 

N 

"  Newaygo  "  screen,  49 
Nitric  acid  retort,  159 


Open  drum  mixer,  67 
—  evaporating  pan,  121 


INDEX 


271 


Paint  mill,  65 
Pans: 

—  "Aspinall,"  125 

—  steam- jacketed,  122 

—  vacuum,  125 

—  "Wetzel,"  125 
Pebble  grinding  mill,  31 
Permutit,  190 
Petroleum  stills,  154 
Plant: 

—  extraction,  152 

—  levigating,  61 

—  lime-soda,  continuous,  185 
intermittent,  184 

Lassen-Hjort,  cylindrical, 

190 
rectangular,  185 

—  Permutit,  190 
Plate  ice  system,  208 
Pohle  air  system,  237 
Portable  hand-driven  screen,  42 
Pot  still,  159 

Powder  dresser,  44 
Press  filter,  71 

chamber,  75 

frame,  72 

plates,  74 

recessed  type,  77 

clips,  78 

double  cloth  system,  78 

-  plates,  79 

methods  of  closing : 

central  screw,  81 

— hydraulic,  81 

pneumatic,  81 

rack  and  pinion,  81 

methods  of  feeding,  82 

Pug  mill,  64 
Pulley,  magnetic,  55 
Pumps,  acid,  centrifugal,  239 
plunger,  238 

—  vacuum,  Gaede,  255 
—  Langmuir,  255 

mercury,  255 

Siemens  oil,  255 

Putty  mill,  62 


•so 

Quadruple  effect  evaporator,  139 

R 
Rack  and  pinion  closing  of   filter 

press,  81  " 
Rectangular  water- softening  plant, 

185 
Rectifying  still,  147 


Reels,  sifting,  43 

Refrigerating  machines,  203,  262 

ammonia,  204 

absorption  system,  209 

carbon  dioxide,  206 

Regenerative  furnaces,  171 
Retorts: 

—  by-product  coke-ovens,  159 

—  coal-gas,  160 

—  "  Dowson  "  bituminous,  163 
pressure,  161 

suction,  163 

—  hydrogen,  166 

—  nitric  acid,  159 
Reverberatory  furnaces,  190 
Roasting  furnace,  171 
Roller  mills,  27 

triple,  28 

Rolls,  crushing,  5 

—  fine,  8 

—  high-speed,  6 
Rotary  blower,  249 

—  calciner,  169 

—  fine  crusher,  10 

—  vacuum  dryer,  114 
Runway  for  mine,  212 


Salting  type  evaporator,  139 
Scraper  conveyor,  223 
Screen,  "  Newaygo,"  49 

—  portable  hand- driven,  42 
Self-recording  hygrometer,  104 

chart,  106 

Separation  by  water,  56 
Separators,  air,  49 

—  electro-magnetic,  53 

—  gravity  leg,  5J 

—  "  Stag,"  5 
Settling  tank,  57 
Shafting,  261 

Shafts  for  roasting  furnace,  172 

Shaking  sifters,  47 

Sifters  for  disintegrators,  18 

Sifting  reels,  43 

Slat  conveyor,  229 

Soap  crutcher,  68 

Softening  of  water,  183 

plant,  continuous,  185 

intermittent,  184 

lime-soda,  184 

Lassen-Hjort,    cylindrical, 

190 

discharge  valve,  188 

measuring      apparatus, 

185 

rectangular,  185 

Permutit,  190 


272  INTRODUCTION  TO  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 


Spindle,  centrifugal  bearing,  86 
"Stag"  ball  mill,  33 
Stamps,  38 

Steam- jacketed  kettle,  123 
—  pans,  122 

—  temperature,  pressure,  and  total 
heat,  265 

—  valve,  "  Isothermal,"  195 
Still: 

—  Coffey,  150 

—  column,  145 

—  continuous,  147 

—  lubricating  oil,  158 

—  petroleum,  154 

—  pot,  159 

—  rectifying,  147 

—  tar,  158 

"  Sturtevant,"  drying  system,  103 

—  hygrometer,  104 
guide  chart,  104 

—  triple  duct  dryer,  107 
Superheated  steam  valve,  199 
Surface  condenser,  133 
Synchronous  speeds  for  centrifugals, 

86 

T 
Tables: 

—  common  liquids,  266 
•  solids,  267 

—  comparison       of      thermometer 
scales,  264 

—  specific  gravity  of  soda  solutions, 
266 

—  total  heat  of  steam,  265 
Tantiron,  233 

-  pumps,  238 
Tar  stills,  158 

Thermometer,  "Isothermal,"   196 
Three-way  tap,  247 
Throw-off  carriage,  226 
Tilting  kettle,  123 
Tipping  waggons,  end,  211 

—  side,  212 
Triple  duct  dryer,  107 

—  roller  mill,  28 
Trommel,  40 
Tube  mills,  34 
Typical  guide  chart,  106 

U 

Undergeared  mixer,  68 
"  Universal"  cone  mill,  66 


Vacuum  dryers: 

continuous  cone,  115 

drum,  112 


Vacuum  dryers: 

—  "  Johnstone,"  114 
mixer  and  ball  mill,  115 

—  rotary,  114 

-  shelf,  109 

—  pan: 

cast-iron  calandria,  129 

copper,  127 

jet  condenser,  etc.,  130 

"Kestner"  climbing  film,  135 

falling  film,  137 

—  quadruple  effect,  139 
salting  type,  139 

—  multiple  effect,  133 

-  "Multiplex,"  141 

—  Torricellian     condenser,    etc., 
130 

—  pumps,  diffusion,  255 
dry,  130 

Gaede,  255 

Langmuir,  255 

Siemens  oil,  255 

-  wet,  130 

Valve,  "  Isothermal  "gas,  203 

steam,  195 

superheated  steam,  199 

Vertical  runner  mill,  26 
Vibration  machines,  45 
Vitreon  ware,  235 
Vitreosate,  236 
Vitreosil,  235 

W 

Warm  air  drying,  103 
Water  separation,  56 

—  softening  plant : 

discharge  valve,  188 

Lassen-Hjort,    cylindrical, 

188 

lime-soda,  continuous,  185 

intermittent,  184 

measuring  apparatus,  185 

Permutit,  190 

—  rectangular,  185 

—  treatment,  179 

chemistry  of  process,  183 

—  impurities,  181 

"  Weston"  centrifugals,  84 

—  basket,  84 
basket  linings,  84 

electric- driven,  91 

—  —  friction  pulley,  90 

—  interlocking  gear,  96 

spindle  bearing,  85 

water-driven,  91 

"  Wetzel"  evaporating  pan,  125 
Worm  conveyor,  222 


BILLING   AND  SONS,    LTD.,   PRINTERS,  OUILDFORD,   ENGLAND 


53T6 


A    LIST   OF    BOOKS 

PUBLISHED    BY 

Sir  Isaac  Pitman  &  Sons,  Ltd. 

(Incorporating  WHITTAKER  &  CO.) 
I    AMEN    CORNER,     LONDON,     E.C.  4 


A  complete  Catalogue  giving  full  details  of  the  following 
books  will  be  sent  post  free  on  application. 


ALL    PRICES   ARE   NET. 

s.  d. 

ALTERNATING-CURRENT  WORK.  W.  Perren  Maycock  .  7  6 
ARITHMETIC  OF  ELECTRICAL  ENGINEERING.  Whittaker's  3  6 
ARITHMETIC  OF  ALTERNATING  CURRENTS.  E.  H.  Crapper  .  3  0 
ARCHITECTURAL  HYGIENE,  OR  SANITARY  SCIENCE  AS 

APPLIED  TO  BUILDINGS.  B.  F.  and  H.  P.  Fletcher  .  6  0 
ART  AND  CRAFT  OF  CABINET  MAKING.  D.  Denning  .  .60 
ASTRONOMY,  FOR  GENERAL  READERS.  G.  F.  Chambers  .  4  0 
ATLANTIC  FERRY:  ITS  SHIPS,  .MEN  AND  WORKING,  THE. 

A.  J.  Maginnis  .          ."  .          .          .          .30 

BAUDOT  PRINTING  TELEGRAPHIC  SYSTEM.  H.  W.  Pendry  3  0 
CALCULUS  FOR  ENGINEERING  STUDENTS.  J.  Stoney  .36 
CARPENTRY  AND  JOINERY:  A  PRACTICAL  HANDBOOK  FOR 

CRAFTSMEN  AND  STUDENTS.  B.  F.  and  H.  P.  Fletcher  7  6 
CENTRAL  STATION  ELECTRICITY  SUPPLY.  A.  Gay  and  C.  H. 

Yeaman  .          .          .          .          .  .          .      12     6 

COLOUR    IN    WOVEN    DESIGN:    A    TREATISE    ON    TEXTILE 

COLOURING.     R.  Beaumont       .          .          .          .  21     0 

COMMON    AND   TECHNICAL   TERMS    IN    THE   ENGLISH    AND 

SPANISH  LANGUAGES.  R.  D.  Monteverde  .  .  .26 
CONVERSION  OF  HEAT  INTO  WORK.  Sir  W.  Anderson  .  6  0 
CONCRETE  STEEL  BUILDINGS:  BEING  A  CONTINUATION  OF  THE 

TREATISE  ON  CONCRETE-STEEL.     W.  N.  Twelvetrees  .      12     0 


5.     d. 

CONTINUOUS-CURRENT     DYNAMO     DESIGN,     ELEMENTARY 

PRINCIPLES  OF.     H.  M.  Hobart  .          ."       t        '."       9     0 

CONCRETE-STEEL:  A  TREATISE  ON  REINFORCED  CONCRETE 

CONSTRUCTION.  W.  N.  Twelvetrees  .  /-  .  .  76 
CONTINUOUS  CURRENT  MOTORS  AND  CONTROL  APPARATUS. 

W.  Perren  Maycock  -      \  \.\       *!'*••  •  •        '     6 

DESIGN    OF   ALTERNATING   CURRENT  MACHINERY.      J.    R. 

Barr  and  R.  D.  Archibald  ?!>,,  ,,.',,  .  .  .  .  15  0 
DIRECT  CURRENT  ELECTRICAL  ENGINEERING.  J.  R.  Barr  12  0 
DISSECTIONS  ILLUSTRATED.  C.  G.  Brodie  |  .  ~  .  .  21  0 
DRAWING  AND  DESIGNING  FOR  MARINE  ENGINEERING.  C. 

W.Roberts  "...  •„  .,-_  \-  -  •  •  .60 
DRAWING  AND  DESIGNING.  C.  G.  Leland  V:^V-  \^'^  Ar  2  6 
DYNAMO:  ITS  THEORY,  DESIGN  AND  MANUFACTURE,  THE. 

C.  C.  Hawkins -and  F.  Wallis.  In  two  vols..  .Each  12  6 
ELECTRIC  LIGHT  FITTING:  A  TREATISE  ON  WIRING  FOR 

LIGHTING,  HEATING,  &c.     S.  C.  Batstone     .  ...       6     0 

ELECTRO  PLATER'S  HANDBOOK.     G.  E.  Bonney         >V       .     .3     6 
ELECTRICAL  ^EXPERIMENTS.  „  :,«,         .       3     0 

ELECTRICAL  INSTRUMENT  MAKING  FOR  AMATEURS.  S.  R. 

Bottone  .          .          .          .          .          .  .          .36 

ELECTRIC   MOTORS:    HOW    MADE   AND    HOW   USED.  S.    R. 

Bottone  .       ,    .  ;       .  .  .  »  .  .        30 

ELECTRIC  BELLS  AND  ALL  ABOUT  THEM.     S.  R.  Bottone  .  2  6 

ELECTRIC  TRACTION.     A.T.Dover.          .,         .          .          .  21  0 

ELECTRICAL  ENGINEERS'  POCKET  BOOK.     K.  Edgcumbe     .  6  0 

ELECTRIC  MOTORS  AND  CONTROL  SYSTEMS.     A.  T.  Dover.  16  0 

ELECTRIC  MOTORS— CONTINUOUS,  POLYPHASE  AND  SINGLE- 
PHASE  MOTORS.     H.  M.  Hobart        .      v /.•;/  *•_;,        .     21     0 

ELECTRIC  LIGHTING  AND  POWER  DJSTRIBUTION.     Vol.   I. 

W.  Perren  Maycock  .          .          .          .          .          .        76 

ELECTRIC  LIGHTING  AND  POWER  DISTRIBUTION.     Vol.  II. 

W.  Perren  Maycock  --..c^i/K'  .  .  .  .  10  6, 
ELECTRIC  WIRING,  FITTINGS,  SWITCHES  AND  LAMPS.  W. 

Perren  Maycock       v        !».'•'  ,  *i       .          .          .       ,,.-•     9     OT 

ELECTRIC  WIRING  DIAGRAMS.     W.  Perren  Maycock        v*  •     3     0. 
ELECTRIC  WIRING  TABLES.     W.  Perren  Maycock  .:     4     0 

ELECTRIC    CIRCUIT    THEORY    AND     CALCULATIONS.       W. 

Perren  Maycock        .  .          j '.    -t     .      '  — -•-     -^^F^    y>    ^g     Q 

ELECTRICAL    MEASURING    INSTRUMENTS.  Murdoch    and 

Oschwald     .^j..,,'.     -,,      f  .',/.,>,",..  y  J.  \  f'L.          .  12  6 

ELECTRIC  TRACTION.     J.  H.  Rider  .  \^'       •  12  6 

ELECTRIC  LIGHT  CABLE!     S.A.Russell.  10  6' 


s.  d. 

ELECTRICITY  IN  HOMES  AND  WORKSHOPS.  S.  F.  Walker  .  6  0 
ELECTRIC  LIGHTING  FOR  MARINE  ENGINEERS.  ,,  .56 

ELECTRICAL  ENGINEERS'  POCKET  BOOK.  Whittaker's  .  6  0 
ELEMENTARY  GEOLOGY.  A.  J.  Jukes-Browne  .  .  .30 
ELEMENTARY  TELEGRAPHY.  H.  W.  Pendry  .  .  .36 
ELEMENTARY  AERONAUTICS,  OR  THE  SCIENCE  AND  PRACTICE 

OF  AERIAL  MACHINES.  A.  P.  Thurston  .  .  .40 
ELEMENTARY  GRAPHIC  STATICS.  J.  T.  Wight  .  .  .50 
ENGINEER  DRAUGHTSMEN'S  WORK:  HINTS  TO  BEGINNERS  IN 

DRAWING  OFFICES  .          .          .          .          .          .          .26 

ENGINEERING  WORKSHOP  EXERCISES.  E.  Pull  .  .26 
ENGINEERS'  AND  ERECTORS'  POCKET  DICTIONARY:  ENGLISH, 

GERMAN,  DUTCH.     W.  H.  Steenbeek  .          .          .26 

ENGLISH  FOR  TECHNICAL  STUDENTS.  F.  F.  Potter  .  .20 
EXPERIMENTAL  MATHEMATICS.  G.  R.  Vine 

Book     I,  with  Answers       .....  9 

„      II,  with  Answers       .          .          .          .          .10 

EXPLOSIVES  INDUSTRY,  RISE  AND  PROGRESS  OF  THE  BRITISH     18     0 

FIELD.  WORK  AND  INSTRUMENTS.     A.  T.  Walmisley          .       60 

FIRST  BOOK  OF  ELECTRICITY  AND  MAGNETISM.    W.  Perren 

Maycock  .          .          .          .          .          .          .          .50 

GALVANIC  BATTERIES:  THEIR  THEORY,  CONSTRUCTION  AND 

-USE.     S.  R.  Bottone         .          .          .          .          .          .76 

GAS,  OIL  AND  PETROL  ENGINES:  INCLUDING  SUCTION  GAS 

PLANT  AND  HUMPHREY  PUMPS.  A.  Garrard  .  .60 
GAS  AND  GAS  FITTINGS.  H.  F.  Hills  .  .  /  .60 

GAS  SUPPLY,  IN  PRINCIPLES  AND  PRACTICE:  A  GUIDE  FOR 
THE  GAS  FITTER,  GAS  ENGINEER  AND  GAS  CONSUMER. 
W.  H.  Y.  Webber 40 

GEOMETRICAL  OPTICS.     T.  H.  Blakesley   .          .          .          .30 

GERMAN    GRAMMAR    FOR    SCIENCE    STUDENTS.       W.     A. 

Osborne  .          .          .          .          .          .          .          .30 

HANDRAILING  FOR  GEOMETRICAL  STAIRCASES.  W.  A. 

Scott  .  .  . 26 

HIGH-SPEED  INTERNAL  COMBUSTION  ENGINES.  A.  W.  Judge  18  0 
HISTORICAL  PAPERS  ON  MODERN  EXPLOSIVES.  G.  W. 

MacDonald      .          .          .          .          .          .          .          .90 

How  TO  MANAGE  THE  DYNAMO.     S.  R.  Bottone       .          .10 
HYDRAULIC  MOTORS  AND  TURBINES.     G.  R.  Bodmer         .     15     0 
INDUCTION  COILS.     G.  E.  Bonney  .          .        .          .60 

'INSPECTION  OF  RAILWAY  MATERIAL.  G.  R.  Bodmer  .  56 

INSULATION  OF  ELECTRIC  MACHINES.     H.  W.  Turner  and 

H.  M.  Hobart  15     0 


s.  d. 

LAND  SURVEYING  AND  LEVELLING.     A.  T.  Walmisley     r,»ijiJ  7  6 

LEATHER  WORK.     C.  G.  Leladd       .       ^.^ ._\'Vl'r ;;.u^  >'v^  5  0 

LEKTRIC  LIGHTING  CONNECTIONS.     W.  Perren  Maycock     .  9 

LENS  WORK  FOR  AMATEURS.     H.  Orford      *4v>^'>  /*?/•*;  3  Q 

LIGHTNING  CONDUCTORS  AND  LIGHTNING  GUARDS.     Sir  O. 

Lodge  .  tf..xai  M*rA'>$  *w.$*yf.;.;{*  .  15  0 
LOGARITHMS  FOR  BEGINNERS.  ;  ^  --VM-I  £i£  r«*:  ^.^ ,-.  j  g 
MAGNETO  AND  ELECTRIC  IGNITION.  W.  Hibbert  '  f*n;'"1  ^*'  3  0 
MANAGEMENT  OF  ACCUMULATORS.  Sir  D.  Salomons  .  A '.•'"  7  6 
MANUAL  INSTRUCTION — WOODWORK.  Barter,  S.  .  '  .  . '  7  6 
,,  DRAWING  ,,  »  ^  ....  4  0 
MANUFACTURE  OF  EXPLOSIVES.  2  Vols.  O.  Guttmann  .  50  0 
MECHANICAL  TABLES,  SHOWING  THE  DIAMETERS  AND  CIR- 
CUMFERENCES OF  IRON  BARS,  ETC.  J.  Foden1  .  ".  2  0 
MECHANICAL  ENGINEERS'  POCKET  BOOK.  Whittaker's  .  5  0 
MECHANICS'  AND  DRAUGHTSMEN'S  POCKET  BOOK.  W.  E. 

Dommett          .,'.   .         •'•..        '•'  '  '"\        >          •          •         — 

METAL  TURNING.     J.  G.  Horner       .       '  .'    '     .       'i",    ',!''  4  0 

METAL  WORK — REPOUSSE.     C.  G.  Leland          '.'.'.,' :*   C""'  ',.  *  5  0 
METRIC  AND  BRITISH  SYSTEMS  OF  WEIGHTS  AND  MEASURES. 

F.  M.  Perkin              .        /jV  ri '"  T  <  >v     -|V '•-.'  '•  \  f>i   "'   '  2  ° 
MINERALOGY:     THE     CHARACTERS     OF    MINERALS,     THEIR 

CLASSIFICATION  AND  DESCRIPTION.     F.  H.  Hatch        .  6  0 

MINING  MATHEMATICS  (PRELIMINARY).     G.  W.  Stringfellow  1  0 
MODERN  ILLUMINANTS  AND  ILLUMINATING  ENGINEERING. 

DowandGaster        .          .          ,          .          .          .          .      15  0 
MODERN   PRACTICE   OF  COAL  MINING.      Kerr  and  Burns. 

Parts       .          .'      /.       '  .        .-.''.'   "  *X'(    -^.  '      •   each  5  ° 

MODERN  OPTICAL  INSTRUMENTS.     H.  Orford    .      f"ft  :'v^...  3  0 

MODERN  MILLING.     E.  Pull     .       '  ,^       ,;.  -•    .,!     T!      .  •  9  0 

MOVING  LOADS  ON  RAILWAY  UNDER  BRIDGES.     H.  Bamford  5  6 
OPTICAL    ACTIVITY    AND     CHEMICAL    COMPOSITION.       H. 

v , '*  Lanbolt            .          .       ;  .''11   yi    "    .'      .'..'.,•;  '^    '•+)?'. ,-.  5  6 
OPTICS    OF    PHOTOGRAPHY    AND    PHOTOGRAPHIC    LENSES. 

J.T.Taylor     .       '   ^       :'\'l '.*   ,.s   '     .'t      ,/fl'V     "  :.  4  0 
PIPES  AND  TUBES:  THEIR  CONSTRUCTION   AND   JOINTING. 

P.  R.  Bjorling       v,.  -^  '  >  ^;v'.,          .      l^j  -'^j  ^  V'-  4  0 
PLANT  WORLD:  ITS  PAST,  PRESENT  AND  FUTURE,  THE.     G. 

Massee    .      ;*<v        .       '".  .•;'••'•';  "  •';." '  ;'*  ^  -™.  '"  ''  .'';";*'  30 

POLYPHASE  CURRENTS.     A.  Still      .      ''••{•  ,'*J :  v^.lii*'V   iOir*  7  6 

POWER  WIRING  DIAGRAMS.     A.  T.  Dover      ir-pr  '*+  •'< <«/>-.> '•  7  ^ 
PRACTICAL  EXERCISES  IN  HEAT,  LIGHT  AND  SOUND.     J.  R. 

Ashworth  2  6 


s.  rf. 

PRACTICAL  ELECTRIC  LIGHT  FITTING.     F.  C.  Allsop  .       6     0 

PRACTICAL  EXERCISES   IN  MAGNETISM   AND  ELECTRICITY. 

J.  R.  Ash  worth         ...  2*   6 

PRACTICAL  SHEET  AND  PLATE  METAL  WORK.  E.  A.  Atkins  7  6 
PRACTICAL  IRONFOUNDING.  J.  G.  Homer  .  .  .60 
PRACTICAL  EDUCATION.  C.  G.  Leland  .  .  .".50 
PRACTICAL  TESTING  OF  ELECTRIC  MACHINES.  L.  Oulton 

and  N.  J.  Wilson     .  .  ..60 

PRACTICAL   TELEPHONE    HANDBOOK    AND    GUIDE    TO   THE 

TELEPHONIC  EXCHANGE.     J.  Poole    .... 
PRACTICAL  ADVICE  FOR  MARINE  ENGINEERS.    C.W.Roberts       3     6- 
PRACTICAL  DESIGN  OF  REINFORCED  CONCRETE  BEAMS  AND 

COLUMNS.     W.  N.  Twelvetrees  .          .          .          ..76 
PRINCIPLES  OF  FITTING.       J.  G.  Homer  .          .          .60 

PRINCIPLES  OF  PATTERN-MAKING     ,,  ...       4     0 

QUANTITIES  AND  QUANTITY  TAKING.  W.  E.  Davis  .  .  40 
RADIO-TELEGRAPHIST'S  GUIDE  AND  LOG  BOOK.  W.  H. 

Marchant          ....  .56 

RADIUM  AND  ALL  ABOUT  IT.     S.  R.  Bottone     .          .          .16 
RAILWAY  TECHNICAL  VOCABULARY.     L.  Serraillier    .          .76 
RESEARCHES  IN  PLANT  PHYSIOLOGY.     W.  R.  G.  Atkins     .       9     0 
ROSES  AND  ROSE  GROWING.     Kingsley,  R.  G.  .          .76 

ROSES,  NEW  ........  9 

RUSSIAN  WEIGHTS  AND  MEASURES,  TABLES  OF.     Redvers 

Elder .  — 

SANITARY  FITTINGS  AND  PLUMBING.    G.  L.  Sutcliffe  .          .60 
SIMPLIFIED  METHODS  OF  CALCULATING  REINFORCED  CON- 
CRETE BEAMS.     W.  N.  Twelvetrees    .  .          .  9 
SLIDE  RULE.     A.  L.  Higgins           .....              6 
SMALL  BOOK  ON  ELECTIC  MOTORS,  A.   C.  C.  AND  A.  C.  W. 

Perren  Maycock.       .          .          .          .          .          .          .50 

SPANISH  IDIOMS  WITH  THEIR  ENGLISH  EQUIVALENTS.     R. 

D.  Monteverde 30 

SPECIFICATIONS  FOR  BUILDING  WORKS  AND  How  TO  WRITE 

THEM.     F.  R.  Farrow 40 

STEEL  WORK  ANALYSIS.  J.  O.  Arnold  and  F.  Ibbotson  .  12  6 
STRESSES  AND  STRAINS:  THEIR  CALCULATION,  ETC.  F.  R. 

Farrow   .          .          .          .          .          .          .          .          .60 

STRUCTURAL  IRON  AND  STEEL.  W.  N.  Twelvetrees.  .  7  6 
SUBMARINES,  TORPEDOES  AND  MINES.  W.  E.  Dommett  .  3  6 
SURVEYING  ANP  SURVEYING  INSTRUMENTS.  G.  A.  T. 

Middleton        .          .          .          ..         .          .          .          .^60 

TABLES  FOR  MEASURING  AND  MANURING  LAND.     J.  Cullyer       3     0 


TEACHER'S  HANDBOOK  OF  MANUAL  TRAINING:  METAI,  WORK. 

J.  S.  Miller       .      ( "  ./tt>,,    '  '"j..,J,  /  *  -\V     4     ° 

TELEGRAPHY:   AN    EXPOSITION    OF   THE   TELEGRAPH   SYSTEM 

OF  THE  BRITISH  POST, OFFICE.     T.   E.   Herbert       '(  .,'  10     6 
,  TEXT    BOOK    OF    BOTANY.      Part    I — THE    ANATOMY    OF 

FLOWERING  PLANTS.     M.  Yates     •t/;i*<  ''".'*  "  "'"V"  '  '  '.il     2     0 

TRANSFORMERS  FOR  SINGLE  AND  MULTIPHASE  CURRENTS. 

G.  Kapp  .      ".      M£  "  •'  '•  r  ;''  .    \  ''  V     12     6 

TREATISE  ON  MANURES.     A.  B.  Griffiths  .     »  . .          .7     6 

VENTILATION    OF    ELECTRICAL    MACHINERY.      W.    H.    F. 
%'       Murdoch  .        .".  ^      .      ,    _. ._ \ 'f, .  ;  , -\      '.**         .        3     6 

VENTILATION,  PUMPING,  AND  HAULAGE,  THE  MATHEMATICS 

OF.     F.  Birks  .       ' ''.' .".    A,"  \       .      «   $      .L         .       3     0 

VILLAGE  ELECTRICAL  INSTALLATIONS.     W.  T.  Wardale      .       2     6 

WIRELESS    TELEGRAPHY   AND    HERTZIAN    WAVES.      S.    R. 

Bottone        .  .'.          .          .          .          .          ,    ,      .          .       30 

WIRELESS    TELEGRAPHY:    A    PRACTICAL    HANDWORK    FOR 

OPERATORS  AND  STUDENTS.     W.  H.  Marchant    .          .       60 

WIRELESS  TELEGRAPHY  AND  TELEPHONY.    W.  J.  White     .       4     0 
WOODCARVING.,    C.  G.  Leland  .          .          .          .          .50 


Catalogue  of  Scientific  and  Technical  Book*  pott  free. 


LONDON:  SIR  ISAAC  PITMAN  &  SONS,  LTD.,!  AMEN  CORNER^. C.4 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 
BERKELEY 

Return  to  desk  from  which  borrowed. 
This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last  date  stamped  below. 


FEB101955LI 


SEP  2 


UBRMW"86 

AOGS 


AUG8     196( 


LD  21-95n*-ll,'50 (2877sl6)476 


YC   18729 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY